JP2020081457A - Pinball game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To achieve a preferable performance for enhancing an amusement in a game.SOLUTION: A pachinko game machine 500 determines a specific performance period in which a specific performance is displayed as a variable performance with respect to reservation of a second lottery value which is acquired with ball entry to a second start hole 12 as a trigger. When a reservation number of the second lottery value is a prescribed value, and a prescribed permission condition is satisfied, in variable display start of a second special pattern 52 in a specific performance period, the pachinko game machine 500 determines a performance pattern of the specific performance with a performance pattern determination reference which is different from that when a reservation number of the second lottery value is not the prescribed value.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 49

Description

The present invention relates to a ball game machine having a game area where a game ball is shot.

Conventionally, among various types of ball game machines, a game machine called a so-called first-class pachinko game machine, while varying a plurality of symbols in a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided in the approximate center of the game board. Display (hereinafter, such a display is referred to as "design change" or "change display"). This gaming machine shifts to a special game called so-called big hit, in which more prize balls than normal games can be obtained when the combination of symbols when a plurality of rows of symbol fluctuations is stopped becomes a specific mode. Known as one. The variable display of the symbols in the display area is not limited to simply displaying the multiple symbols in a variable manner, but the time for variable display is usually in the state where one more symbol is aligned, such as a so-called reach screen, which is a big hit. It is designed to increase the player's expectation, such as making it longer. In addition, the player's expectation is also enhanced by the effect of giving a story to the variable display by using characters in images such as patterns and the notice effect that suggests a high degree of expectation of transition to the special game in advance. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

In recent years, it has been recognized that there is a need to develop a model that is not bound by type in order to further improve game playability. For example, a pachinko gaming machine in which a plurality of gaming machines of the same type are mixed or gaming machines of different types are mixed Is being developed. Also, when a small hit occurs, by passing the game ball through a specific area (V zone) in the variable ball entrance device, it is promoted from "small hit" to "big hit", and a new special game (hereinafter, " A game machine that generates a "small hit development big hit" or "small hit V" has also been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP, 2003-230714, A JP, 2010-29308, A

Small hit development In order to increase the number of balls in a game machine equipped with a big hit, it is necessary for the game ball to pass through a specific area at the time of a small hit, which results in a gaming characteristic different from that of a general game machine. The present inventor has considered that a suitable effect is required to enhance the enjoyment of the game in a game machine equipped with a small hit development big hit.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and its main purpose is to realize a suitable effect for enhancing the interest of a game in a gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problems, a ball game machine according to an aspect of the present invention is a game board in which a game area is formed, a first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and a predetermined position in the game area. To the second starting opening and the second starting opening provided to the first starting opening, and a first winning/losing determination means for executing the first winning/losing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting opening. Second winning/unwinning determination means for executing the second winning/unwinning determination based on the second lottery value acquired upon the entry of the ball, and first changing the first special symbol indicating the result of the first winning/winning determination. Display control means, second display control means for variably displaying the second special symbol showing the result of the second win/fail judgment, the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number of upper limits, the win/loss judgment Hold control means for holding until the start of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to, and the first special symbol is stopped in a mode showing that the result of the first hit/miss judgment is a hit. When displayed, and when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing that the result of the second hit determination is a win, the special game which is in a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game, Special game control means to be executed, effect display device for displaying the effect, effect determination means for causing the effect display device to display the variable effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. And When the second lottery value is held by the hold control means, the first display control means reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning/disapproval judgment, while the second display control means holds the hold control means. Due to this, regardless of whether or not the first lottery value is held, the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning/disapproval determination is started, and the special effect period in which the special effect is displayed as the variation effect for the second lottery value is held It has been determined, the effect determination means, when the number of the second lottery value to be held is a predetermined value and the predetermined permission condition is satisfied at the time of starting the variable display of the second special symbol in the special effect period, 2 The effect pattern of the special effect is determined by using an effect pattern determination standard different from the case where the number of held lottery values is not a predetermined value.

It should be noted that any combination of the above constituent elements, and those in which the constituent elements and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced among methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. Is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to the ball game machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a suitable effect for enhancing the interest of the game.

It is a figure which shows the basic structure in the front side of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the basic structure in the back side of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure showing a functional block of a Pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of a main board. It is a figure which shows the hit/miss determination table typically. It is a figure which shows typically the range setting of the winning/winning lottery value for every setting value. It is a figure which shows a symbol determination table typically. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern table typically. It is a figure which shows typically the prior winning/absence determination table referred by prior prior determination. It is a figure which shows typically the prior winning/absence determination table corresponding to game setting. It is a block diagram showing a configuration of a sub-board. It is a figure which shows the outline of a mobile cooperation system typically. It is a block diagram which shows schematically the hardware constitutions of a main board and a sub-board. It is the block diagram which shows the hardware constitution of the production control device outline. It is a flow chart which shows control start processing of a main substrate in a Pachinko game machine. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change processing of S124 in FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation processing of S126 in FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows details of interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows control start processing of a sub board in a Pachinko game machine. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows interruption processing when a command is received from a main board. It is the flowchart which shows the interruption processing when the timer interruption for production display control occurs. It is a flow chart which shows interruption processing when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU. 6 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. It is a flow chart showing a process of special symbol variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of decorative pattern variable display. It is a flowchart showing a process of a special game. It is a flowchart showing a process of a small hit game. FIG. 31 is a perspective view showing a basic structure of an outer surface of the slot machine. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the housing door portion exposed when the housing door portion is opened. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the housing|casing base exposed when a housing door is opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a functional block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart showing a basic game flow in the slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows schematically the hardware constitutions of a main controller and a sub controller. It is the block diagram which shows the hardware constitution of the production display control section outline. It is a flowchart showing a main program control process of the main control device in the slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing in a main control unit. It is a figure which shows the main game flow of the pachinko game machine of 1st Example. It is a figure which shows the basic structure in the front side of the pachinko game machine of 1st Example. It is a diagram showing a breakdown of the big hit in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation pattern modes. It is a perspective view of a starting opening unit. It is a right view of a starting opening unit. It is sectional drawing of a starting opening unit. It is a figure showing an example of chance production at the time of normal. It is a diagram showing an example of a chance effect during a time saving game. It is a figure which shows the basic structure in the front side of the pachinko game machine of 2nd Example. It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the structure of a special winning opening roughly. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a special winning opening roughly. It is the figure which shows the example of production in the small hitting game. It is a figure which shows the display timing of suggestive effect. It is the figure which shows the example of production. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect following FIG. It is the figure which shows the example of the big hit end demonstration production. It is a time chart about the big hit end demonstration production. It is a figure which shows the example of a hold change lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a hold change lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of a special game end screen. It is a figure which shows the example of a trophy lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the trophy lottery table of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the trophy lottery table of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the trophy lottery table of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the special game completion screen of a modification. It is a diagram showing an example of a chance effect (common to hit and miss) in the fifth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a chance effect (missing) in the fifth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a chance effect (win) in the fifth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a chance effect (per revival) in the fifth embodiment. It is the figure which shows the example of the production picture which relates to explanation production. It is a figure showing the flow of special production in the 1st section of a special production period. It is a figure showing the flow of special production in the 2nd section of a special production period.

(Prerequisite technology)
FIG. 1 shows a basic structure on the front side of a pachinko game machine. The pachinko game machine 100 is mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. The gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine 100 is an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball plate 105, a lower ball plate 106, a firing handle 107, a speaker 108, a production button 109, a cross key 110, It includes a decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 is a frame body having an opening portion for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 100 at a position where it should be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that is aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate 105 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball plate 106. The lower ball plate 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right at the upper part of the door 104, and a sound effect and a music sound according to the game state and the effect are output by means for controlling the effect. Most of the resin member forming the exterior of the door 104 is semitransparent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent portion. The decoration lamp 111 is an LED which emits light in various colors according to the game state, the effect, etc. by means of controlling the effect, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a special winning opening 20, a first operating opening 31, a second operating opening 32, and a general winning opening 33 on a game area 81 divided by a rail 82. , The outlet 34, the effect display device 60, and the center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over the substantially central portion of the game area 81 and the upper portion and the right portion thereof, and the flow path of the game ball and the effect display device. It has functions such as protection of 60 and decoration. At the lower part of the center ornament 64, a stage 65 on which the inflowing game balls roll is formed, and depending on how the balls roll, the falling direction from the stage 65 is the direction to enter the first starting port 11 and the first starting port 11 It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. On the upper part of the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 is provided which is driven according to the contents of the effect and performs an operation like an effect. A mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a windmill (not shown) for forming the flow path of the game ball is installed in the game area 81. In the present specification, "ball entry", "prize" and "drop" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning hole and each ball entrance may be formed of a "passage hole" (also called "gate" or "through chucker") of a type through which a game ball passes. “Prize”, “drop” and “pass” may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting opening 11 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second game. The first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12 are configured so as to be able to aim at one of the balls depending on the strength or weakness of the launch of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided at the lower center of the game area 81, and the second starting port 12 is provided immediately below the first starting port 11. When hitting left, that is, when hitting relatively weakly so as to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, while right-handing That is, if the player hits the ball relatively strongly aiming to flow to the right side passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the second starting opening 12, but cannot enter the first starting opening 11. Or, the flow path is formed by the arrangement of the game nails so that it is difficult to enter the ball. However, since the opening above the second starting port 12 is normally covered with the first starting port 11 and the inflow of game balls is blocked, the second starting port is opened unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened. No. 12 is impossible or difficult to enter. The winning/winning lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game which is advantageous to the player over the normal game, and is executed every time a ball is entered into the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. It

The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to such an extent that they can be targeted for either one depending on the strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be installed separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, and a game ball aiming at one may be difficult to enter the other. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where the ball can enter or can easily enter when left-handed, that is, when the ball is fired relatively weakly so as to flow to the left passage of the center ornament 64. The second starting opening 12 is provided at a position where the ball can enter or can easily enter when the ball is hit to the right, that is, when the ball is relatively strongly fired so as to flow to the right passage of the center ornament 64.

The first starting opening 11 includes a first starting winning detection device 16. The first starting prize detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates the first starting prize information indicating the entering ball at the time of entering the ball. The second starting opening 12 includes a second starting winning detection device 17, an ordinary electric auditors product 90 (so-called electric tulip) which is an expansion mechanism, and an ordinary electric auditors product solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric auditors product 90. Prepare The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates the second start winning information indicating the entry at the time of entering the ball.

The first operation port 31 is provided at the left side position of the game area 81 and includes the first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operation opening 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage when the game ball passes. The second operation port 32 is provided at the right side position of the game area 81, and includes the second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects passage of the game ball to the second actuation port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage when the game ball passes. The passage of the game ball to the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32 is a trigger for the open lottery that determines whether or not the normal electric auditors product 90 should be expanded. When the game ball passes through the first operating opening 31 or the second operating opening 32, the normal symbol, which is the symbol indicating the determination result of the open lottery, is variably displayed on the normal symbol display portion 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also called “ordinary symbol lottery”. After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is stopped. When the normal symbol stops with a winning symbol, the driving force of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 expands the normal electric accessory 90, and the possibility of entering the second starting opening 12 increases. As a modified example, the number of actuating ports may be one, and the structure may be provided at the left side position of the game area 81.

Each of the three general winning openings 33 is provided with a general winning detecting device 38 for detecting a winning of a game ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates the general winning information indicating the entry at the time of entering.

The special winning opening 20 includes a special winning detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a special winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the special winning opening 20. The big winning detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning opening 20, and generates big winning opening winning information indicating the entry at the time of entering. The special winning opening 20 is a horizontal rectangular winning opening that is opened as a "big hit" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined manner. The special winning opening 20 is provided at the upper right position of the outlet 34. As a modified example, another big winning opening may be provided in the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the big winning opening 20 to provide a plurality of big winning openings. The out port 34 is a discharge port for discharging game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports, and is provided with an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball discharged through the out opening 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The outlet 34 is provided at the center bottom end of the game area 81 so that all the game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports can be guided and passed. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be arranged side by side while securing a game ball passage having a sufficient width to prevent the ball clogging of the out port 34.

Below the outside of the game area 81 in the game board 80, the display unit 120 for symbols and the like is arranged. The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display section 41, a second special symbol display section 42, a first special symbol hold display section 71, a second special symbol hold display section 72, a normal symbol display section 45, and a universal symbol. Each display unit such as a hold display unit 75, a game state display unit 76, and an abnormality notification unit 77 is provided. Specifically, the first special symbol display unit 41 corresponding to the first game and the second special symbol display unit 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol. Changes in 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first win/loss lot drawing triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 11, and the special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. As a big hit occurs. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second winning/winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 12, and the special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. As a big hit occurs. The first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are, for example, 8 segment LEDs consisting of 7 segments forming "8" and 1 segment representing "dot". Display device. With an 8-segment LED, a numerical value for 8 bits can be expressed by combining 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 represented by a combination of segments do not necessarily have a body of letters or numbers, and may be generally meaningless symbols formed by a combination of each segment. .. These symbols are displayed at the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42, which are sequentially switched at high speed, or a predetermined display (for example, "-") and non-display (for example, all lights off). The symbol corresponding to the determination result is displayed after being repeated for a predetermined time, whereby the symbol variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. It should be noted that the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 using an LED dot array that is not an 8-segment LED, a plurality of types of first special symbol 51 and second by the combination of the lighting pattern and the lighting color. You may express the special design 52.

Further, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have a role of directing, in the base technology, the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display on the lower left of the game area 81. The portion 42 is displayed in an inconspicuous size. However, in the case of adopting a method of expressing without using a decorative design by giving a special design effect to the special design itself, the special design is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that allows it.

Above the first special symbol display unit 41, the first special symbol hold display unit 71 is provided as a holding lamp for special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display unit 42, the second special symbol hold unit. The second special figure reservation display section 72 is provided as a special design variation reservation lamp corresponding to the game. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 71 consists of 2 lamps, depending on the number of lighting or blinking, the number of winning and losing lottery values in the first game (hereinafter, the number of holding of winning and losing lottery values is (Also referred to as “holding number”) is displayed. The number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation display unit 71 is the number of times (the number) the lottery value is acquired based on winning the first starting opening 11 during the change of the first special symbol 51 or the execution of the special game. Yes, the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed is shown. The second special figure reservation display section 72 also includes two lamps, and displays the number of reservations in the second game depending on the number of lights or blinks. The number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation display unit 72 is the number of times (the number) the lottery value is acquired based on winning the second starting opening 12 while the second special symbol 52 is changing or during the execution of the special game. Yes, the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed is shown. The number of held winning/winning lottery values is also displayed on the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 60 in a form represented by the number of lit holding lamp images.

A normal symbol display section 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol etc. display unit 120. For the sake of convenience, the normal symbol display portion 45 is composed of two lamps, and the lighting state of the two symbols expresses the normal symbol display state. First, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is expressed by displaying the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time by blinking, and finally, the stop symbol of the normal symbol in the combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. Is expressed. For example, a stop pattern of disconnection is expressed by turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp, and a first hitting mode is expressed by turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp. The second manner of hitting is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

Further, on the right side of the normal symbol display portion 45, a general symbol hold display portion 75 is provided as a hold lamp for the normal symbol fluctuation. The ordinary figure hold display section 75 also comprises two lamps, and displays the number of holding of the normal symbol variation depending on the number of lights or blinks. The number of the normal symbol fluctuation is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32 during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the number of normal symbol lottery in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol is not yet executed. Indicates.

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game state display section 76 and an abnormality notification section 77. The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a game state such as a specific game state described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, when the probability is fluctuating, the lamp is lit, the blinking display is displayed when the player is in the easy-to-enter state, and the display is turned off when the player is in the normal state to notify each game state, and the 7-segment LED is displayed while the special game is being executed. The unit game number (round number) executed in the special game is displayed by. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies a part of the abnormality of the gaming machine, and includes, for example, a plurality of lamps, and notifies the abnormality by a lighting pattern according to the type of the abnormality. It should be noted that these display sections may not be collectively arranged in the symbol display unit 120, but each display section may be configured individually, or may be configured by being divided into a plurality of display devices that are appropriately combined. Further, the notification of the game state such as the specific game state may be configured to be performed only during a predetermined period such as a fixed time after the power is turned off.

At approximately the center of the game area 81, the effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative symbol 61 interlocking with the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is provided. The fluctuation of the included effect image is displayed. Hereinafter, such a display will be referred to as “design change” or “change display”.

The effect display device 60 is a display device including a liquid crystal display that variably displays the decorative symbol 61 in a manner that is interlocked with the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. The decorative symbol 61 is a symbol for visually producing the determination result display of the lottery indicated by the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The effect display device 60 displays, as the decorative symbol 61, a moving image in which the symbols in a plurality of columns simulating a game of a slot machine are changed in the central area of the screen. In the base technology, the symbols composed of the numbers “0” to “9” are displayed in three columns and varied, and the winning or losing is indicated by a combination of the three symbols finally stopped and displayed. Each of the plurality of patterns constituting the decorative pattern 61 is composed of numbers, characters, or symbols with color or pattern decorations, but for these numbers, characters, or symbols, a pattern or pattern common to all patterns It may be configured in such a manner that a different pattern is added to each and integrated. This pattern is a pattern in which a motif related to the theme of decoration or effect set for the model of the Pachinko gaming machine 100 is drawn, and may be, for example, a pattern in which a character of a person or an animal is drawn. The decorative pattern 61 is switched according to the development of the production, in the case where the design including the design is variably displayed and in the case where the design is separated and only the numbers, characters, and symbols are variably displayed. It may be configured to be. In the background of the variable display of the decorative pattern 61, a moving image having a directing effect related to the theme of the decoration or the effect set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern change.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, but the width of the display area may be about half the width of the game area, or a large size exceeding half. It may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the effect display device is formed with a passage width that allows one game ball to pass through, and if the player hits with the maximum strength as so-called "right hit", the right passage is almost certain. The game ball can be passed to, and it can be distinguished from the so-called "left hit". The effect display device 60 may be configured not only with a single display device but also with a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of a plurality of liquid crystals, it is possible to combine displays of different sizes such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal, the sub liquid crystal may be arranged in a position adjacent to the main liquid crystal, or a position other than the game board, for example, a firing handle. May be installed in the vicinity (upper bowl, right side decorative lamp, etc.). When installed in the vicinity of the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that allows the player to input operation. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, a mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or a display means such as an LED matrix type. ..

The effect button 109 is an operation input unit that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the game machine according to the effect content, and the effect content or the like is changed according to the pressing mode. The effect button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be projected. The rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 function as a lever 112 in a state of protruding to the outside, and the player can hold the effect button 109 and pull the lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the outer wall surface on the left side of the upper bowl 105.

An outline of a game method and control flow performed in the gaming machine having the above configuration will be described. When the player turns the firing handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper bowl plate 105 are guided one by one to the rails 82 at a strength according to the turning angle and are shot to the game area 81. .. When the player fixes the turning position of the firing handle 107 by hand, the firing of the game ball is repeated at regular time intervals. The game ball shot to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center decoration 64, and the like, and falls in a direction according to the way of hitting. When the game ball falls into each of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the big winning opening 20, the winning ball according to the type of the winning opening is the upper ball plate 105 or the bottom. It is paid out to the ball plate 106. The game balls that have fallen into the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 33 are processed as safe balls, and the game balls that have dropped into the out opening 34 are processed as out balls. The discharge of the safe balls may be excluded from the detection target of the out detection device 39, or the safe balls may be guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all the discharge thereof may be detected by the out detection device 39. May be Alternatively, the specification may be such that the safe sphere is not guided and the safe sphere is not detected by the out detection device 39, and the total of the number of safe spheres detected and the number of out spheres is the total number of discharged spheres.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display portion 45, and is stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to the display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hitting mode or the second hitting mode, the normal electric auditors product 90 is expanded based on the hit state of the symbol that is stopped and displayed and the game state when it is stopped and displayed. .. That is, when the symbol is in the normal gaming state when the symbol is stopped, and when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a short period of 0.1 seconds. Moreover, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hitting mode in the specific game state (for example, easy entry state), the normal symbol is the second hitting mode in the normal time and the specific game state (for example, easy entry state). When the stop display is made, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a long period of 6 seconds. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long opening are set to be different depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (probability that the winning symbol in the first hit mode is selected) is 1/ 3, the long open execution probability (probability of selecting the winning symbol of the second hit mode) is set to 2/3. Also, in the open lottery in the specific game state (for example, the easy-to-enter state), the normal symbol wins with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability of the first hitting mode and the second hitting mode is the same as the normal gaming state. However, it is set so that the long release is executed regardless of the winning in any of the modes. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the variation function of the winning probability of the normal symbol (probability variation from 1/100 to 99/100) and the extension function of the opening time (the opening time when the stop display is displayed in the first hitting mode are 0 By extending from 1 second to 6.0 seconds), the ease of entering the second starting opening 12 is improved. The function of extending the operation period of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (long open) may be referred to as “open extension”.

As described above, in the normal state, the probability of long opening is higher than the probability of short opening, so that when a normal symbol is won, long opening is executed at a constant rate even in the normal state. .. As a modification, in the normal state, on the contrary, the probability that the short opening may be higher than the long opening probability, the specification that both the probabilities are the same, or the specification that the opening is always short Good. In addition, in the easy-to-enter state, it is possible to further enhance the easiness of entering the second starting opening 12 by using three functions including a function of shortening the variation time of the normal symbol. The variation time of the normal symbol in that case is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state, and 2 seconds in the easy entry state. The winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric auditors product 90 may be expanded only when the open lottery is made in the easy-to-enter state. Further, when the normal electric accessory 90 spreads, the fact may be notified in advance, or the suspension of the normal symbol change may be read in advance and notified before the change of the normal symbol is started, or of the normal symbol. It may be notified during the change.

As a modification of the opening mode when the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is increased to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It may be an aspect. Also, a plurality of combinations of the opening time and the number of times of opening may be prepared and any one of them may be selected. For example, in the case of opening 2 seconds three times, the total opening time is the same as in the case of opening 6 seconds once, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is also included. Therefore, in particular, in the configuration of the modification in which the second starting opening 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the player who notices the opening has decided that the hitting direction has been adjusted to the second starting opening 12 from that point onward, and the former enters the ball. It can be said that the opportunity is long. Further, it may be configured such that there are a plurality of hitting types of the normal symbols, and the opening mode of the expanding mechanism may be different depending on the hitting type. For example, if the normal pattern is the first hit, 0.1 seconds open once in the normal state, 1 second open 3 times in the easy-to-enter state, and the second hit, normal state 6 seconds open once, and 2 seconds open twice in the easy-to-enter state.

On the other hand, when entering the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52 in the first special symbol display unit 41, the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60. , And the decorative pattern 61 are variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to the display. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to a variation pattern in which the variation mode from the variation start to the stop is determined. The decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed according to the variation effect pattern in which the variation mode from the variation start to the variation is defined. Plural kinds of fluctuation patterns and fluctuation production patterns are prepared, and each of them has various fluctuation times. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variably displayed according to the variation effect pattern having the same variation time. In the variation pattern, the variation display time is set for each pattern as the ending condition of the symbol variation, and the variation of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 when the variation display time elapses. Be stopped. Hereinafter, the variable display of the decorative pattern 61 displayed according to the variable effect pattern will be illustrated, and the variable effect pattern will be briefly described. The details of the method of determining the variation pattern and the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variable display of the decorative design 61, first, the design is varied in all three rows like the reel rotation of the slot machine at the start of the variation, and the final stop mode is stopped by one row when the variation end timing is approached. The symbol combination is displayed. In addition, as an operation at the time of the variation stop of the decorative pattern 190, it may be controlled so as to stop at a plurality of columns at the same time, not one column at a time, and attention may be given to the effect display other than the decorative symbol during the variable display, with a shorter variation time. You may make it possible to display a symbol variation. Further, as the operation at the time of starting the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 190, the fluctuation start of some columns is controlled to be delayed in accordance with the subsequent development in the fluctuation (type of the effect pattern, etc.) so as to produce an expected feeling. You can

Next, the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. The variation effect pattern includes a normal out effect effect pattern, a reach out effect effect pattern, and a reach jackpot effect effect pattern. The normal deviation effect pattern is an effect pattern when a normal deviation symbol combination is displayed. The out-of-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern for displaying an out-of-symbol combination through the reach state, which is a big hit if one more symbol is aligned. The reach jackpot effect pattern is an effect pattern when a jackpot pattern combination is displayed through the reach state. In particular, patterns that go through a reach state include patterns with various long and short fluctuation times.A reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach." ". The normal deviation effect pattern, the reach deviation effect pattern, and the reach jackpot effect pattern each include a normal pattern displayed in the normal state and a time saving pattern displayed in the time saving state. However, even in the normal state, if it is the second symbol variation corresponding to the ball entering the second starting opening 12, the probability that the big hit is accompanied by a certain change or the probability that the number of unit games of special games will increase is the first. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first fluctuation corresponding to the entry into the first starting opening 11, it is possible to use a chance effect pattern that indicates that it is a chance to generate a relatively advantageous big hit. In the base technology, the time saving pattern is used in the time saving state, but since the probability changing state involves time saving, the time saving pattern is also used in the probability changing state. However, in the modification, the specification may use a probability variation pattern different from the time saving pattern in the probability variation state. Alternatively, the specifications may be such that a common pattern is used for both the time saving and the probability variation, or the specification for using the probability variation pattern in the probability variation state may be used without using the time saving pattern.

In addition, when the number of held winning/winning lottery becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of a deviation is shortened in order to improve game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as “shortening variation”). Similarly, when the number of winning/holding lottery becomes four, the symbol variation time in the case of deviation is further shortened compared to the case of the above three in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "ultra-shortening variation"). ). After the symbol variation described above, when the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52 at the time of stop, and the decorative symbol 61 are in a stop mode showing a big hit, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to the special game, and the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 20 is started. The stop mode of the decorative design 61 indicating a big hit is, for example, a combination mode in which the types of the three designs match.

There are two types of special games, a normal special game and a shortened special game, and there are large differences in the profits depending on the winning prize balls. The normal special game is started by displaying an effect screen called a start demo time. After the start demo time is displayed on the screen, the special winning opening 20 is opened, and the opening is continued for about 30 seconds, or after 9 or more game balls are dropped, it is closed once. The opening to closing of the special winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but a plurality of short-time openings may be repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the special winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 or 16 times, the normal special game is ended by the display of the effect screen called the end demo time. In the normal special game, you can expect 9 or more balls to enter per unit game, and you can get enough prize balls (also called "outgoing ball") by 16 unit games. Is obtained. The special game in which the unit game is repeated 16 times is also appropriately referred to as "16R jackpot", and the special game in which the unit game is repeated 4 times is appropriately referred to as "4R jackpot". Although the unit game is repeated 16 times, a small number of unit games are substantially repeated by opening the special winning opening 20 for a time shorter than usual (for example, 1.6 seconds) in some unit games. It is also possible to realize a normal special game similar to that (sometimes referred to as a "substantial nR jackpot").

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demo time and the end demo time are short or almost none (0.1 seconds, etc.), and the special winning opening 20 is opened for 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to end the shortened special game. In the shortened special game, since the special winning opening 20 is only opened twice for a very short time, the special winning opening 20 can hardly enter the ball, and the special playing is substantially equal to zero. is there. The special game in which the unit game is repeated twice is also referred to as "2R jackpot" as appropriate. Although the number of unit games is the same as the normal special game, the shortened special game can be realized by opening the special winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all the unit games.

In addition, if the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of the stop is a predetermined small hit mode through the above-described symbol variation, a small hit game composed of one unit game. Then, the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 20 is executed. In one unit game which constitutes a small hit game, the special winning opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds, and the appearance is similar to that of a 2R big hit.

When the special game occurs and the hit stop symbol at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), the probability change, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the end of the special game. During the probability change, a win/loss lottery having a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game may occur relatively early. It should be noted that the determination result of the winning/disapproval lottery may not be a specific big hit, that is, a big hit accompanied by a certainty change, but may not be explicitly shown in the appearance, and may be a latent probability change state that is not explicitly notified as a decorative design or effect contents. In this case, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether there is a probable change or a non-probable change even during the probable change. In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be clearly indicated on the effect display device 60 whether it is a probable change or a non-probable change.

In the normal game after the special game is finished, the easy-to-enter state, which is one of the specific game states, is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the extension of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is extended and extended. The number of hits of the normal symbol per certain time can be increased, and the easiness of entering the second starting port 12 is also increased, so that the number of entering the second starting port 12 is also likely to increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting opening 12, it is possible to keep playing with little ball reduction or little by little.

In the easy entry state, as one of the specific game states, a so-called time saving, in which the variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened compared to the normal state, is further executed. The variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is returned to the original variation time after a predetermined number of variations, for example, 100 variations display, but reaches the number of variations. If a big hit happens before, the time saving will end. Because the variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened in a short time, compared to the case of the normal state in which the symbol variation is performed with the normal variation time, until a big hit occurs. Can be shortened and the jackpot can be easily obtained relatively easily. In a modified example, the specification may be such that the special symbol is not shortened in the easy entry state.

FIG. 2 shows a basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and particularly processes all the game operations such as lottery when winning the first start opening 11 and the second start opening 12. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display contents on the effect display device 60, and changes the effect display contents particularly according to the determination result by the main board 200. The back setting mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball plate 105 in accordance with the winning of each winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The shooting device 156 shoots the stored balls of the upper ball plate 105 to the game area 81 one by one. The firing control board 157 controls the firing operation of the firing device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies electric power to each unit of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200. The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number indicating the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of fire balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting changing device 170 is provided on the main board 200. The setting changing device 170 is a device for changing the setting to any of a plurality of settings (also referred to as game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. As game settings, for example, 6-stage settings (setting 1 to setting 6) are prepared, and the probability of a big hit can be varied according to the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specification can be for the player. When the jackpot probabilities from the settings 1 to 6 are M1 to M6, M1≦M2≦M3 The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 has a setting key cylinder 171 into which a setting key possessed by an employee of a game store is inserted, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to any one of a plurality of game settings, and a set setting value. It includes a setting display unit 173 that lights up and displays, and a setting memory that stores the set value that has been set. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turn key type switch for shifting to a state where the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as “setting change state”) or a state where the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as “setting confirmation state”). First, when the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171, and the setting key is turned to be in the on state, and then the power switch 150 is turned on, the state is changed to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as “RWM clear switch”). On the other hand, to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the state is changed to the setting change state, the number “1” indicating the setting 1 is displayed as the initial value of the game setting on the setting display portion 173, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting value displayed on the setting display portion 173 is changed in order such as 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→.... When the setting key inserted in the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the OFF state after the setting is changed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory and the setting change is confirmed. The game is ready for play. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is not switched and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted in the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off, the game becomes possible. In addition, when the setting key is turned off so that the player can play the game, the setting display portion 173 is turned off, and the current set value cannot be visually recognized.

The setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch being pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key OFF state), the RAM clear is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is being pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key ON state), the RAM is cleared and the setting is changed. If the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key off state, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not pressed and the power is turned on in the setting key-on state, the setting confirmation state is entered. The setting display unit 173 may also be used as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the dual-purpose display unit may function as the performance display unit 159 in the playable state, and may function as the setting display unit 173 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting change device 170 may not be provided so that the game settings cannot be changed.

<Function block>
FIG. 3 shows functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the function realized by using each configuration will be described. In this specification, in order to match the physical configuration with the functional configuration, for example, the physical configuration such as the main board 200, the payout control board 155, and the firing control board 157. For the parts already explained as above, the terms may be used as they are for convenience.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 is a power supply board 158 that generates power to be used in the gaming machine based on an AC power supply (AC24V or the like) supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and a main controller that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. Main board 200, a payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling the prize ball payout, a launch control board 157 for controlling the launch of the game ball to the game area, and controlling the production operation and processing. The sub-board 300 as a sub-control device is configured to share the functions.

The main board 200 includes a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a special winning opening 20, a first working opening 31, a second working opening 32, a general winning opening group (first general winning opening 33a, second general winning opening 33a). The mouth 33b), the outlet 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160 are electrically connected, and various control signals are transmitted/received to/from each. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the firing control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a prize ball payout transmitted from the main board 200, a signal indicating the control state of the main board 200, or the like to indirectly control the launch control board 157. And the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154 is controlled. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launching device 156, and the ball feeding device 164, and based on the launch permission signal and the like transmitted from the payout control substrate 155, the ball feeding device 164 and the launching device. The device 156 is controlled to launch a game ball. The sub-board 300 is electrically connected to the effect display device 60, the movable accessory 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), the speaker 108, the effect input operation device 115 (effect button 109, cross key 110), the decorative lamp 111. Are connected to and receive various control signals from each other.

Data transmission/reception between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is in one direction from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. It is arranged on the sub-board 300. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub-board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200. I can't make a request. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Data is bidirectionally transmitted/received between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155 and between the payout control board 155 and the firing control board 157. However, as in the case of between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, data transmission and reception in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, and one direction from the payout control board 155 to the firing control board 157 are performed. Data may be transmitted and received.

The functional blocks included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the firing control board 157, and the sub-board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modification, some of the functional blocks may be replaced with other boards. It may be installed. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the firing control board 157 may be mounted on the payout control board 155. Good. Further, for example, a part of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the main board 200, or the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. May be divided into a plurality of substrates, and one functional block may be configured as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination unit 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation unit 202, a first lottery unit 211, a second lottery unit 212, a preliminary determination unit 235, a public figure lottery unit 213, a hold control unit 240, and a main. Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening/closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, The main error detection means 284, the setting change means 286, the setting confirmation means 287, and the command communication means 205 are provided.

<Entering ball determining means 201>
The entry determination means 201 determines the entry of a game ball into each winning opening. When the ball determining unit 201 receives the first start winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the first starting opening 11, and when the second starting winning information is received, the game ball has won the second starting opening 12. to decide. The winning determination means 201 determines that the game ball has won the special winning opening 20 when the special winning opening winning information is received, and determines that the gaming ball has won the general winning opening 33 when receiving the general winning information. Upon receiving the passage information, the ball entrance determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operating opening 31 or the second operating opening 32. Upon receipt of the discharge information, the entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the outlet 34. The entry ball determining means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and displays it on the performance display unit 159. The incoming ball determination means 201, when the probability of being a big hit is the normal probability state and the normal incoming ball state (so-called low probability and low incoming ball low state), “the number of payout balls”/“the total number of shot balls”×100. The value of is displayed on the performance display unit 159. Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates a random number to be used for various determinations in the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the universal figure lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 uses random numbers (also referred to as “win/win lottery values”) from “0” to “65535” as the random numbers used in the win/win lottery by the first win/loss determination means 221 and the second win/loss determination means 222. A random number in the range is generated by a predetermined means. In addition, the random number generation means 202, as the random number (also referred to as “symbol determination lottery value”) used in the symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227, “0” to “255”. Random numbers in the range up to are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 uses "0" to "255" as the random number (also referred to as "variation pattern determination lottery value") used in the determination of the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232. A random number in the range up to is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 uses a predetermined means to generate a random number in the range of "0" to "99" as a random number used in the winning/winning lottery by the universal figure lottery means 213. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" by the predetermined means as a random number used when determining the normal symbol. The "random number" here is a physical random number generated by a random number generation circuit or a true random number in a mathematical sense, as well as a pseudo random number such as a random number using a 16-bit counter or a software random number using a random number generation algorithm. But it's okay. Alternatively, a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number may be used. The random numbers acquired by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be random numbers generated by the same generating means, or may be random numbers generated by another generating means. ..

<Public drawing lottery means 213>
The general drawing lottery means 213, when the game ball passes through the first operating opening 31 or the second operating opening 32, a random number used for the normal symbol winning and winning lottery and a random number used for determining the normal symbol stop symbol are random number generating means. It is acquired from 202 and lottery is executed. The ordinary symbol lottery means 213 is a normal symbol determination table (not shown) which is referred to for determining whether or not a regular symbol is normal, and a normal symbol determination which is referred to for determining a stop symbol of the normal symbol to be displayed on the normal symbol display section 45. Holds the table and. Correspondence between the lottery value for winning and winning lottery and the winning is normally set in the normal symbol determination table, and the correspondence between the lottery value for stopping symbol determination and the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol determination table, respectively. Based on the hitting probability and the selection probability of the symbol, the winning or stopping of the ordinary symbol and the stop symbol are determined. When the lottery value for the winning/discarding lottery of the ordinary symbol corresponds to the hit, the ordinary symbol lottery means 213 determines the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol by referring to the ordinary symbol determination table, and the lottery value for the winning/discarding lottery of the ordinary symbol is When it corresponds to the deviation, the mode of the deviation pattern of 1 is always determined. The result of the judgment of hitting the normal symbol corresponds to the hit, and when the normal symbol stops in the predetermined symbol (the first hitting mode or the second hitting mode), the opening and closing control means 275, which will be described later, is the mode of the stopped symbol and the game state. Accordingly, the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 is opened. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds when the opening is short and 6 seconds when the opening is long. The lottery value of the normal symbol is temporarily held by the holding control means 240 described later. However, the lottery value is reserved only when the predetermined upper limit number of reservations held by the hold control means 240 is not exceeded.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211, as a function of executing the first lottery related to the first game, the first lottery value acquisition means 216, the first winning/disagreement determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, the first variation pattern determination. The first win/win lottery is executed as a win/win lottery including the means 231 and corresponding to the entry into the first starting opening 11. Based on the results of various kinds of lottery by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 causes the first special symbol display section 41 to display the variation of the first special symbol 51. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication unit 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second winning/disagreement determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to entering the second starting opening 12. The second winning/winning lottery is executed as the winning/winning lottery. Based on the results of various kinds of lottery by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 causes the second special symbol display section 42 to perform a variable display of the second special symbol 52. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication unit 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various kinds of lottery and determination by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 upon the entry into the first starting opening 11. Specifically, the first hit/miss lottery value for hit/damage determination by the first hit/miss determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for stopping mode determination of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determination means 226, the first variation pattern The first pattern lottery values for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determination means 231 are acquired from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires random numbers for various kinds of lottery and determination by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generation means 202 upon the entry into the second starting opening 12. Specifically, the second winning/losing lottery value for winning/unlocking determination by the second winning/winning determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for stopping mode determination of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determination means 227, the second variation pattern The second pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determination means 232 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first win/loss determination means 221 executes a win/loss determination to determine whether to shift to the special game, based on the first win/loss lottery value. The second win/loss determination means 222 executes a win/loss determination to determine whether or not to shift to the special game, based on the second win/loss lottery value. More specifically, in the winning/judgment determination, more specifically, "big hit" indicating that the special game is started, "small hit" indicating that the small hit game is started, and "not hitting the special game or small hit game" is shown. It is determined which of the “off” is applicable. The first hit/miss judgment unit 221 and the second hit/miss judgment unit 222 hold a hit/miss judgment table that is referred to in the hit/miss judgment. In addition, in order to distinguish the win/loss determination executed at the time of starting the symbol variation from the advance win/loss determination to be described later, it is also appropriately referred to as “win/win determination as main determination”. In the present specification, when referring to “table” or “selection criterion”, the correspondence relationship between the first parameter such as a lottery value and the second parameter such as a value indicating an option is strictly defined in a table structure. Not only data but also a case where such correspondence is realized by a program structure for deriving a second parameter from one or a plurality of first parameters are widely included. Including these, the concept is substantially synonymous with “table” and is appropriately referred to as “selection criterion”. When a table structure is used, the selection criterion that is substantially one type may be configured by a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. Shows the number of substantial types of tables, not the number of tables that have been converted.

The first hit determination unit 221 and the second hit determination unit 222 hold tables corresponding to each hit determination as the hit determination tables referred to in the hit determination. Specifically, a win/loss judgment table (also referred to as a “first win/loss judgment table”) for win/loss judgment by the first win/loss judgment means 221 and a win/fail judgment table for win/loss judgment by the second win/loss judgment means 222 (“second (Also referred to as a win/loss judgment table), and a table to be referred to is selected according to the win/loss judgment to be executed. The plurality of win/loss determination tables are associated with the determination results of big hit, small hit, and out and the win/loss lottery value, and the win/loss probability is determined according to the associated big hit range setting. Further, a plurality of types of win/loss determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. For example, for each of the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6, the win/loss determination table in which the correspondence relationship between the win/loss lottery value and the win/loss determination result is different. Is prepared. In addition, when the probability of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss is the same among a plurality of game settings, a win/loss determination table common to a plurality of game settings may be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the hit/miss determination table. This figure shows a win/loss determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a win/loss determination table corresponding to setting 6. In the win/loss judgment table of this figure, the jackpot, small hit, and miss determination results and win/win lottery values are associated with each other. The big hit win probability and the small hit win probability are set according to the associated range settings. Is determined. The first win/loss determination means 221 and the second win/loss determination means 222 refer to the win/loss determination table of this figure in the win/fail determination as the main determination. In both the first win/loss lottery by the first win/loss determination means 221 and the second win/loss lottery by the second win/loss determination means 222, the jackpot is usually won only when the win/win lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. At the time of probability change, the range of the big hit is expanded, and not only when the winning/winning lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299, but also when the win/win lottery value falls within the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the gaming state. In the figure, a single hit/miss judgment table shows both the normal and probabilistic big hit ranges, but the hit/miss judgment table may be prepared separately for normal time and for probability change. You may separately prepare for 1 win/loss lottery and 2nd win/loss lottery.

In the base technology, even if the winning/winning lottery value does not fall within the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, a small win is awarded. In the example of this figure, when the win/loss lottery value acquired by the first win/loss determination means 221 falls within the range of 56500-65535, a small win is achieved, and the win/loss lottery value acquired by the second win/loss determination means 222 is 64000-65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the first winning/winning lottery has a wider range corresponding to the small hit than the second winning/winning lottery, and the small winning is more likely to occur. In this way, if it does not correspond to the big hit, it is originally all “out”, but in the example of this figure, the range of win/win lottery values when it does not correspond to the big hit Is particularly referred to as “out”. In other words, when the “win or lose” is regarded from the viewpoint of “whether or not it is a big hit”, the “small hit” may be included in a broad sense of “out” in the sense that it is not a big hit. Further, when the “win/win” is grasped from the viewpoint of “whether or not to win”, the “small hit” may be included in the “hit” in a broad sense together with the “big hit”. It should be noted that, although an example in which the determination table for determining whether or not a big hit and the determination table for determining a small hit are realized in the form of a single hit/miss determination table is shown in this figure, each table may be realized as a separate table. Good. Further, the "small hit" may be provided in only one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in any game. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding hit/miss determination table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows a range setting of win/win lottery values for each set value. This figure (a) shows the correspondence of the 1st winning/discarding lottery value and the winning/discarding judgment result which the 1st winning/discarding determination means 221 acquires. This figure (b) shows the correspondence between the second win/loss lottery value acquired by the second win/loss determination means 222 and the win/loss judgment result. The range of the first winning/winning lottery value and the second winning/winning lottery value, which is a big hit in the normal time and the probability variation, is 0 to 294 if the setting value is "1", 0 to 295 if the setting value is "2", and the setting value is " If it is "3", it is 0-296, if it is the setting value "4", it is 0-297, if it is the setting value "5", it is 0-298, and if it is the setting value "6", it is 0-299. Therefore, the larger the set value, the larger the range of the winning/winning lottery value which is a big hit in the normal time, and the higher the probability of being the big hit in the normal time. Further, the range of the first winning/winning lottery value and the second winning/winning lottery value, which is a big hit (that is, is out of the normal state) only at the time of probability change, may be 295 to 2949 if the set value is "1", and the set value is "2". 296 to 2959, setting value "3" to 297 to 2969, setting value "4" to 298 to 2979, setting value "5" to 299 to 2989, setting value "6", It is 300-2999. Therefore, the larger the set value is, the larger the range of the winning/winning lottery value which is a big hit at the time of probability change, and the higher the probability of being the big hit at the time of probability change. The range of the winning/winning lottery value is set such that the ratio of the normal jackpot probability that is a jackpot in the normal time and the probability variation jackpot probability that is a jackpot in the probability variation is constant regardless of the set value. In this figure, the range of the winning/winning lottery values is set so that the probability of jackpot probability at the time of probability variation is 10 times that of the jackpot at normal times, and is common to all the set values “1” to “6”. . Further, the range of the winning/winning lottery value is set such that the probability of a small hit is also constant regardless of the set value. For all the set values "1" to "6", a small hit occurs when the range of the first win/loss lottery value is 56500-65535, and a small hit when the range of the second win/loss lottery value is 64000-65535. It becomes a hit. The range of the winning/winning lottery value outside the range of the big win or the small win is “out”. In this figure, the jackpot probability is made different for each set value, but the correspondence relationship between the win/no win lottery value and the win/no win determination result may be set so that the big hit probability is the same between different set values.

<First symbol determining means 226 and second symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stop symbol at the start of the variation of the symbol, based on the result of the symbol lottery value and the winning/losing determination acquired from the random number generating means 202. .. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables to be referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the winning/non-judgment determination by the first winning/prohibition determining means 221, and the second symbol determining means 227 holds the winning/prohibiting result by the second winning/prohibiting determination means 222. A plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the determination result are held. The first hit/miss determination means 221 holds a big hit time first symbol judgment table referred to during a big hit, a small hit time first symbol judgment table referred to during a small hit, and a disengagement first symbol judgment table referred to during disengagement. The second hit determination means 222 holds the big hit time second symbol judgment table referred to at the time of big hit, the small hit time second symbol judgment table referred to at the time of small hit, and the disengagement second symbol judgment table referred to at the time of disengagement. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select the symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the hit/miss determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination executed at the time of starting the symbol variation from the preliminary symbol determination described later, it is appropriately referred to as “the symbol determination as the main determination”.

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the symbol determination table. FIG. 7A is a table to be referred to when the win/loss determination result is a big hit, FIG. 7B is a table to be referred to when the win/loss determination result is missed, and FIG. It is a table to be referred to when the hit/no hit determination result is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of this figure in the symbol determination as the main determination. In each symbol determination table, the correspondence between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value is defined. The types of special symbols are associated with jackpot, small hit, and hit/miss judgment results, respectively, and "0" to "4" correspond to big hits, and "5" to "9" correspond to small hits. "10" corresponds to the disconnection. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by a combination of segments.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol types “0” to “4” are associated with the big hit and the presence or absence of probability fluctuation after the big hit. Specifically, the type “0” indicates a 16R big hit with a certain change as a specific big hit, and is associated with “0 to 99” in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and “0 to 0” in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144". Type “1” indicates a 4R big hit (or “substantially 4R hit”) with a certain change as a specific big hit, and is associated with “100 to 149” in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and in the case of the second symbol lottery value. It is associated with “145 to 149”. The type "2" indicates a 2R big hit with a certainty change, and the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value are both "150 to 189" and the type "2" is associated. The type "3" indicates a 16R big hit without a regular change as a normal big hit, and the type "3" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "4" indicates a 4R big hit that does not normally occur as a big hit, and the type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the contents of the jackpot and the presence or absence of subsequent probability fluctuation) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery value.

It is also possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of types of special symbols, thereby increasing the symbol types and You can set a small number of types. Alternatively, it is also possible to subdivide into more jackpot types corresponding to the increased symbol types. Furthermore, it is possible to provide different symbol types at the time of the first lottery and at the time of the second lottery. In this case, one jackpot type is determined so as to correspond to each of the special symbol types selected in the first lottery and the special symbol types selected in the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the probability variation ratios to be the same in the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the type “10” is associated with the symbol lottery values in the entire range in the case where the hit/miss determination result is out. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol is always stopped and displayed in the case of disengagement. It should be noted that it is possible to provide a plurality of special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the case of detachment.

As shown in FIG. 7C, the special symbol types “5” to “9” are associated with the small hit. The type “5” is associated with the symbol lottery value range “0 to 49”, and the type “6” is associated with the symbol lottery value range “50 to 99”. The type "7" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "100 to 149", the type "8" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "150 to 199", and the type "9" is the range of symbol lottery values. It is associated with “200 to 255”.

In the base technology, in order to save the storage area in the main board 200, the table of FIG. 7 is also referred to as a preliminary symbol determination table in the preliminary symbol determination. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 indicate that the value of “0” to “10” indicating the type of the special symbol as the result of the preliminary symbol determination is the first win/loss lottery or the second win/loss lottery. It transmits to the effect determination means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of holdings. As the preliminary symbol determination table, one that can be further subdivided to enable complex determination, or one that simplifies the determination range of the jackpot symbols that execute similar special games may be used. .. In addition, if the symbols are uniformly set upon detachment as in the base technology, the specific symbol is determined without referring to the obtained symbol lottery value, and without preparing a symbol determination table for detachment. You may.

<First fluctuation pattern determination means 231 and second fluctuation pattern determination means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determination unit 231 acquires from the random number generation unit 202 a variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is determined. It is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determination unit 232, the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is defined, as the second pattern lottery value acquired from the random number generation unit 202. Based on this, it is decided from a plurality of fluctuation patterns. The first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 each determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation by referring to the variation pattern table when starting the symbol variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 execute a preliminary pattern determination of which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first fluctuation pattern determination unit 231, the second fluctuation pattern determination unit 232, and the control unit of the main board 200 refer to the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and the start port. A pre-pattern determination table used for generating information for determining whether to execute the prefetching process is held or shared, respectively when entering the ball. In the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time from the fluctuation start to the stop when the special symbol is variably displayed is defined, and has various fluctuation times depending on its type. That is, in each variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is defined, in effect, the variation display time is determined for each pattern as the ending condition of the symbol variation, and the special symbol when the variation display time elapses. Fluctuations are stopped. The variation pattern determination executed when starting the symbol variation is also referred to as “variation pattern determination as main determination” as appropriate in order to distinguish it from the prior pattern determination. In addition, in order to contribute to the selection of a variation effect pattern of a decorative pattern, which will be described later, there are cases where the variation time is defined as different types of variation patterns with the same variation time.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing the variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 refer to the table of FIG. 7A in the normal state and refer to the table of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), if the result of the judgment is wrong in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, select "super 1" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "super 2" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1" is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, the normal reach "Normal 1" of the pattern range number "2" is selected, and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, the normal reach "Normal" of the pattern range number "3" is selected. Select 2”. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, the pattern range number "4" "out of reach" is selected. As for "reach without loss", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holdings. When the number of holdings is 0 to 2, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds, when the number of holdings is 3, a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds, the number of holdings. When is 4, a variation pattern of 4 seconds is selected.

In this figure, an example in which the variation time is mainly classified into five types will be described. However, a plurality of variation effect patterns are prepared for each variation pattern in the sub-board 300, and there are dozens of variation effect patterns as a whole. Is equivalent to being associated with the lottery value range of each classification.

The range of the pattern lottery values assigned to “normal 1”, “normal 2”, and “out of reach” also differs depending on the number of holdings. When the number of holdings is 0 or 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of holdings increases, the lottery value range of "normal 1" "normal 2" becomes narrower, and the lottery value of "out of reach" The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of holdings is, the wider the lottery value range of the variation pattern having the relatively long variation time is, and the higher the probability that the variation pattern having the longer variation time is selected. Therefore, the smaller the number of holdings, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of holdings, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using the variation pattern table in which the correspondence relationship between the pattern lottery value range and the variation pattern is different for each number of reservations, it is possible to realize control in which a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected when the number of reservations is small.

In the normal state, when the result of judgment of winning is 4R jackpot or 16R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, "super 1" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5" is selected and the pattern lottery value is If it is 124 to 248, "super 2" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6" is selected. When the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, "normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "7" is selected, and when the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, "normal" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "8" is selected. Select 2”.

In the normal state, when the result of judgment of win or defeat is 2R big hit or small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, "super 3" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9" is selected, and the pattern lottery value is If it is 123 to 255, "normal 3" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10" is selected.

When the first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 transmit the pre-determination result as the so-called pre-reading result to the performance determination unit 303, the value (0-10) of the pattern range number is set to the first hit or reject. A value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second winning/discarding lottery and the number of holdings are transmitted. Note that the configuration shown in FIG. 8 exemplifies that a table is provided for each win/no win determination result in the advance pattern determination, but regardless of the win/win lottery result, one pre-pattern determination table is used to determine the random number value. It is also possible to derive only the information regarding whether or not it is located within the range, and to control, on the control means side of the sub-board 300, what kind of variation is to be executed together with the result of prior advance judgment.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B that is referred to in the time saving state, the pattern lottery values are allotted to the variation patterns for time saving. However, the correspondence relationship between the range of the pattern lottery value and the variation time is the same as that in FIG. 8A, except for “reach-less deviation shortening” which is selected by deviation. The “reach-less deviation shortening” is a fluctuation pattern of a relatively short fluctuation time, which is associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as the “reach-less deviation” in FIG. 8A. Also for "reach-less out-of-reach shortening", different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the number of holdings. When the number of holdings is 0 or 1, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds and when the number of holdings is 2 to 4 is a fluctuation pattern of 1 second. Are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or the different variation pattern tables may be referred to according to the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery, and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first lottery, the first lottery is processed in spite of the time-saving, which makes it easier to enter. The situation in which the suspension of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the deviation variation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a variation pattern table is selected such that a variation pattern for a long time (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of holdings. It may be that.

<Holding control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the holding control means 240 includes a special figure holding means 241 and a general figure holding means 242. The special figure reservation means 241, when the first win/loss lottery value or the second win/loss lottery value is newly acquired, the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first win/win lottery value or the second win/loss lottery value acquired before that time. When is displayed, the start of the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the newly acquired first win/win lottery value or the second win/win lottery value is suspended, and the win/win lottery value is stored until the variable display start of the corresponding symbol. Here, for each of the first special symbols, each with an upper limit of 4 pieces, the first winning/missing lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored, and with respect to the second special symbols, each having an upper limit of 4 pieces, The second winning/undrawing lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value are stored. The universal figure holding means 242 stores the universal figure lottery value acquired by the universal figure lottery means 213 as a reserve ball. These numbers of reservations are represented by the numbers of lights or blinks of the first special figure reservation display unit 71, the second special figure reservation display unit 72, and the general figure reservation display unit 75, respectively. The number of holdings by the special figure holding means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

The lottery value of the second winning/winning lottery held in the special figure holding means 241 is preferentially consumed over the lottery value of the first winning/winning lottery, and the symbol variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the lottery value for the big hit is held as the first win/win lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second win/win lottery, the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot lottery value for the first win/win lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if the big hit is held as the first winning/winning lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of continuous big hits can be obtained by continuing to hit until the big winning is held as the second winning/winning lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251, a second special figure control means 252, and a general figure control means 254. The first special symbol control unit 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the first win/loss lottery by the first lottery unit 211. Let The first special symbol control means 251 sets the start condition of the new symbol variation as the fact that the variable display of symbols corresponding to the first win/loss lottery or the second win/loss lottery made before that is finished. The second special symbol control unit 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the second win/loss lottery by the second lottery unit 212. Let The second special symbol control means 252 also sets the start condition of a new symbol variation that the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the first win/loss lottery or the second win/loss lottery made before that is finished.

When the special drawing holding means 241 stores the winning/winning lottery value of the second winning/winning lottery, the first special drawing control means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning/winning lottery. On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second win/win lottery regardless of whether or not the win/win lottery value of the first win/win lottery is stored by the special figure holding means 241. Thereby, when the lottery value is held in both the first win/win lottery and the second win/win lottery, the lottery value held in the second win/win lottery is preferentially read and the symbol variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning/winning lottery is not read and the symbol variation does not start until the number of holdings of the second winning/winning lottery becomes 0.

The first special symbol control unit 251 and the second special symbol control unit 252 vary by the command communication unit 205 described later at the timing of starting and stopping the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (submain). When transmitting the fluctuation start command, the judgment result determined or determined as the main judgment, the stop symbol, the value indicating each of the fluctuation patterns, and the value indicating which of the first win/loss lottery and the second win/loss lottery It transmits to the effect determination means 303 with a fluctuation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) sends a change start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized and the interlocking is maintained. The ordinary figure control means 254 displays the determination result of the lottery by the ordinary figure lottery means 213 on the ordinary symbol display section 45 as a variable display of the ordinary symbol.

<Special figure adjusting means 276>
The special figure adjusting means 276 makes the start of the variable display of the other of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 stand by while the variable display of one is displayed. Special figure adjustment means 276, regardless of the order in which the game ball entered the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, regardless of the order of the second starting symbol into the second starting port 12 The variable display of 52 is prioritized over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first starting opening 11. For example, when both the first win/win lottery value and the second win/win lottery value are held, the second win/win lottery value is always preferentially consumed and the second special symbol 52 is continuously displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the special figure adjusting means 276 in the modified example displays the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in accordance with the order of entering the first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12. It may be selectively variably displayed. For example, when the ball is entered in the order of the first starting opening 11, the first starting opening 11, and the second starting opening 12, the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable order. To be done. In this case, the special figure adjustment means 276 monitors the hold control means 240 and stores the hold order of the winning/winning lottery values. Which special symbol should be changed is determined according to the order of entering the game balls, that is, the order of holding the winning/winning lottery values in the hold control means 240, so that the player can easily visually grasp the order of change.

Even if the special figure adjusting means 276 in another modified example displays the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the order of entering the ball. Good. For example, it is possible to give priority to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first win/win lottery value and the second win/win lottery value are held, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately displayed in a varying manner. Which special symbol should be changed is simply changed alternately regardless of the order of entering the game balls, so that the player can easily perceive the order of change.

Special figure adjustment means 276, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a winning manner, makes the other variable display start waiting. In this case, the variable display of the special symbol is not started during the execution of the special game, so that the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The advance determination means 235 includes a first lottery advance determination means 236 and a second lottery advance determination means 237. The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 is various random numbers acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before execution of various judgments by the first win/loss judgment means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. Before using the first special figure control means 251 to start the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the information regarding the fluctuation is determined in advance. The second lottery pre-determination means 237, the various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before the execution of the various determinations by the second winning/discarding determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Before the fluctuation start of the second special symbol by the second special figure control means 252 using, the information regarding the fluctuation is determined in advance.

The first lottery pre-determination means 236, as the determination table for the pre-determination related to the first lottery means 211, the first pre-winning lottery value determination table, the first pre-symbol lottery value determination table, the first pre-variation pattern random value determination Hold the table. The first lottery advance determination means 236 determines a random number group to which the first win/loss lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs, using the first advance win/win lottery value determination table. The first lottery advance determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs by using the first advance symbol lottery value determination table. The first lottery advance determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs, using the first advance variation pattern determination table. Then, these determination results are temporarily stored as the preliminary determination results, and the command communication unit 205 (sub-control command transmitting unit 207) described later transmits information regarding the preliminary determination results to the sub-board 300.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a prior win/failure determination table that is referred to in advance prior win/failure determination. The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 (pre-win/no-win decision regarding the first game) refers to the first pre-win/win lottery value judgment table in FIG. Is 0 to 299, the value of "1" indicating that is set as the pre-qualification determination result. When the winning/winning lottery value is “300 to 2999”, the value of “2” indicating that is set as the advance winning/winning determination result. When the winning/winning lottery value is "3000 to 56499", the value of "3" indicating that is set as the advance winning/winning determination result. When the winning/winning lottery value is “56500 to 65535”, the value of “4” indicating that is set as the advance winning/winning determination result. Next, referring to the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. .. When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", the value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "230-255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Further, when the first pattern variation random number determination table (not shown) is referred to, if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9," the value "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. .. When the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. When the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the advance determination information set by the first lottery advance determination means 236 (the advance hit determination regarding the first game) is the first start opening 11 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. Information indicating that the player has entered the ball (indicating that it is the first win/loss lot), information that indicates the number of holdings, etc. are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

The second lottery pre-judgment means 237 (pre-judgment regarding the second game) refers to the second pre-winning lottery value judgment table of FIG. When the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the prior win/failure determination result. When the winning/winning lottery value is “300 to 2999”, the value of “2” indicating that is set as the advance winning/winning determination result. When the winning/winning lottery value is “3000 to 63999”, the value “3” indicating that fact is set as the advance winning/winning determination result. When the winning/winning lottery value is “64000 to 65535”, the value of “4” indicating that is set as the advance winning/winning determination result. Next, with reference to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. .. When the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", the value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, when the second pattern variation random number value determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9," the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. .. When the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. When the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the advance determination information set by the second lottery advance determination means 237 (the advance winning/non-execution determination regarding the second game) is the second starting opening 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmitting means 207) described later. Information indicating that the player has entered the ball (indicating that it is the second winning/absence lottery), information that indicates the number of holdings, etc. are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

The various information temporarily stored as the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 is stored in a predetermined preliminary determination result storage area with an upper limit of four as in the case of the number of reserved storages. Note that the preliminary determination result may be stored using the holding storage area stored by the holding control unit 240. The information may be deleted based on the result of the preliminary determination made by the preliminary determination means 235 being transmitted to the effect determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. In this way, by sharing with other areas and erasing information based on the completion of transmission, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected. Further, as the determination table for the preliminary determination, a determination table for the main determination may be used without providing a table dedicated to the preliminary determination, and it is possible to perform the prior winning determination regarding the first game and the preliminary determination regarding the second game. Some or all may share a common pre-determination table. In this way, by sharing with other determination tables, it can be expected that the data capacity of the main board 200 can be reduced. The content transmitted as the determination result of the pre-determination unit 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, only the determination result of the success or failure is transmitted. In addition, the random number values acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 described above without being judged by the pre-judgment means 235, and the sub-board The content of the preliminary determination may be determined by 300.

The pre-determination unit 235 may refer to the pre-winning lottery value determination table in which the correspondence relationship between the win-win lottery value and the pre-winning win-win determination result differs depending on the setting value set by the setting change device 170. Similar to the above win/loss determination table, a plurality of types of advance win/loss lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the advance win/loss lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the setting value of the game setting. In addition, a pre-win/win win lottery value determination table that can be commonly used among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the win/fail may be pre-judged by a combination of the setting value of the game setting and the value of the pre-win/win judgment result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior win/failure determination table corresponding to the game setting. This figure (a) is a prior winning/non-judging table referenced by the first lottery preliminary judging means 236, and this figure (b) is a prior winning/non-judging table referenced by the second lottery preliminary judging means 237. When the winning/winning lottery value is “0 to 294”, the advance winning/winning determination result is “11”, which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit in all the settings 1 to 6. When the win/loss lottery value is "295", the advance win/loss determination result is "12", which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit in the setting 2 or more in the normal time or in all the settings in the probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "296", the advance win/loss determination result is "13", which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit in the setting of 3 or more in the normal time or all the settings in the probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "297", the advance win/loss determination result is "14", which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit in the setting 4 or more in the normal time or in all the settings in the probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "298", the advance win/loss determination result is "15", which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit in the setting 5 or more in the normal time or in all the settings in the probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "299", the advance win/loss determination result is "16", which indicates that the setting 6 in the normal time or all the settings in the probability variation causes a big hit. Further, when the winning/winning lottery value is “300 to 2949”, the preliminary winning/winning determination result is “21”, which means that the jackpot is a big hit in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning/winning lottery value is “2950 to 2959”, the preliminary winning/winning determination result is “22”, which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit in the setting 2 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning/winning lottery value is “2960 to 2969”, the preliminary winning/winning determination result is “23”, which means that the jackpot is a big hit when the probability variation is set to 3 or more. When the winning/winning lottery value is “2970 to 2979”, the preliminary winning/winning determination result is “23”, which means that the jackpot is a big hit in the setting 4 or more at the time of probability variation. When the winning/winning lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the prior winning/winning determination result is "25", which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit when the probability is set to 5 or more. When the winning/winning lottery value is “2990 to 2999”, the preliminary winning/winning determination result is “26”, which means that the setting 6 at the time of probability change is a big hit. Further, when the first win/win lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499" and the second win/win lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the pre-win/win win determination result is " "30", which means a small hit in all settings. Further, when the first win/win lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535" and the second win/win lottery value shown in (b) is "64000 to 65535", the prior win/no win determination result is " 40”, which means that the setting is off in all settings. By using such a pre-win/win judgment table, it is possible to show an appropriate pre-win/win judgment result for each set value of the game setting.

<Special game control means 260>
Special game control means 260, when the first winning/winning lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in the transition to the special game, the special game operation when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode. It is determined that the conditions are met, and the special winning opening 20 is opened to execute the special game. Similarly, the special game control means 260, when the second winning/winning lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in the shift to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode. It is determined that the special game operating condition is established, and the special winning opening 20 is opened to execute the special game.

The special game is a game in which the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 20 is continuously repeated a plurality of times, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 16R jackpot that repeats a unit game 16 times, a 4R jackpot that repeats a unit game 4 times, and a 2R jackpot that repeats a 16R jackpot and a unit game whose opening time is shorter than the 4R jackpot only 2 times. The 16R jackpot is the jackpot in the second win/win lottery, and the 4R jackpot is the jackpot in the first win/win lottery. In the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot, in principle, the special winning opening 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the special winning opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is exhausted. Even when the 2R jackpot is hit, the special winning opening 20 may be opened in the same manner as the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot if the predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Small hit game control means 265>
The small hit game control means 265, when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small hit, the small hit game operation when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small hit manner. It is determined that the conditions have been established, and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the special winning opening 20 to execute the small hit game. Similarly, the small hit game control means 265, when the result of the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicates a small hit, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hit manner, the small hit It is determined that the winning game operating condition is established, and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big winning opening 20 to execute the small hitting game.

In the small hit game, the unit game is executed once, and the special winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in the single unit game. The small hit game control means 265 opens the special winning opening 20 for about 1.6 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the special winning opening 20 to end the small hit game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the probability changing state, the time saving state, and the easy entry state. The specific game control means 270, when the special symbol is the symbol of the specific big hit accompanied by the transition to the probability variation, shifts the gaming state to the probability variation state, the time saving state and the easy entry state after the end of the special game. The probability changing state, the time saving state, and the easy entry state continue until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is generally short. To do. However, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the number of holdings of the win/loss lottery value by the holding control unit 240 is referred to, and the smaller the number of holdings by the holding control unit 240 is, the more easily a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time appears. In the easy-to-enter state, both the normal variation of the symbol and the opening extension of the second starting opening 12 or only the opening extension of the second starting opening 12 is carried out. That is, the specific game control means 270 causes the second starting opening 12 to be in the open extension state when a specific big hit is reached, and the winning probability of the open lottery is further increased only when the win/loss lot is the second win/loss lot. The probability change state is higher than the normal probability state. During the probability change state, the probability that the win/loss judgment result by the first win/failure determination unit 221 and the second win/failure determination unit 222 is a big hit is maintained at a high value.

<Opening/closing control means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls the opening/closing of the ordinary electric auditors product 90 and the special winning opening 20 of the second starting opening 12. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12. The opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting opening 12 in the short time or the long opening time according to the result of the open lottery in the normal state, and in the long opening time in the easy entry state. 2 Open the starting port 12. The ease of entering the second starting opening 12 is improved so that the player can continue the game without reducing the number of balls he holds. The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the special winning opening solenoid 92 to open the special winning opening 20 in the special game.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes control start processing of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when power is restored. The main power disconnection processing execution unit 282 executes a power failure processing such as power shutdown processing in the main board 200 when a power failure such as power shutdown occurs. The main error detection unit 284 executes an abnormality detection process in the main board 200. The control start processing of the main board 200, the abnormality handling processing, and the abnormality detection processing will be described later.

<Setting change means 286, setting confirmation means 287>
The setting changing unit 286 executes "setting changing processing" for changing the game setting. When the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting changing means 286 shifts to the above-mentioned setting changing state. The setting changing unit 286 displays the set value stored in the setting memory on the setting display unit 173 when the setting is changed. The setting changing unit 286 changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 in response to the pressing of the setting change button 172 in the order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→.... , The setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as the value displayed on the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting changing unit 286 ends the setting changing state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes "setting confirmation processing" for confirming the game setting. When the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch when the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. The setting confirming unit 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory when the setting confirmation state is entered. Unlike the setting changing unit 286 described above, the setting confirmation unit 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even when the setting change button 172 is pressed, and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory. do not do. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation unit 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

Note that the setting value data managed in the setting memory may use the numerical values of "0" to "5" instead of the numerical values of "1" to "6". In this case, the setting value “0” corresponds to the setting 1, the setting value “1” corresponds to the setting 2, the setting value “2” corresponds to the setting 3, and the setting value “3” corresponds to the setting 4. The setting value “4” may correspond to the setting 5, and the setting value “5” may correspond to the setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, when the RAM is abnormal, the RAM clear process is performed and the set value data is set to the initial value "0". Can be simplified. Further, when performing some sort of lottery using the set value data, for example, when different tables or data are selected for each set value in the prefetching process, there is an advantage that the offset process for the selection can be simplified. .. For example, when "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, when these values are used as they are as the offset data for the table or data selection, additional processing such as decrementing the start address is necessary. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as it is as the offset data. The setting changing unit 286 and the setting confirming unit 287 may display the numerical values of the setting value data as they are on the setting display unit 173 when using the numerical values of “0” to “5” as the setting value data. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted into the numerical values of setting 1 to setting 6 in the game setting and displayed, so that the display can be easily understood by the administrator of the gaming machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication unit 205 sends a payout control command communication unit 206 that sends a control command necessary for execution of payout and the like to the payout control board 155, and a sub control that sends a control command necessary for execution of production control and the like to the sub board 300. The command transmission means 207 is included. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command for instructing the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening based on the determination of the entrance into each winning opening by the entering determination means 201, and the main board 200. Send a command that indicates the status of the error that occurred in. When starting the symbol variation, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol variation to the effect determining means 303 together with the symbol variation control command.

The sub-control command transmission means 207 changes at the timing when the first special symbol control device 251 and the second special symbol control device 252 start and stop the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (submain). When transmitting the fluctuation start command, the judgment result determined or determined as the main judgment, the stop symbol, the value indicating each of the fluctuation patterns, and the value indicating which of the first win/loss lottery and the second win/loss lottery It transmits to the effect determination means 303 with a fluctuation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) sends a change start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized and the interlocking is maintained. In addition, the sub-control command transmitting unit 207 transmits the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination unit 235 to the effect determining unit 303. After the preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, the winning opening corresponding to the preliminary determination result (the first starting opening 11, the second starting) regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the lottery is immediately started. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the type information of the mouth 12), the information on the number of holdings, the game state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, for the sub-board 300 side, the so-called “look-ahead” process is realized in which the result of prior determination can be presumably recognized in advance based on the received preliminary determination result before the turn of symbol variation starts. Note that the processing based on the preliminary determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmission means 207 is set by the special game control means 260 information about the special game, the small hit game control means 265 information about the small hit game, the general drawing lottery means 213 drawing result information, and the setting change means 286. The setting value information of the game setting is transmitted to the sub-board 300. Further, the sub-control command transmission unit 207 is transmitted to the main substrate 200 or various controls on the main substrate 200, such as information regarding the initial processing by the main initial processing execution unit 280 and the main error detection unit 284 and information regarding errors. Information relating to various signals and the like is appropriately transmitted to the sub-board 300.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a pattern mode determination means 301, a pattern storage means 302, a performance determination means 303, a performance control means 304, a timing means 307, a performance setting means 308, a sub initial processing execution means 360, a sub power interruption processing execution means 362, The sub error detection means 364, the command reception means 370, and the sub side preliminary determination means 371 are provided.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of effect patterns in which the effect image content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 and the display process thereof are determined when the decorative pattern 61 changes. In the production pattern, a plurality of variation production patterns in which the variation process and the production process from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative design 61 are defined, and the variation display of the decorative design are displayed separately and the degree of expectation to the big hit. A plurality of notice effect patterns for suggesting the height of the notice prior to the stop of the variable display are included.

The command receiving unit 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication unit 205, and the sub-side pre-determination unit 371 holds the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication unit 205. The effect determination means 303 includes a normal effect determination means 373 and a prefetch effect determination means 374. The normal effect determination means 373 causes the effect control means 304 to display the effect display device 60 on the effect display device 60 according to the information of the determination result of the first win/win lottery or the determination result of the second win/win lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker. 108, the effect contents to be output to the decoration lamp 111 and the like are determined. The effect determination means 303 determines effect contents according to the set value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205. The prefetching effect determination unit 374 determines the effect contents to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control unit 304 and output to the speaker 108, the decoration lamp 111, etc., according to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication unit 205. . The normal effect determination means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232, and among the plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol transmitted from the command communication means 205. One of them is selected and read from the pattern storage means 302. The normal effect determination means 373 sends the read information of the variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304. The normal effect determination means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. It should be noted that the variation effect pattern may be determined by the normal effect determination means 373 with reference to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the variable effect pattern may be changed together with the content of the prefetch effect by the prefetch effect determination means 374. The effect pattern may be determined in some cases. The pre-reading effect determination unit 374 more accurately specifies the result of the main determination based on the preliminary determination result from the command communication unit 205, the previous preliminary determination result held in the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like, and the determination is performed. Based on the result, whether or not the prefetching effect is executed before the main determination and the execution content thereof are determined. Specifically, the prefetch effect determination means 374 determines whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game, and then shifts to the normal game state based on the pre-determination result prior to the pre-determination result received this time. It is determined whether to do. Based on the result of the determination, the result of the final determination related to the pre-determined result received this time, the variation pattern to be selected, and the like are specified, and whether or not to execute the prefetching effect and the content of execution of the prefetching effect are determined based on the specification result. . Since the effect determining means 303 has many parts in which the normal effect determining means 373 and the prefetching effect determining means 374 cooperate with each other, the effect determining means 303 will be described as the effect determining means 303 including both of them, except for particularly necessary parts.

In each variation effect pattern, a variation time is defined for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation time elapses, the symbol variation is stopped. The effect determination means 303 selects the variable effect pattern of the effect image having the same variable time according to the variable pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determination means 301, the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol 61 and its arrangement, the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, the decoration It is determined according to the variation effect pattern of the symbol. The symbol mode determination means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stop symbols to the effect control means 304. The symbol mode determination means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to in order to determine a stop symbol of a decorative symbol.

The stop symbol of the decorative symbol 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols, for example, when the result of the hit determination by the first hit determination means 221 and the second hit determination means 222 indicates a transition to a special game of 4R big hit or 16R big hit. A specific combination, for example, a combination having three symbols such as “777” or “111” is selected. Also in the case of the 2R big hit or the small hit, the specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as "357" is selected, but the specific combination is not necessarily a combination of three symbols. You don't have to. If the result of the judgment is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination such as "312" or "946" that does not have three symbols, and it is a specific combination selected when a 2R big hit or a small hit. A combination that does not apply is selected. If the result of the hit determination is not a 4R big hit or a 16R big hit, and if a variation pattern showing a reach out is selected, only one symbol such as "191" or "727" is not a combination. Select.

In the variable effect pattern of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, the effect process from the change start to the change stop of the decorative pattern is defined. In the variation production pattern, a pattern when displaying a normal out-of-place design, a pattern when a detached design is displayed after a reach state in which one more design is aligned, and a jackpot design through the reach state The pattern when doing is included. In particular, the patterns that go through the reach state include patterns having various long and short fluctuation times. In each variation effect pattern, a variation time is defined for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation time elapses, the symbol variation is stopped. The effect determination means 303 selects a variable effect pattern of a decorative symbol whose variation time is the same as that of the special symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining unit 231 or the second variation pattern determining unit 232 is a time saving pattern, the effect determining unit 303 changes the effect content for time saving. Select a performance pattern. The time-saving effect content is an effect in which a background image or a sound that gives an impression that the player is in an advantageous state due to the time saving or the probability change is output.

The notice production pattern is a production pattern for temporarily displaying on the screen an image, animation, video, etc. of a specific character or motif, a production pattern for operating an accessory, and a production pattern for outputting a specific voice. The production by the notice production pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol variation, and suggests in advance that the symbol variation is highly likely to stop in the big hit mode. For example, there are a normal notice effect in which only one character image is displayed on the screen, and a group notice effect in which a group of many characters is displayed so as to pass from one end to the other end of the screen. Further, a step-up notice effect is further included in which the display process of the notice effect is divided into a plurality of stages, and the number of stages to be displayed is made variable so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation for a big hit.

In the notice production pattern, the production is executed at a timing after the display state of the decorative design 61 is in the reach state, and the final design of the design is announced in advance (post-reach notice), and the decorative design 61 is one. There is also a pattern (preliminary notice before reach) that gives a notice at the same time that the production is executed and the reach state is reached at a timing not stopped.

The effect determination means 303 should determine whether or not to display the notice effect on the effect display device 60 by a predetermined notice lottery according to the judgment result of the winning/disapproval lottery or the result of advance determination, and set and display the advance effect. The notice production pattern is determined. The effect determination unit 303 holds an advance notification determination table to be referred to in order to determine whether or not to display the advance effect, and a advance type table to be referred to when selecting the type of the advanced effect pattern. The advance notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to according to the judgment result or the preliminary judgment result of the win/loss lottery, and when the win/win lottery is a win, the advance notice effect is displayed with a higher probability than when it is out. As described above, the correspondence relationship between the determination result of the win/no win lot and whether or not to display the notice effect is determined. Accordingly, the high noticeability of the big hit can be suggested by displaying the notice production itself.

The effect control unit 304 variably displays the effect image including the decorative pattern 61 on the effect display device 60 in accordance with the selected variable effect pattern data. The production control means 304 sets the reception condition of the variation start command of the decorative pattern 61 as the start condition of the variable display of the new decorative symbol. When the effect determination means 303 determines that the notice effect is to be displayed, the effect control unit 304 displays the notice effect according to the selected notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in the form of being superimposed on the effect of the symbol variation. Let

If the winning/winning lottery value of the second winning/winning lottery is stored, the effect control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning/winning lottery, and whether the winning/winning lottery value of the first winning/winning lottery is stored. Regardless of whether or not it starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning/winning lottery. As a result, when the lottery values are held for both the first win/win lottery and the second win/win lottery, the lottery value held in the second win/win lottery is preferentially read and the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. . In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning/winning lottery is not read and the variation of the decorative symbol does not start until the number held in the second winning/winning lottery becomes 0. In this way, the effect control unit 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variable display of the decorative symbol 61.

The effect control unit 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The effect control means 304 has effect display control means 305, voice control means 306, and lamp control means 309. The effect display control means 305 controls the display on the effect display device 60, and the voice control means 306 controls the audio output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111.

While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are changing, the effect display device 60 needs to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing. Normally, the normal size decorative pattern 61 having a certain size is variably displayed, but in a mode that hinders the visibility of the variable display of the normal size decorative pattern 61, the main effect contents other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61 are displayed. You may display a special effect to be performed. In this case, the player is informed that the pattern is changing by variably displaying the alternative pattern which is the decorative pattern smaller than the normal size decorative pattern. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative design, it means a normal-sized decorative design, but when distinguishing from an alternative design, the normal-sized decorative design is also referred to as a “normal decorative design” or a “main decorative design”.

The alternative design is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative design is impaired, for example, while the normal decorative design is hidden. The alternative design is a form of a decorative design for suggesting the result of win/fail judgment, and has a simplified display form (in other words, simplification, simplification) than the normal decorative design, and the normal decorative design. It is displayed in a variation process that is simpler than that. The alternative design has a display form on the appearance corresponding to the portion showing the design type of the normal decorative design, and has, for example, a display form showing numbers, characters, and symbols indicating the design type. Further, the alternative design is variably displayed in an area narrower than the area in which the decorative design is normally variably displayed, and is typically at a position where it is difficult to prevent the main performance due to elements other than the design, for example, in the corner of the screen of the performance display device 60. Variable display. The alternative symbol is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative symbol, but has a display form in which at least the symbol type can be visually identified. Note that the alternative design may be a reduction of the normal decorative design as it is, and may be the same as the normal decorative design except for the size.

The plurality of alternative symbols displayed in place of the plurality of normal decorative symbols suggests a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning/winning lottery will be in a state advantageous to the player due to a combination of stop modes at the end of fluctuation. For example, a plurality of alternative symbols suggests that two of the three alternative symbols are in a reach state in which the symbol types are aligned, and thus the expectation of a big hit in the variation is high. In addition, the right and left symbols that are in the reach state become a particular type of symbol that suggests that the degree of expectation such as "3" or "7" is relatively high, and the degree of expectation such as "1" or "2" By becoming a type of pattern that suggests that it is relatively low, it may indicate a high or low degree of expectation of the reach state. In addition, the alternative design does not have a definite stop state in appearance, but becomes a temporary stop state in which a slight shake is maintained. After the temporary stop of the alternative design, a normal decorative design may be displayed instead of the alternative design, and the normal decorative design may be displayed in a fixed stop state. Further, instead of exclusively displaying the normal decorative design and the alternative design, the display periods may overlap. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined effect in which the visibility of the normal decorative design is impaired, the variable display of the normal decorative design may be continued and the variation of the alternative design may be displayed. Unlike the alternative symbol, in the predetermined area of the effect display device 60 during the change of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, the special symbol is changing in the same or smaller image as the alternative symbol. You may change and display the simple symbol which suggests that there is. The simple symbol may be configured by a variable display of three symbol combinations like the normal decorative symbol, may be configured by a variable display of one symbol, or may be a simple symbol (such as “○” or “×”). May be sequentially switched. The simple design is not related to the variable display mode of the normal decorative design or the alternative design, and displays a certain variation from the start of the variation of the special design to the end of the variation, and is related to the stop display mode of the normal decorative design when the stop display is displayed. May be displayed. In addition, the simple symbol may be changed at any time as long as the suggestion that the special symbol is being variably displayed and the result of the special symbol are at least informed. Further, the simple design may be called “sub-decorative design”, “sub-design”, “mini-decorative design”, “mini-design”, or the like. In addition to the effect display device 60, a variable display of a decorative design called a fourth design which shows a display equivalent to a simple design by a light emitting mode such as an LED may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (variable display of special symbol, result display) when a problem occurs in the effect display device 60. As an example of the display mode of the 4th pattern, the LEDs are sequentially turned on (white, green, blue, yellow, orange, red) (can be blinking including turning off). Therefore, the variable display may be displayed, or the flashing may be indicated by flashing in a single color depending on the type of the special symbol, and the emission color when the stop display is performed may indicate the type of deviation or big hit.

The time measuring means 307 is a time measuring circuit that outputs time information used in the game. The time counting means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from when the power is turned on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit that has a built-in battery and can continue to measure the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off or a power failure occurs. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there may be a slight difference in the time for each gaming machine due to individual differences or time lags, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, the time difference between multiple gaming machines may be different as long as the power is turned on at the same time. Is unlikely to occur.

The effect determination means 303 executes the synchronized effect starting at a predetermined timing triggered by the fact that the time information output by the timing means 307 indicates a predetermined time. The synchronization effect is an effect to be displayed on the effect display device 60 in a synchronization effect period which is a period substantially asynchronous with the variation period of the symbol variation and the game state. The synchronization effect period extends for several minutes, and its length is longer than one symbol variation time, and may include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronized effect is stored in the pattern storage unit 302, and reproduction of a predetermined music and video is defined in the effect pattern. A plurality of types of effect patterns for synchronization effects are prepared, and different types of effect patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as month, date, day of the week, and time.

The synchronization effect is executed regardless of whether the game is a normal game or a special game. Here, "during a normal game" includes the display of a so-called standby demo screen. That is, "during normal game", (1) "variable display normal game" in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, (2) "variation stopped normal game" in which the symbols are not displayed in a floating state and not displayed in the standby demo screen "(3) "Standby demo screen displaying normal game", which is displaying the standby demo screen instead of the variable display of symbols, is included. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the cases (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling volume reduction and brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). Can be different than. Also, while the standby demo screen is displayed, information about the mobile cooperation system described later can be input by the player's operation of the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation input is made, the image and sound of the synchronization effect are output. It is suppressed, and screen display such as performance customization by the mobile cooperation system is given priority.

The entrainment effect is an effect in which, for example, a performance of a predetermined music piece or an image is reproduced at a predetermined time (referred to as "entrainment effect start time"). The time that triggers the reproduction of the synchronization effect may be a time that the pachinko gaming machine 100 arrives at a predetermined time interval after the power is turned on, or it may be the time of every hour or half hour based on the standard time. May be Alternatively, a time that may be different depending on the date or the day of the week may be set, and the interval may be different, such as first one hour later, then three hours later, instead of a fixed interval such as “every hour”. The interval may vary depending on the date and the day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be specified by the game shop staff for each game shop. However, it is preset so that the same synchronization effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of the same models installed in the same game shop. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by the arrival time with a predetermined time interval after the power is turned on, a plurality of machines are turned on at the same time in the game store. As a result, the same synchronization effect is simultaneously executed on the plurality of gaming machines when the predetermined time is reached. As a result, the effects are displayed at the same time as if they were synchronized by multiple units, and the same song or video is played at the same time. A staging effect can be obtained.

The function of the synchronization effect is also built in another game machine of the same model, and a plurality of game machines on the same game island are simultaneously powered on daily by a game shop clerk. Then, all of the plurality of gaming machines that are powered on at the same time arrive at the synchronized effect start time almost at the same time, and the synchronized effect can be simultaneously executed at the same time. This is called a multi-unit synchronization effect. In that case, not only the video display will be synchronized with multiple units, but also the output of sound effects and background music will be synchronized with multiple units. Increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes a history of game results and a history of effect results. The history of the game results is a result of the game such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions, which is a result of the game and which leads to a payout obtained by the player. The production result history is different from the game profit, and is recorded in order to obtain profits such as the right to change the content and type of the production, and the right to facilitate the appearance of a specific type of production. It is information such as the score of. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined effect, the result of a mini game, and the like and give the score to the player, the coded information indicating the score and the game history, for example, a two-dimensional code is displayed on the screen. When the player reads the two-dimensional code with the camera of his mobile terminal and decodes it, the score and the information of the game history obtained by the decoding are accumulated in the mobile terminal of the player. The cooperation system between the game machine and the player's mobile terminal via the two-dimensional code will be described later. In addition, the score mentioned here is necessary in order to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). It is a specification that increases the number of customizable items.

The effect setting unit 308 stores a setting for selecting which of a plurality of kinds of effect contents to be selected as effect customization, based on the player's selection instruction and the game history. For example, as the effect patterns to be displayed during the special game, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns having different motifs, characters, and music to be displayed are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which effect is to be displayed. I will. Alternatively, it is assumed that a plurality of types of motifs or character designs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as the design of the design included in the decorative design to be varied, and the player is allowed to select which design to display. In these cases, when the player operates the production button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed and the production pattern is selected through the operation, the production setting unit 308 displays the selected content. Remember. The effect determination means 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game in accordance with the setting stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub initial process execution means 360 executes the control start process of the sub substrate 300 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is restored. The sub-power interruption process executing means 362 executes a process for dealing with an abnormality such as a power-off process in the sub-board 300 when a power abnormality such as a power-off occurs. The sub error detection unit 364 executes an abnormality detection process on the sub substrate 300. When the sub error detection means 364 detects the power failure, the sub power interruption process execution means 362 backs up the RAM data in the backup RAM as the power interruption processing.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of the mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player performs user registration in advance by setting an account and a password on the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site on the mobile terminal 354. When the player presses the effect button 109 at the start of the game, the effect display control means 305 causes the screen of the effect display device 60 to display the two-dimensional code 350 that encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358. The player is made to read it by the camera of the mobile terminal and is made to access the exclusive site of the game history server 358. Character information (also referred to as "password information") obtained by encoding player identification information and performance score history is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control unit 305 causes the effect display device 60 to display the input screen of the password information, and allows the player to input the password information through a button operation such as the cross key 110. The entered password information is decrypted by the effect setting means 308 and registered as the player's identification information and effect score history, so that the player's previous game contents and effect score state can be taken over. The input of the password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start effect customization for selecting various effect elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, along with the progress of the game and the production, the points which the production setting means 308 gives to the player as the production profit are added up at any time to be accumulated as the production score history, and the player is also accumulated. At any time, it is possible to perform effect customization and select and set favorite elements as various effect elements. The point assignment on the production is basically based on addition for each symbol variation, and a higher score is given to an effect type having a higher degree of expectation of transition to a special game, and a higher score is also given when shifting to a special game.

As the effect customization, the player uses a part of the points accumulated cumulatively, and the colors, backgrounds, shapes, characters, etc., which constitute the effect contents displayed on the effect display device 60, according to the number of points used. It is possible to change the production elements such as music pieces to a desired type. The effect setting unit 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element through a button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. As for the production elements that can be customized, a plurality of types of items are prepared for each element, and different values are set as the required points for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items is increased, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is given. When the player operates a button as an instruction to end the game or production customization, the production setting unit 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as a privilege on production and production score history, and performs production display control thereof. The means 305 displays it on the effect display device 60. The player can read the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his or her own mobile terminal and decode the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354. Further, the information is transmitted from the portable terminal 354 to the game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as a privilege on the performance and a performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via the transmission means for displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350 and managed by the game history server 358. You can take over the contents of the game and production at the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol variations and the number of effects can be increased, so that points can be obtained.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configurations of the main board 200 and the sub-board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling all game operations. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). The main CPU 290 acquires a ball entry signal from each ball entrance, a payout signal from the payout control board 155, and the like through various interfaces not shown. The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as each winning opening solenoid, the first special symbol display section 41, and the second special symbol display section 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). Further, from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300, a command necessary for effect control is transmitted together with information such as the result of the lottery win/loss, the determination result of the symbol, and the determination result of the variation pattern. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 by one-way communication.

The instruction data to be transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte structure that is a combination of 1-byte instruction type data, which is so-called MODE data, and 1-byte instruction content data, which is so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating the command type data and the command content data with each other and transmitting them to the sub-board 300. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the type of instruction, and a unique type code is assigned to each instruction type in advance at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and the instruction content data is an identification bit indicating whether it is the instruction type data or the instruction content data. When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates the instruction type data. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is the instruction content data.

Since the communication from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is such that 1 byte of data is transmitted per data transmission, it is necessary to transmit 1 byte twice for transmitting 2 bytes of instruction data. . MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. In consideration of the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise or the like, the main board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the same data is read by the sub-board 300 for two consecutive times, the completion of transmission/reception of the data is confirmed. . The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read in two consecutive times, and transmits the data up to five times.

The sub board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 310, a sub RAM 311, a sub ROM 312, and an effect control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of data storage means for holding a sub control program including effect pattern data in which a performance process is defined, display pattern data in which a performance display process is defined, and the like. A sub control program including effect pattern data, display pattern data, and voice pattern data is read from the sub ROM 312 into the sub RAM 311, and effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). A signal from an external device such as the effect button 109 is acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces not shown. The sub CPU 310 drives an external device such as the effect display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable accessory 66 by the effect control device 313, various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and outputs the display. , Voice output, lighting of lamps, and control of effects by accessory operation. Sub CPU310 transmits the display pattern data and the sound pattern data to effect control device 313. In the base technology, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described. However, the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a board, and are separately connected to each other. May be formed as a separate substrate.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. The effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and a voice control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display, and audio data used for audio output in a data compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for variable display and effect display as an effect object indicating the result of determination of win/loss, etc. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data that defines motions for adding a motional motion to an image used for various performances at a predetermined timing. The voice data is voice data such as a music piece, a background sound, a sound effect, and a dialogue of a character that is output during the performance.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, effect image data and motion data designated by the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and effect display using the effect image data and motion data is performed. Is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, the control CPU 320 transmits a command regarding effect display, effect image data, and motion data to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 performs display control. Similarly, the control CPU 320 transmits a voice output command and voice data to the voice control circuit 314, and the voice control circuit 314 controls the voice output.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via a bus 330. For convenience sake, the bus 330 in this figure is a comprehensive representation of buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

The effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is used as a work area when the effect image data or motion data is decoded by the decoder 332, or as a work area when the drawing process or the image process is executed by the drawing circuit 336 (VideoRAM). ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute the commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image, and uses the generated display image as a frame of a moving image in a frame buffer. 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory that temporarily stores the frames of the moving image to be output to the effect display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for two frames, for example, and while the display circuit 340 outputs the display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image, Store it in the memory area for another frame.

The data ROM 324 holds “detailed display pattern data” in which the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as “outline display pattern data” in which an outline of the effect display process is defined. For example, the rough display pattern data defines a rough flow of a series of effect display processes, such as a variation start and variation stop timing of a decorative pattern, a reproduction order of a plurality of moving images, and a reproduction start and stop timing. .. On the other hand, in the detailed display pattern data, detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns and the display processing order in frame units for displaying moving images based on motion data. The process is defined.

When performing the display control based on the “schematic display pattern data” sent from the sub CPU 310, the production control device 313 reads “detailed display pattern data” necessary for the processing from the data ROM 324 and uses both display pattern data. Display processing. Therefore, it can be said that the performance control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including the “schematic display pattern data” and the “detailed display pattern data”. Therefore, in the present specification, unless explicitly stated, the "schematic display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished from each other, but simply "display pattern data". ". For example, when the effect control means performs a specific process based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, this display pattern data includes "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". .. In the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into the “schematic display pattern data” and the “detailed display pattern data”, and the display pattern data that serves as both may be held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324. Good.

In the base technology, the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In the modification, the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, the data ROM 324, and the display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing which is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322 or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute the processing that is executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also have the functions of the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the effect control device 313 may have a hardware configuration in which the display control circuit 326 is not included. In this case, the process executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. May be done.

In the base technology, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311 and the sub-ROM 312, as well as a production control device 313. In a modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312, and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing that is supposed to be executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the process of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may have the function of the control RAM 322, and the sub ROM 312 may have the function of the data ROM 324. In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included. In this case, the process executed by the effect control device 313 is executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. May be.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the control start processing of the main board 200 in the pachinko game machine. This control start processing is executed by the main initial processing execution means 280, but hereinafter, it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial processing execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings related to hardware such as setting of internal registers of the main CPU 290. Yes (S104).

The main CPU 290 confirms the operation state of the setting key, and if the setting key is in the ON state (Y of S105), confirms the operation state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S122), the setting change process is executed (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear is OFF (N in S122), the setting confirmation process is executed (S126). In S105, if the setting key is in the OFF state (N of S105), the processes of S122 to S126 are skipped.

Subsequently, depending on the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291, the power-off recovery process or the main RAM 291 initialization process is executed. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power-off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the process for power-off recovery is executed. To do. In other cases, that is, when the RAM clear switch is turned on, or when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power-off information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operation state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). When the RAM clear switch is not turned on (N in S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data (N of S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (Y of S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is inspected (S110). As will be described later, if the processing is normally completed at the previous power failure, the check sum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 uses the check sum. The data in the main RAM 291 is inspected. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), a process for returning to the state before the power-off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery processing (S114), power-on normal data indicating that power-on has been normally performed is stored in the power-off information flag, and various error initialization and communication initial setting with the payout control board 155 are executed. To do. Subsequently, the command request for the untransmitted portion before the power is turned off is cleared, and the command transmission of various information indicating the gaming state is requested. Subsequently, the effect command corresponding to the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open/closed state of the second starting opening 12 and the special winning opening 20 is restored to the state before the power is turned off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the probability varying function of the special symbol is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared to 0, and the initialization of the main RAM 291 and the effect display unit are executed. In the initialization process of S116, the setting value stored in the setting memory of the setting changing device 170 is not cleared, and the setting value set in the setting changing process of S124 is retained as it is.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to activate the interrupt process described later, and the operation of the interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, thereafter, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described later is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes main processing for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When using "1" to "6" as the setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when using "0" to "5" as the setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the set memory value is normal (Y of S132), the process of S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the state is changed to the setting change state (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S138). If there is a change operation by the setting change button 172 (Y of S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N of S140), the process of S142 will be skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N of S144), the processing of S138 to S142 is repeated. When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so that the set value cannot be visually recognized (S146), and the process returns.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation processing of S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the set memory value is normal (Y of S152), the process of S154 is skipped. The state is shifted to the setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the set value, and if the setting key is OFF (Y in S160), the setting display unit 173 is hidden. Then, the set value is made invisible (S162), and the process returns.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 temporarily prohibits the timer interrupt (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors the power interruption (S204). When a power supply voltage monitor circuit (not shown) detects a decrease in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158, the power supply voltage monitor circuit inputs an unconditional interrupt request signal to the main CPU 290 to execute power-off storage. In the process, the power cut confirmation data is stored in the power cut confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and when the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y of S206), executes the process for power-off. Therefore, the process proceeds to S212. When the value of the power-off confirmation flag does not match the power-off confirmation data (N of S206), in order to update the normal random number per symbol, the special random number per special symbol, and the soft initial random number per special symbol, The initial value random number updating process is executed (S208), the timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. When a timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is prohibited (S202 to S208), the interrupt process described below is executed after the timer interrupt is permitted in S210.

When the power failure is detected in S206 (Y of S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the content of the power failure information flag (S214). When the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N of S214), it is determined that the data at power-on is not normally saved, and the power-off abnormal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216), the process proceeds to S222. When the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y of S214), it is determined that the data at power-on is normally saved, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Next, at the next power-on, in order to inspect the backed up data in the main RAM 291, a checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Subsequently, the access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the process loops until the power is turned off. It should be noted that the above power-off processing is executed by the main power-off processing executing means 282 realized by the main CPU 290.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, the interrupt operation condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Subsequently, in order to manage the gaming machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312). , 2nd starting opening effective period setting process (S314), prize monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol fluctuation start Monitoring process (S324), starting port monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric auditors product control process (S330), special winning opening effective period setting process (S332), special symbol variation start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), entrance passage time abnormality detection processing (S338), game state display processing (S340), handle state signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), firing control signal The output process (S346), the test signal output process (S348), the solenoid output process (S350), the effect control command transmission process (S352), and the external information output process (S354) are sequentially executed, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356), the process returns.

In the input processing (S304), the input port data of the switch attached to the game board surface, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the door/frame opening signal, the magnetic detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the touch state signal are monitored. , Data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291. The data indicating this input state is level data (data of the input port at the time of this interrupt) and rising data or falling data (data of the input port at the time of this interrupt and the data at the time of the previous interrupt). It is the data indicating the switch that has been switched by comparing the data of the input ports by exclusive OR.

In various random number update processing (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. Normally, the random symbol variation pattern is read from the main RAM 291, and the value is incremented and stored when the value is less than the predetermined maximum value, and 0 is stored when the value is equal to or larger than the predetermined maximum value. Further, when the random number of the variation pattern is read from the main RAM 291, and the result of subtracting the predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, the subtraction result is stored, and when it is less than 0, the predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number updating process (S308), the normal random number per symbol, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the special symbol per soft random number are updated. Each random number value, maximum value, and initial value are read from the main RAM 291, and the random number value is incremented. If the result of the increment exceeds the maximum value, the value of the random number is set to 0. When the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the normal random number per symbol, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the special symbol per soft random number are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the value of the random number returns to the initial value, that is, the range of the random number is cycled. Then, the initial value is newly set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291 and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. When the result of the increment exceeds the upper limit value, the value of the initial value random number is set to 0. The same process is executed in the initial value random number updating process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and when the timer value is other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. When the timer value is 0, the timer is not updated.

In the second starting port effective period setting process (S314), the effective period of the second starting port 12 is set. An ordinary electric accessory 90 is disposed in the second starting opening 12 as a prerequisite technique, and an effective period in which a prize ball is paid out and a lottery related to the second special symbol is executed by entering a game ball, Even if a game ball enters, an invalid period is set in which the payout of the prize ball and the lottery related to the second special symbol are not executed. As will be described later, in the starting opening monitoring control processing (S326), since the monitoring processing of the second starting opening winning is not executed during the invalid period of the second starting opening 12, the game ball enters the second starting opening 12. Even if the prize balls are paid out and the lottery relating to the second special symbol is not executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set for the first starting opening 11, the special winning opening 20, the first operating opening 31, the second operating opening 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the ordinary symbol is "in operation of the ordinary electric accessory," data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the effective period is stored in the second starting port effective period flag. If the state of the normal symbol is not "in operation of the normal electric auditors product", the second start that measures the effective period for detecting the residual ball inside the normal electric auditors product 90 that has entered just before the end of the operation of the normal electric auditors product. If the value of the mouth effective extension timer is not 0, data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is in the effective period is stored in the second starting opening effective period flag, and the value of the second starting opening effective extension timer is 0. If there is, the data indicating that the second starting port is in the invalid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag. As a modified example, the normal electric auditors product 90 may be provided in a winning opening other than the second starting opening 12, and in that case, the second starting opening valid period setting process is performed for the target winning opening. It is configured to have a valid period setting process which is an equivalent process.

In the prize monitoring process (S316), the game ball is inspected for passing through the switch, and when the game ball passes through the switch, the switch has no invalid period or the current valid period, and the prize ball is paid out. If so, the winning counter is updated. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of a command.

In the prize ball control processing (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of received data from the payout control board 155. Are executed in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 and the second operating port 32, and the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. When the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol variation is less than 4, which is the upper limit value, the number of reserved symbols of the regular symbol is updated, and a random number related to the regular symbol is stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled, the process relating to the normal symbol display unit 45 or the normal electric auditors product 90 is executed. If the state of the normal symbol is "normal symbol changing", execute the normal symbol changing process, if "normal symbol stop symbol is displayed", execute the normal symbol stop symbol displaying process, "normal electric In the case of "while the accessory is operating", the process during operation of the normal electric auditors product is executed, and in the case of "during demonstration of completion of the operation of the normal electric auditors product", processing during the demonstration of completion of the operation of the ordinary electric auditors product is executed. In the normal symbol fluctuation process, after changing the normal symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and when it is judged that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is over, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set to stop and the state of the normal symbol is "normal". Set to "Stop symbol display". In the normal symbol stop symbol displaying process, the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol is finished, the operation end setting of the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, the state of the ordinary symbol is set to "during operation of the ordinary electric accessory", the operating state of the extension function of the ordinary electric accessory at the start of operation of the ordinary electric accessory is saved, and the operation of the ordinary electric accessory starts. The operation setting of the ordinary electric auditors product solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the ordinary electric auditors accessory opening extension function is executed. In the case of falling off, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol variation standby". In the processing during the operation of the ordinary electric auditors product, when it is determined that the winning number of the winning port of the ordinary electric auditors object 90 of the game ball is monitored and the number of winnings of the winning port of the ordinary electric auditors object 90 has reached the maximum winning number. Executes the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the setting of the second starting opening effective extension time. When it is determined that the number of winnings of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, the ordinary electric accessory 90 When the opening/closing of the entrance of the prize hole related to is set and it is determined that the opening of the series of the normal electric auditors product 90 is finished, the operation end setting of the normal electric auditors product 90 and the second starting opening effective Execute extension time setting. If it is determined that the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning port for the ordinary electric auditors product 90 has not ended, the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning port for the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. In the process during the demonstration of the normal electric auditors product operation end, the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric auditors product 90 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation end demo time of the ordinary electric auditors product 90 ends, the state of the ordinary symbol is "normal symbol" Set to “Waiting for change”.

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, "normal symbol fluctuation standby", and if the value of the normal symbol operation holding ball number is other than 0, fluctuation of the normal symbol It is determined to start. If you decide to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol, decrement the normal symbol operation holding ball number, execute the hit judgment, the determination of the stop symbol, the setting of the variation pattern number of the ordinary symbol, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol . Then, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol changing", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for the state setting of the normal symbol, the hit determination, and the variation pattern determination is cleared.

In the starting opening monitoring control process (S326), the first starting opening 11 win and the second starting opening 12 win of the game ball are monitored. If you confirm the winning of the game ball when the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol is less than 4, obtain the built-in random number, and add the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the obtained built-in random number, Stored in the buffer as a random number per special symbol used in the big hit determination. Further, as the random number related to the special symbol, the symbol random number and the variation pattern random number are acquired and stored. When the second special symbol hold is prioritized over the first special symbol hold and is digested, only the update of the hold related to the winning is executed, but if the holding order of the special symbol is the winning order, In addition to updating the hold related to the prize, update the total hold number and store the winning order. Next, in order to request the notice production command corresponding to the random number stored at the time of winning the starting mouth, if the state of the game machine is confirmed and it is determined that it is the command transmission period, a hit notice production request, a hit pattern notice production request, a pattern notice Rendering requests are executed in order. Here, (1) when the big hit game is not executed, and when the random number related to the first special symbol is stored in a situation where the ball is not easily entered, (2) the big hit game is not executed, and Under the situation that is easy to enter the ball, when storing the random number related to the second special symbol, (3) during the big hit or during the small hit, when corresponding to any of the case of storing the random number related to the second special symbol Then, it is determined that it is the command transmission period. Next, request a production command corresponding to the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol. Thus, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in the pre-reading, the prior determination information (advance judgment information, prior symbol determination information, prior pattern determination information), the number of reserved balls (the first special symbol, the number of reserved balls of both the second special symbol of 1 Four pieces of information (identifiable by a command) are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-determination process, but in another example, when there is a ball entering the starting opening, the transmission is uniformly performed and prefetching is possible. The sub CPU 310 may make various status determinations such as whether or not it is a period. Subsequently, the value of the second starting opening valid period flag is inspected, and if the value of the second starting opening valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is in the valid period, the first starting opening winning Similarly to the case, the monitoring process for the second starting opening winning a prize is executed. If the value of the second starting opening valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is in the invalid period, the monitoring processing of the second starting opening winning is not executed. In addition, when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is once changed from 0 to 1 and then a control process relating to a variation start described later is executed. ..

In the special symbol control process (S328), the waiting state is inspected, and when the special electric accessory is operating, that is, during the big hit or the small hit, the special symbol control process is ended. If the special electric accessory is not activated, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if "special symbol variation standby", special symbol control general-purpose processing ends, and if "variation start", special symbol variation The start process is executed, and if the "special symbol is changing", the special symbol changing process is executed. If the "special symbol stop symbol is being displayed", the special symbol stop symbol displaying process is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the sub-board 300 is started to produce the effect display. Request a command of additional symbol information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special symbol to "during special symbol variation", and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern with 0. . In the special symbol fluctuation process, after changing the special symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is judged that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is over, the fluctuation stop setting of the special symbol is set and the state of the special symbol is "special. Set to "stop symbol display". In the special symbol stop symbol displaying process, the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is monitored, and if it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is finished, the operation end setting of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol fluctuation", and the number of times the special electric auditors operate continuously is set. The probability of the special symbol Fluctuating function, fluctuation time shortening function for special symbols, probability fluctuation function for ordinary symbols, fluctuation time shortening function for ordinary symbols, and opening extension function for ordinary electric auditors are not activated, and the state of the gaming machine is ready for a special winning opening. Set to inside and set the hit start demo display time, command request for hit start demo effect, and command request for launch position designation effect (command request to execute an effect that suggests a recommended launch position such as "right hit") To execute. If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the operation finish determination of the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol is performed, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is made, and the special symbol In order to end the operation of, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol variation", the state of the gaming machine is set to small hit start demonstration, the setting of the hit start demonstration display time, the hit start demonstration production A command request and a command request for a launch position designation effect are executed. If the result of the hit determination is out of place, the operation finish determination of the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol is performed, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the command request for the game state is made, and the special symbol In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "standby for special symbol variation", and the command request for the launch position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric auditors product control process (S330), in order to execute the process relating to the special electric auditors product, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric auditors product is inspected, and the condition device is operating or the special electric auditors product is operating. If it is determined, the process related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating state of the special electric auditors, special winning opening opening preparation processing, special electric auditors operating processing, big winning opening closing processing, big hit end demonstration processing, small hit start demonstration processing, small hit special electricity Executes the processing during operation, the processing during the small hit big winning opening closing, and the processing during the small hit end demonstration.

In the special winning opening valid period setting process (S332), the result of determination of the valid period of the special winning opening 20 is stored. The mouth ineffective period data is stored, and when it is other than 0, the special winning port valid period data is stored in the special winning port valid period flag.

In the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a state in which fluctuation can start. Digestion sequence of the reserve ball of the special symbol is the priority digestion of the second special symbol, (1) during the big hit or small hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for change, (3) ) That the second special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (4) The number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol is other than 0, when all of the conditions are satisfied, the special symbol can start changing. To determine. If the order of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the winning order, in addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol is other than 0, (6) When the determination matches the digestion order, that is, the winning order, and when all of the conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the special symbol can start changing.

When it is determined that the special symbol can start changing, the operation reserve sphere number of the special symbol is subtracted, and the effect command corresponding to the reserve sphere numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. This notifies the sub-board 300 that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Then, the special symbol hit determination is executed. In the hit determination, by the random number per special symbol, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the design is decided. In the determination of the symbol, if the hit determination is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined based on the special symbol per symbol random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit symbol is determined, and if it is a hit, a hit symbol Is determined.

If the result of the hit determination is a big hit, based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit symbol determined in the symbol determination process, determine the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol, Set the game state after the big hit, such as the operation contents of the variable time reduction function and the easy winning state of ordinary symbols. Next, the settings during the big hit are executed such as the number of times the special electric auditors continuously operate and the contents of the opening time of the special winning opening. Then, based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol, by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the big hit ends, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set. Subsequently, the start demo time and the end demo time are set by referring to the table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of the winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "change start".

If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection state are set, the start demo time and the end demo time are set, and The area of the main RAM 291 used for the determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "start of fluctuation". When the result of the hit determination is out of alignment, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to “start of fluctuation”.

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290, which functions as the main error detection unit 284, inspects the magnetic detection signal, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the electric wave detection signal, and the door/frame opening signal, and changes to the error state. If there is, the error state is stored and the sub-board 300 is requested to display the error state effect of the gaming machine. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If the error state has not changed, the storage of the error state and the display request for the error state effect are not executed.

In the ball-in-passage time abnormality detection processing (S338), the main CPU 290, which functions as the main error detection unit 284, monitors the continuous on-time of each switch level to detect the ball-in-passage time abnormality, and the continuous on-time ( For example, when it is determined that the value of the counter that is incremented for each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of abnormal entry time for ball entry, command transmission request, and security output to the external information output terminal 160 are performed. Create output requests in order. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the abnormal ball passing time. If it is determined that the continuous on-time is not abnormal, the security output request is not created.

In the game state display processing (S340), the number of times the special electric auditors operates continuously, the error state, the number of operation reserved balls of the normal symbol, and the number of operation reserved balls of the special symbol are requested to be displayed, and therefore each display Create the data.

In the handle state signal inspection process (S342), in order to monitor the touch state of the handle, the handle state is inspected, and if it is determined that the handle state has changed as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitor timer is decremented and the handle state is checked. Update, setting of the steering wheel state monitoring timer, and a command transmission request for steering wheel state production are executed. If it is determined that the handle state has not changed, the handle state monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle status monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of operation reserved balls of the special symbol, the display of the number of operation reserved balls of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, the special electric auditors continuously Initialization of the display in order to display the number of times it has operated, the operating state of the special electric auditors when the auditory continuous operating device is not activated, the display of sorting, the display of errors, and the display of the prize ball ratio. , Display data acquisition and output are sequentially executed.

In the launch control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting the launch of the game ball, setting of the prohibition/permission of launch corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 155 and the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition/permission data, the firing prohibition/permission signal is output.

In the test signal output processing (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric winning combination solenoid 91 and the special winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric winning combination solenoid 91 is acquired, and the output data of the special winning opening solenoid 92 is output. Perform acquisition and output of output data. An operation flag and an operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and the solenoid operation timer are acquired. Subsequently, the solenoid operation timer is updated and output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the effect control command transmission process (S352), whether or not there is a transmission request for a command to be transmitted to the sub-board 300 is inspected, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the used command buffer is set to 0. After clearing, the MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data is acquired, the MODE data is output, the MODE data is held, the EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data is acquired, and the EVENT data is output.

In the external information output processing (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be described in more detail. Random numbers used in the main board 200, mainly as a random number related to the normal symbol, there is a random number per ordinary symbol, and a normal pattern variation pattern random number, as a random number related to the special symbol, a random number per special symbol (hard random number) , There is a soft random number per special symbol, a random symbol per special symbol, and a variation pattern random number. In addition, the initial value update type random number, as a random number to give an initial value of a normal symbol random number, a special symbol per symbol random number, and a special symbol per soft random number, a normal symbol initial value random number, a special symbol per symbol initial value There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Random number per normal symbol, in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the number of ordinary symbol fluctuations held Is less than the upper limit value of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for the hit determination and the determination of the stopped symbol when it is determined that the variation of the normal symbol is started in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number takes, for example, a value of 0 to 232, is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of the interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number, in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interruption process, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the suspension of normal symbol variation When the number is less than the upper limit value of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. Normal symbol variation pattern random number, in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324), when it is determined that the variation of the normal symbol is started, it is used for determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol.

Random number per special symbol, in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process, when the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed , The value of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol is acquired, and the values are generated by adding them, and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per special symbol is used to execute the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning prize of the game ball is confirmed when the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting mouth monitoring control process (S326). Is obtained from a predetermined position of the above, and is used to generate a random number per special symbol as described above.

The symbol random number per special symbol takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored at a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. Is stored. The symbol random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting mouth monitoring control process (S326). Is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The special symbol per symbol random number is used to determine the big hit symbol when the hit determination is a big hit in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of the interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is a predetermined value in the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game sphere is confirmed when the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326). It is acquired from the position and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

Normal initial value per random number, special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and special symbol per soft initial value random number, respectively, normal symbol random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number value in the same range Then, it is updated in the initial value random number updating process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number updating process (S310) of the interrupt process, and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Normal value per initial value random number, special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and special symbol per software initial value random number, in the initial value update type random number update process (S308), normal symbol per random symbol, special symbol per symbol random number, and special When updating the soft random number per symbol, it is used as the initial value of each random number.

Since the interrupt process is executed at regular time intervals by the timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update-type random number update process (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular time intervals. It That is, a normal random number per symbol, a normal symbol variation pattern random number, a special symbol per random number, a special symbol per soft random number, a special symbol per symbol random number, a variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer. Repeat for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process differs depending on the game state and the like, the initial value random number updating process (S208) in the main process (S120) is various random number updating process (S306) and initial value updating type random number updating process (S308). ), it is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number acquired when the initial value is set in the initial value updating type random number updating process (S308) can be made random every time.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the control start processing of the sub-board 300 in the pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the sub initial process execution unit 360, but hereinafter, it will be described as being executed by the sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub initial process execution unit 360. When the control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub-CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), registers of the sub-CPU 310, port initialization, etc. Initial setting regarding hardware is executed (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and arranged in the sub-RAM 311. Among various variables in the control program, an initial value is set for a variable having an initial value, and zero clear data is set for a variable having no initial value. As a result, the sub RAM 311 is initialized (S506). Note that the interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 includes processing when power is turned on and reset processing when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled, as the interrupt processing executed with the highest priority. As the interrupt processing of the priority level 7 having the next highest execution priority, there is command processing received from the main board 200, and as the interrupt processing of the priority level 3 having the next highest priority, CPU runaway detection by the watchdog timer is performed. There is a time reset process. The next priority processing of priority level 2 is processing related to commands transmitted to and from the control CPU 320, and communication processing with a real-time clock is processing of priority level 1 with the lowest priority. Various devices such as lamps, solenoids, and motors are controlled. If the interrupts related to the above-described various processes occur at the same time, the interrupts with the highest priority preset for each interrupt type are executed in priority. It should be noted that the processing shown in the figure includes the processing at power-on, which is the highest priority interrupt, and the reset processing when various abnormalities occur, and the reset processing when CPU runaway is detected, which is the priority level 3 interrupt. Including.

Interrupts (priority level 7) other than commands received from the main board 200 are prohibited (S510), and various error information used for the model is set from all error information stored for all models in advance (S512). . All the lamps such as the decoration lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the operation of the watchdog timer is started (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the flow does not return from the main processing of S518 to this flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (small power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. In S506 of FIG. 20, in order to check whether the control program arranged in the sub RAM 311 is correctly arranged in the main processing of this drawing, the start address for starting the check is acquired (S530), and in the subsequent processing. All interrupts are permitted (S532), and the initialization operation of devices such as motors and solenoids is executed (S534).

If it is set to use the watchdog timer, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the decorative symbol counter is updated so that the combination of the decorative symbols is a random combination (S540), and the input port of the sub CPU 310. Is monitored (S542). Since S540 is the process in the method of determining the out-of-decoration design of the decorative design using the counter, in the case of the method of determining the out-of-design design of the decorative design using the lottery sheet incorporating all of the symbol combinations that are out-of-design. Does not execute the process of S540. The process of determining the decorative symbol deviation symbol using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a stop symbol of the special symbol is received from the main board 200 as described later in S552. The sub CPU 310, which functions as the sub error detection unit 364, monitors the error state and, when detecting various errors, notifies the error (S544) and executes processing according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546). The advance notice lottery is executed (S548). In the notice lottery in S548, in particular, a notice effect command to appear immediately after the start of the symbol variation is transmitted to the effect control device 313 as soon as possible, and therefore the lottery process is not performed in one loop but is performed a plurality of times. Divide into loops, and draw the notice effect that appears immediately after the start of symbol fluctuation in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, the operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and immediately after the command analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Returning (Y in S554), if it is not immediately after command analysis (N in S554), the lottery soft random number is updated as low priority processing that may be performed in the idle time (S556), and the processing returns to S536. In S552, if the command to be analyzed indicates a variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol is determined by the process of S552, and if the command to be analyzed indicates a stop symbol of the special symbol, a lottery sheet is selected. If it is a method of determining the out-of-design of the decorative design, the stop design of the decorative design is determined in the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt command having the second highest priority next to the reset interrupt and the error interrupt. When the data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port and the same data is read twice consecutively, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600), and the confirmed command is the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y of S602), the first command is stored in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606), and the process returns to the original routine. As described above, by acquiring the hard random number each time the main command is interrupted from the main board 200, the random number acquisition timing does not have periodicity, and the randomness of the value is enhanced. If the data read in S600 does not match twice consecutively (up to 5 times can be read), S602 is skipped and the process returns to the original routine (N in S600).

In S602, when the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), if it is confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data) The command write pointer, which is the reading position in the ring buffer for use with the device, is acquired (S610), and the first command and the second command are stored in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the process returns to the original routine. When the first command has not been received in S608, S610 and subsequent steps are skipped (N in S608), and the process returns to the original routine.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command related to effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y of S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data is transmitted to the control CPU 320 by attempting to transmit the command up to three times at a predetermined time interval until the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 a command indicating that the control CPU 320 has normally received. After the transmission, the setting of the read address of the buffer is updated (S628), and the process returns to the original routine. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N in S622), S624 and subsequent steps are skipped and the process returns to the original routine.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command received by the sub CPU 310 from the control CPU 320 is a command mainly indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been normally received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), the command is stored in the command buffer (S634), and the process returns to the original routine.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is an interrupt for lamp control of the decorative lamp 111 and the like, control of solenoids and motors for driving the movable accessory 66, and management control of various timers, and is generated in a 1 ms cycle. Since it is the interrupt of the priority level 1 having the lowest priority, the interrupt of the priority level 2 or higher is permitted (S640), the signal indicating the input from the effect button 109, the signal indicating the error detection, and the signal indicating the power failure. , Input/output of a port for inputting/outputting a drive signal or the like to/from a control target device such as a motor or a solenoid is processed (S642). At this time, when the signal indicating the power failure is input, the process immediately shifts to the backup process. Data related to device control such as count processing based on control patterns of devices such as motors and solenoids and on/off control of a buffer for writing data to the port in S642 is updated (S644), and a timer for timing performance is set. It updates (S646), updates the timer for managing the effective input time of the effect button 109 (S648), and updates the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 and runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. Then, a 16 ms cycle is created (S650).

The minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of the image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and an integral multiple thereof is set as the minimum unit of the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, so that the lamp control and the image display control can be easily synchronized. In addition, for example, when counting a relatively long period of time such as 30 seconds of error notification, if a count of 1 interrupt (1 ms) cycle is used, the count value becomes longer than necessary, but 16 ms The count value can be shortened by setting the count value of the cycle.

The task control includes 16 types of tasks from processing 0 to 15, one of which is lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and two of which are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is performed once every 16 interrupts in accordance with the count value of the task control counter, thereby realizing switching in a 16 ms cycle. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, process 0 and process 8, and when the count value of the task control counter is 0 and 8, that is, once every 8 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring at a cycle of 8 ms is realized.

It should be noted that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that is turned on/off every frame, and if the toggle signal does not change at the same value continuously for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 is operated. Transmits a reset signal from the control CPU 320 to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that has received the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), the toggle signal is monitored at a cycle of 8 ms shorter than the cycle. Finally, the timer for managing a relatively long error notification period such as the error notification of 30 seconds as described above is subtracted (S654), and the error notification ends when the time-out occurs.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying special symbol variation. When the second winning/winning lottery value is held (Y in S700), the second winning/winning determination means 222 reads the second winning/winning lottery value and determines the winning/winning of the second special symbol 52 (S702), and the second winning/winning result. The determination means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and the variation start command together with the determined result. It transmits to the sub-board 300 to start the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

When the second winning/winning lottery value is not held (N in S700) and when the first winning/winning lottery value is held (Y in S708), the first winning/winning determination means 221 determines the first winning/winning lottery. The value is read again to determine whether or not the first special symbol 51 is valid (S710), the first winning/disagreement determining unit 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determining unit 231 is the first The variation pattern of the 1 special symbol 51 is determined (S714), the variation start command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 along with the determined result, and the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 is started (S716). When the first winning/winning lottery value is not reserved, the processing from S710 to S722 is skipped (N in S708).

The symbol variable display of the special symbol is processed (S718), S718 is repeated until a predetermined variation time elapses and the symbol display stop timing is reached (N of S720), and the predetermined variation time elapses and the symbol display is stopped. When the timing is reached (Y of S720), a fluctuation stop command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to stop the fluctuation of the symbol being displayed at a predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the variable display of the special symbol is ended. To do.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the process of decorative pattern variable display. The effect determination means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the variation start and effect display contents from the main board 200 (S750), the stop symbol of the special symbol received, the variation pattern, the stop of the decorative symbol according to the result of judgment. The mode is determined (S752), and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, when the sign setting is turned on by the prior determination (Y in S756), the already-determined variation effect pattern includes a specific effect content that should be avoided from being displayed in a superimposed manner with the notice effect. If it is not (N of S758) and it is not the symbol variation that is the trigger for turning on the sign setting (N of S760), the setting for displaying a predetermined notice effect is executed (S764), and the sign setting is If it is a symbol variation that is a trigger for being turned on (Y in S760), the sign setting is turned off (S762). When the precursor setting is not turned on (N in S756) or when the variation effect pattern includes specific effect contents (Y in S758), the processes of S760 to S764 are skipped.

Then, the variation effect display of the decorative pattern is started (S766), the variation effect display process of the decorative pattern and (S768), the notice effect display process is executed (S770), and the variation stop command is received from the main board 200. S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772), and when the fluctuation stop command is received (Y in S772), the decorative pattern is stopped by displaying the decorative pattern in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774). ), the variation effect of the decorative pattern is ended (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect processing of the special game (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the special winning opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) and the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 has not reached 9 balls or more, the process returns to S804 (N in S806), and the predetermined opening time has elapsed ( If the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 reaches 9 or more (Y in S806) even though the opening time has not elapsed (Y in S804), the opening/closing control means 275 causes the special winning opening. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), 1 is added to the number of rounds and the process returns to S802 (S812). If the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect display The control unit 305 ends the special game effect process (S814), the special game control unit 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts execution of the specific game, that is, the probability change, the time saving, and the easy entry state (S818). ).

Here, the production process start of the special game (S800) is a production time for informing the player of the start of the game related to the big hit (the special game in which the special electric auditors continuously operate based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device). If the game state before the transition to the waiting process to secure the big hit game is the specific game state (probability variation game or time saving game), the normal game state (probability variation function, time saving function is turned off Set state), the contents of the jackpot game to be executed are set, and the sub control command is set. On the other hand, the process related to the end of the special game effect process (S814) is a standby process or a sub-control for ensuring an effect time for informing the player of the end of the big hit game and the presence/absence of transition to the specific game state. Command transmission processing is executed. The production process start (S800) and the production process end (S814) of these special games are called "big hit (winning series) start demo" and "big hit (winning series) end demo".

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a process of a small hit game. In the small hit game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the special winning opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time has elapsed (N of S822), and opened. If the time has elapsed (Y in S822), the special winning opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the opening/closing for the set number of times has not been completed (N in S826), 1 is added to the number of opening/closing and the process returns to S820. (S828), if the opening and closing of the set number of times has been completed (Y of S826), the small hit game is ended.

It should be noted that, even when the small hit game is carried out, similar control regarding time called "start demo" and "end demo" may be performed as in the above-described big hit game. Incidentally, when executing the small hit game, generally even if the small hit game in the specific game state is started, unlike the big hit game, unless the specific game satisfies other end conditions, the small hit game There is no transition to a normal game triggered by the execution of (probability variation function, processing for turning off the time saving function is not performed).

In the base technology, the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game, that is, the second game is one big hit than the first game. In the above example, the expected value for winning the prize ball is increased, but in another example, the expected value for winning the first game may be designed to be higher than that of the second game. However, it may be designed so that the expected value of winning balls in the first game and the second game are substantially equal to each other. In the latter case, the number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game may be designed to be equal to each other. For example, in the first game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 100% is executed, and in the second game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 4 times with a probability of 50%. However, a special game in which a unit game is executed 16 times with a probability of 50% may be executed. In any case, a special area is provided in the special winning opening, and when the game ball that entered the big winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the end of the special game. It may be configured such that a specific game such as a probability change state is executed. In this case, the special game executed when the big hit in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game executed when the big hit is in the first game May be configured so that the probability that the normal game in the probability variation state is executed after the special game is high is high. For example, there is a first hit in which a special game that makes it relatively difficult to enter a specific area is executed, and a second hit in which a special game that makes it relatively easy to enter a specific area is executed. The second game may be provided so that the probability of winning the second game is higher than that of the first game. Alternatively, the probability of winning the second winning in the first game is less than 100%, but the probability of winning the second winning in the second game may be 100%.

(Prerequisite technology 2)
Next, the basic configuration of the slot machine will be described as a prerequisite technique.
FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing a basic structure on the outer surface of the slot machine 1010. The slot machine 1010 includes a housing base 1102 that is mainly a box-shaped body, a housing door 1104 provided on the front surface of the housing base 1102, and various housings provided on the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104. And a device. The housing door portion 1104 is a door body that is openably and closably attached to the opening of the housing base portion 1102, and the housing base portion 1102 and the housing door portion 1104 are integrated to form a housing of the slot machine 1010. Form. The housing door portion 1104 is locked during business hours of the game shop, and unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 1010 is prevented. The inside can be accessed only when the cabinet door 1104 is unlocked by an employee of the game shop.

A transparent window 1132 is provided in the front surface of the housing door portion 1104 substantially in the center thereof, and a reel that rotates inside is visible through the transparent window 1132. On the upper part of the front surface of the casing door 1104, a performance display device 1130 for displaying performance contents is provided. A first bet button 1112a, a second bet button 1112b, a settlement button 1113, a cross key 1118, an effect button 1120, and a medal slot 1110 are provided in an operation area provided below the transparent window 1132 in the housing door 1104. Be done. The first bet button 1112a is a button for placing one medal (hereinafter also referred to as “betting”), and the second bet button 1112b is a so-called max bet button, which is the maximum bet number of three. It is a button for putting a medal. The settlement button 1113 is a button for instructing the player to pay out the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 1110 and stored as stored medals or bets. The cross key 1118 and the effect button 1120 are operation input means for receiving an operation input of the player as an effect. Below the bet buttons 1112a and 11b, there is provided a start lever 1114 for the player to instruct rotation start of the reel. To the right of the start lever 1114, a left stop button 1116a, a middle stop button 1116b, and a right stop button 1116c for respectively instructing rotation stop of the three reels are provided. A medal payout opening 1108 and a medal tray 1106 are provided in front of the housing door section 1104, and speakers 1122 are provided on the left and right of the payout exit 1108. A plurality of effect lamps 1124 are provided at a plurality of locations such as the outer periphery of the housing door 1104.

A state display lamp, a number-of-times display lamp, a stored number display lamp, and a payout number display lamp are provided on the effect display device 1130, which is not shown. The state display lamp is lit when, for example, a bonus game or AT (assist time) is started, and is lit when it is finished. The number display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of bonus games and the number of times AT has been executed. The accumulated number display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of accumulated (credited) game medals. The payout amount display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of game medals to be paid out when a small winning combination is established. The payout amount display lamp displays, when an abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1010, an alphabetic character indicating the type of the error. For example, there are a hopper empty error, a game medal payout error, a game medal retention error, a game medal backflow error, an auxiliary storage full error, a spinning cylinder stop error, and a set value error. The hopper empty error is an error when the game medal in the hopper tank 1162 becomes empty. The game medal payout error is an error when the game medal is paid out at a timing different from the original timing. The game medal retention error is an error when a game medal is clogged inside the medal insertion slot 1110. The game medal backflow error is an error when the game medal advances in a direction different from the original route, such as a game medal entering from a position different from the medal slot 1110. The auxiliary storage full error is an error when the game medals in the hopper tank 1162 are full. The spinning cylinder stop error is an error when each reel does not stop at a predetermined position. The set value error is an error when the set value is outside the predetermined numerical range.

FIG. 31 is a rear view of the housing door 1104 exposed when the housing door 1104 is opened. A transparent window 1132 is provided at approximately the center. A sub-control device 1300, which is a so-called sub-board, is installed in the upper part to control the effect in the game. Below the transparent window 1132, a medal selector 1150, a medal guide path 1152 to the right of the medal selector 1150, and a medal return path 1154 below are provided. When a medal is inserted into a medal insertion slot, which will be described later, the medal selector 1150 allocates the medal to the medal guide path 1152 when the medal can be accepted, and the medal return path 1154 when the medal cannot be accepted. The medals distributed to the medal guiding path 1152 are stored in a hopper tank described later through the medal guiding path 1152.

FIG. 32 is a front view showing the internal configuration of the housing base 1102 exposed when the housing door 1104 is opened. A left reel 1160a, a middle reel 1160b, and a right reel 1160c are rotatably provided at a substantially central portion of the housing base 1102. The left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c are rotating members in which a plurality of symbols are printed on the outer peripheral surfaces thereof, and the rotational movement of the symbols is rotated by the driving force of the stepping motor through the transparent window 1132. Visible to the player.

A main controller 1200, which is a so-called main board, is installed on the upper part of the housing base 1102 to control the progress of the game. In main controller 1200, a setting change switch 1168 is provided on the right part thereof. The setting change switch 1168 includes a button for changing the game specification in six stages, a keyhole into which a setting key held by an employee of the game store is inserted, and a setting memory for storing the set setting value. The six-stage set values associated with the different game specifications are advantageous to the player as the numerical values of the settings 1 to 6 are larger. When an employee of the amusement store inserts the setting key into the keyhole and turns it, the setting can be changed by operating the button.

A hopper tank 1162 is provided below the housing base 1102, and a payout device 1164 (hereinafter, also referred to as “hopper”) for paying out medals from the payout exit 1108 is provided below the hopper tank 1162. On the left side of the hopper tank 1162, a power supply board 1166 that supplies electric power to each part of the slot machine 1010 is provided.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a symbol array of reels. On the outer peripheral surface of each of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c, a symbol row as shown in the table of the drawing is printed. On each reel, 20 symbols corresponding to the symbol numbers 0 to 19 are arranged at equal intervals. When the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line among these symbols becomes the same predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination for achieving a predetermined winning combination, the winning of the winning combination is determined. On the other hand, the line in which the symbols are lined up includes a line which is not set as an active line, and a predetermined same symbol or a combination line which is not treated as a winning combination even if the predetermined combination is stopped.

In the slot machine 1010 described above, the player puts one to three medals through the medal insertion slot 1110 to play medals. When medals are stored as credits, the player applies one or three medals by pressing the first bet button 1112a, the second bet button 1112b, or the settlement button 1113. When the player operates the start lever 1114, the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c start rotating, and the symbol row on the reel moves vertically at high speed. When the player presses the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c in any order, the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c stop rotating in the order corresponding to the pressing order, Either one of the symbols is displayed at the stop position. When the combination mode of the symbols stopped on the predetermined effective line corresponds to any of a plurality of types of winning combinations, it is determined as “winning”, and the number of medals according to the type of winning combination is paid out, or the gaming state. Migration is performed.

FIG. 34 is a functional block diagram of the slot machine 1010. The slot machine 1010 includes a main controller 1200 and a sub controller 1300. The main control device 1200 is electrically connected to the reels 1160a to 1c, the bet buttons 1112a and 11b, the settlement button 1113, the start lever 1114, the stop buttons 1116a to c, and the setting change switch 1168, and the sub control device 1300 is an effect lamp. 1124, effect display device 1130, speaker 1122, cross key 1118, and effect button 1120 are electrically connected. The main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300 are configured to include elements such as a ROM and a RAM that store data and programs and a CPU used for arithmetic processing in terms of hardware. The functional blocks captured from this perspective will be explained.

Note that each of the functional blocks included in main controller 1200 may be configured such that one of them is mounted in sub controller 1300 instead of main controller 1200. Similarly, each of the functional blocks included in the sub control device 1300 may be configured to be mounted in the main control device 1200 instead of the sub control device 1300. However, since the data transmission/reception between the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300 is one way from the main control device 1200 to the sub control device 1300, the whole operation is realized by the data transmission/reception in such one direction. As described above, each configuration is arranged in the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300. In this way, since the one-way property of data transmission from the main control device 1200 to the sub control device 1300 is maintained, data should be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub control device 1300 to the configuration included in the main control device 1200. And cannot request data transmission. Therefore, the information generated by main controller 1200 cannot be referred from sub controller 1300 unless main controller 1200 unilaterally transmits to sub controller 1300.

The main controller 1200, the winning lottery means 1202, the random number determination means 1204, the winning flag control means 1206, the reel control means 1208, the stop position determination table 1210, the operation sequence detection means 1212, the winning determination means 1214, the payout means 1216, the special game. The control means 1218 and the setting change means 1220 are provided.

The role lottery means 1202 executes a role lottery for determining a winning combination from a plurality of types of roles in response to the player's operation of the start lever 1114, and transmits the result of the role lottery to the sub-control device 1300. To do. The types of winning combinations include small winning combinations, special winning combinations, and re-playing combinations, and if none of the winning combinations is determined, the winning combination is lost. There are multiple types of small roles, and the number of medals corresponding to the types is paid out. Special bonuses include regular bonuses (first-class special effects, also called "RB") and big bonuses (first-class special effects that continuously operate as "BB", second-class special effects Those that operate continuously are also called "MB"). The replay role is also called “replay”, and is a role in which the player can play again after the same number of medals have been inserted without inserting a new medal. The random number determination means 1204 acquires the value of the random number used in the winning combination lottery as the lottery value. The “random number” referred to in the present application does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. As the role lottery, the role lottery means 1202 determines the winning combination depending on whether the lottery value acquired by the random number determination means 1204 falls within any of the lottery value ranges assigned to each role.

The winning flag control means 1206 turns on the flag corresponding to the winning combination among the plurality of flags corresponding to each winning combination. When the winning combination whose flag is turned on is a small combination, the winning is not carried over, and therefore the flag is turned off regardless of whether or not there is a winning when the game ends. If the winning combination with the flag turned on is a special combination, the winning is carried over to the winning, so the flag is kept on until the winning, and when the winning is won, the flag is turned off. When the winning combination whose flag is turned on is the re-gaming combination, since the winning is not carried over, the flag is turned off when the game ends.

The reel control means 1208 controls the start of rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c in response to the operation of the start lever 1114, and the information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114 is subordinated. It is transmitted to the control device 1300. The reel control means 1208 selects one of the stop position determination tables 1210 according to the result of the winning combination lottery. The reel control means 1208 is triggered by the individual pressing of the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c, and stops the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c in response to the pressing. The control is performed and information indicating the pressing of the stop button is transmitted to the sub control device 1300. The reel control means 1208 controls the driving of the stepping motors provided in the reel control means 1208 to control the rotation and stop of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c.

The reel control means 1208, based on the stop position determination table 1210, the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, the right reel 1160c according to the timing and the order in which the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c are depressed. Determine the stop position of. The operation order detecting means 1212 detects the order in which the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c are pressed. The reel control means 1208 detects the reference positions of the rotational positions of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c by the photosensors corresponding to them.

In the stop position determination table 1210, the result of the combination lottery, the positions of the reels 1160a to 1c when the stop buttons 1116a to c are pressed, the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to c, and the plurality of reels 1160a to c. Correspondence is defined which of the symbols is stopped on the activated line. That is, the individual stop position determination table 1210 is prepared according to the type of the small combination, the type of the special combination, and the type of the re-play combination, and the stop timings 1116a to c of the stop buttons 1116a to c are the winning conditions for each combination. It is defined in each stop position determination table 1210. In the case where one of the winning combinations has been won, based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the winning combination, when the pressing timing and the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1c satisfy the winning condition, the reel control means 1208 The stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations are aligned on the activated line. Even when a winning combination is won, if the pressing timing and the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c do not satisfy the winning condition, the reel control means 1208 determines the stop position according to the winning combination. Based on the table 1210, the stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations are not aligned on the activated line. When none of the winning combinations has been won, based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the disengagement, the reel control unit 1208 stops the reels 1160a to 1c so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations are not aligned on the activated line. To decide.

In the present specification, the term “table” simply refers to data in which the correspondence relationship between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option is strictly determined by the table structure. Instead, such a correspondence is widely included in the case where it is realized by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter. Including these, the concept is substantially synonymous with “table” and is also appropriately referred to as “selection criterion”. Further, when using a table structure, the selection criterion that is substantially one kind may be configured by a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. It shows the number of substantial types of tables, not the number of tables that are indexed.

The winning determination means 1214 determines that the winning combination is achieved when the symbol combinations corresponding to any of the winning combinations are on the activated line, and determines the number of payout medals corresponding to the winning combination. The payout means 1216 adds the payout medal number determined by the prize determination means 1214 to the accumulated medal number. However, when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, the medals corresponding to the medals are paid out by the payout device 1164. When the winning combination is a re-playing combination, the same number of medals as the number of inserted medals in the previous game is set again. The winning determination unit 1214 transmits information about winning and information about the number of paid-out medals to the sub-control device 1300.

The special game control means 1218 controls to shift from the normal game to the special game when a special combination is won, and to shift from the special game to the normal game when the ending condition of the special game is satisfied. As special games, there are an RB game that shifts when an RB wins, a BB game that shifts when a BB wins, and an MB game that shifts when an MB wins. The RB game ends when a predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination is stopped eight times on the activated line, or when a game result of twelve times is obtained. The BB game ends when the total number of coins obtained by paying out medals due to a predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination being stopped on the activated line exceeds 285. The MB game ends when the total number of coins obtained by paying out medals due to the stop of a predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination on the activated line exceeds 153. Further, as a special control of the special game, the time from the operation of the stop button to the stop of the corresponding reel is shortened during the MB game, and the game start operation is performed even if the RB is not won during the BB game. It is also possible to have a control to shift to RB internally at the same time (lever operation).

The setting change means 1220 determines the game specification corresponding to the setting value set by the setting change switch 1168 out of the 6-step game specifications, and changes the winning probability of each combination in the combination lottery by the combination lottery means 1202. In the 6-step game specification, the larger the numerical value from the setting 1 to the setting 6, the higher the winning probability. Each time the setting change switch 1168 is operated, the set value is incremented by 1 such as "Setting 1" → "Setting 2" → "Setting 3" → ... → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1", and The increment is cycled by returning from "setting 6" to "setting 1". Finally, by operating the start lever 1114, the set value selected at that time is determined, and the setting change is confirmed.

The sub control device 1300 includes a pattern storage unit 1302, an effect determination unit 1304, and an effect control unit 1306. The pattern storage unit 1302 stores a plurality of types of effect patterns. The effect pattern defines the effect contents to be displayed on the effect display device 1130 as the game progresses, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound pattern output from the speaker 1122, and the like. From the main controller 1200, the effect determination means 1304 provides information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114, the information indicating the pressing of the stop button 1116, the information indicating the result of the winning combination, the information regarding winning, the information regarding the number of medals to be paid out, and the like. To receive. The effect determination means 1304 stores the pattern storage means 1302 in accordance with the result of the winning combination lottery by the winning combination lottery means 1202, the winning situation, and the game state, triggered by the operation of the start lever 1114 or the stop buttons 1116a-c or the stop of the reels 1160a-c. One is selected from a plurality of types of stored effect patterns. The effect control unit 1306 controls the display of the effect display device 1130, the lighting of the effect lamp 1124, and the output from the speaker 1122 according to the effect pattern selected by the effect determination unit 1304. The effect control unit 1306 changes the display content on the effect display device 1130, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound output from the speaker 1122, etc., according to the input content of the effect button 1120 or the cross key 1118. When the bet button 1112a, 11b or the start lever 1114 is newly operated while controlling the effect by the effect pattern, the effect control means 1306 cancels the effect being displayed, and the effect determining means 1304 sets a new game. The corresponding effect pattern is selected, and the effect control unit 1306 starts the effect according to the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a basic game flow in the slot machine 1010. First, it is assumed that none of the reels 1160a to 1160c has rotated (N in S1010) and no bet for medals (N in S1012). In that state, if there is a medal accumulation as credits (Y of S1014), if either of the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b is pressed (Y of S1016), a bet of the number of medals corresponding to the pressed bet button is placed. It is set (S1018). If there is no credit, the routine of this flow is skipped and the remaining processing is skipped until a medal is inserted (N in S1014). Even when the bet buttons 1112a and 11b are not pressed in S1016, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processing is skipped until the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b are pressed (N in S1016). If a bet has already been made in S1012, S1014 to S1018 are skipped (Y in S1012).

If the start lever 1114 is operated while the bet is set (Y in S1020), the winning lottery means 1202 executes winning lottery and advantageous game drawing (AT lottery, etc.) (S1022), and the winning flag control means 1206. Turns on the flag corresponding to the winning combination according to the result of the combination lottery (S1024), and selects the stop position determination table 1210 according to the result of the combination lottery (S1025). If 4.1 seconds have not elapsed from the end of the previous game (N in S1026), the process waits (Y in S1026), and the reel control means 1208 starts rotation of the reels 1160a to 1160c ( (S1028), exits the routine of this flow. If the start lever 1114 is not operated in S1020, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processing is skipped (N in S1020).

In S1010, when at least one of the reels 1160a to 1c is rotating (Y in S1010), if any of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c is pressed (Y in S1030), the state of the flag indicating the winning combination, The reel stop position is determined based on the stop button press timing, the press order, and the stop position determination table 1210 (S1032), and the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped (S1034). If the stop button is not pressed, S1032 and S1034 are skipped (N of S1030). When all reels 1160a to 1160c are stopped (Y in S1036), the winning combination of the winning combination is determined based on their stop positions (S1038), and if there is a winning, the payout number corresponding to the winning combination is determined. Is paid out (S1040). When the payout is completed, the state control process (S1042) relating to the advantageous game is executed, and when the transition condition to the advantageous game (AT etc.) is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous game section and the termination condition of the advantageous game are satisfied. The control relating to the end of the advantageous game section is executed. If all reels are not stopped, S1038, S1040, and S1042 are skipped (N of S1036).

In the reel stop management process, a wait time is set, a control command including information indicating that the reel is waiting to start rotation is generated and written in the command buffer, and initial values of various data used for accelerating the reel are determined. Stored in the storage area of. It is determined whether or not all reels are rotating at a constant speed, and if it is determined that they are not rotating at a constant speed, it is determined whether or not the rotation of all reels is abnormal. Again, the initial values of various data used for accelerating the reels are stored in a predetermined storage area, and the confirmation of all reels is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reels are rotating at a constant speed or if the rotation is not abnormal, the confirmation of all reels is ended.

In addition, when payouts cannot be stored in the payout of medals, the hopper payout is executed. In this hopper payout process, first, driving of the hopper is started, and the process waits until the payout is detected (a hopper empty error occurs if the payout is not detected until a predetermined time elapses). When the payout is detected, the number of payouts is added, and it is determined whether or not the payout is finished. If the payout is not finished, the payout process is repeated, and if the payout is finished, the driving of the hopper is finished.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram schematically showing a hardware configuration of main controller 1200 and sub controller 1300. Main controller 1200 includes main CPU 1250, main RAM 1252, main ROM 1254, and other electronic components. The main ROM 1254 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling all game operations. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 1254 to the main RAM 1252, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 1250. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). A signal indicating the insertion of a medal, a signal indicating the pressing of the bet buttons 1112a and 11b, a signal indicating the pressing of the settlement button 1113, a signal indicating the operation of the start lever 1114, a signal indicating the pressing of the stop buttons 1116a-c, and reels 1160a- The signal indicating the position of c and the like are acquired by the main CPU 1250 via various interfaces not shown. The main CPU 1250 drives and controls an external device such as a stepping motor of the reels 1160a to 1160c by various drive circuits (not shown). In addition, a command required for effect control is transmitted from the main CPU 1250 to the sub control device 1300 together with the result of the winning combination lottery, winning information, and information indicating the operation of each button or lever.

The sub control device 1300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 1350, a sub RAM 1352, a sub ROM 1354, and an effect display control unit 1360. The sub ROM 1354 is one of data storage means for holding a sub control program including effect pattern data in which effect processes are defined, display pattern data in which effect display steps are defined, and the pattern storage means 1302 in FIG. It is a hardware configuration that functions as. A sub control program including effect pattern data and display pattern data is read from the sub ROM 1354 into the sub RAM 1352, and effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 1350. The electronic components are connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown), and are connected by bidirectional communication capable of transmitting and receiving signals to each other. For example, when a command is transmitted from the sub CPU 1350 to the effect display control unit 1360, the command is transmitted multiple times, and the effect display control unit 1360 sends a confirmation response (ACK) to the sub CPU 1350 as soon as the command is properly received at least once. By replying, communication errors due to noise etc. are avoided. If the receiving order of the plurality of commands is different from the normal order, the effect display control unit 1360 ignores the ACK without returning it and returns only the appropriate command. A signal from an external device such as the effect button 1120 is acquired by the sub CPU 1350 via various interfaces not shown, and the corresponding command is transmitted to the effect display control unit 1360 according to the reception of the signal or the number of times of reception. The sub CPU 1350 drives an external device such as the speaker 1122 by various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) in accordance with the effect pattern data to control the effect by voice output. In addition, the sub CPU 1350 transmits the display pattern data to the effect display control unit 1360. The sub CPU 1350 and the effect display control unit 1360 have a hardware configuration that functions as the effect determining unit 1304 and the effect control unit 1306 shown in FIG. 34. In the base technology, an example in which the sub-control device 1300 includes the effect display control unit 1360 will be described. However, the sub-control device 1300 and the effect display control unit 1360 do not need to be integrated as a substrate and are separated. May be formed as separate substrates connected together.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect display control unit 1360. The effect display control unit 1360 includes a control CPU 1362, a control RAM 1364, a data ROM 1366, and a display control circuit 1370. The data ROM 1366 is one of the data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display, and object definition data of a three-dimensional image in a data compressed state. This is a hardware configuration that functions as a unit 1302. The effect image data is an image used for effect display as an effect object indicating a winning determination result or the like, and is, for example, a material image such as a sprite image used for various effects or a moving image used for various effects. The motion data is data that defines motions for adding a motional motion to an image used for various performances at a predetermined timing. The object definition data is data in which the shape of the three-dimensional object is defined.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 1350, material data such as effect image data, motion data and object definition data designated by the display pattern data is read from the data ROM 1366 to the control RAM 1364, and the material data is read. The effect display used is executed by the control CPU 1362. As a result, the control CPU 1362 transmits a command and material data regarding the effect display to the display control circuit 1370, and the display control circuit 1370 controls the display. When a signal indicating the operation of the new bet buttons 1112a and 1112a and the start lever 1114 is received during the effect display, the sub CPU 1350 determines a new effect pattern and sends a command indicating the new effect display to the control CPU 1362. . The sub CPU 1350 and the display control circuit 1370 have a hardware configuration that functions as the effect determination unit 1304 and the effect control unit 1306 shown in FIG. 34.

The display control circuit 1370 includes a decoder 1374, a drawing memory 1376, a drawing circuit 1378, a frame buffer 1380, and a display circuit 1382, each of which is connected via a bus 1372. For the sake of convenience, the bus 1372 in this figure is a comprehensive representation of buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

Material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data sent from the control CPU 1362 is stored in the drawing memory 1376, and the compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 1374. The drawing memory 1376 is used as a work area when the effect image data and motion data are decoded by the decoder 1374, and as a work area when the drawing circuit 1378 executes drawing processing and image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 1378 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 1376 to sequentially execute the commands sent from the control CPU 1362 to generate a display image, and the generated display image as a frame of a moving image in a frame buffer. Stored in 1380. The frame buffer 1380 is a VRAM as a buffer memory that temporarily stores a frame of a moving image to be output to the effect display device 1130. The frame buffer 1380 and the drawing memory 1376 may be formed by a single VRAM so as to divide the area.

The display circuit 1382 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 1380 to the effect display device 1130 in the order of storage in the form of video signals. The frame buffer 1380 has a memory area for two frames, for example, and while the display circuit 1382 outputs the display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 1378 generates the next display image, Store it in the memory area for another frame.

The slot machine 1010 is supplied with power from a power supply board 1166 that functions as a power supply device. A power switch and a reset switch are connected to the power supply device, and signals from these switches are transmitted to the main CPU 1250. The power switch is a switch that accepts power-on and power-off operations from the power supply device to the slot machine 1010. The reset switch is a switch for resetting each circuit and the like mounted on main controller 1200 when an error occurs in slot machine 1010. Electric power from the power supply device is supplied to the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300. On the power supply path from the power supply device to the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300, a power supply monitoring means for monitoring the supply voltage and detecting power cutoff when the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage is provided. The power supply monitoring means determines that the power is cut off when the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage, and outputs a power cut detection signal to the main CPU 1250 or the sub CPU 1350. The reference voltage value when detecting the power failure of the main control device 1200 is set to a value higher than the reference voltage value when detecting the power failure of the sub control device 1300, and is set before the sub control device 1300. Main controller 1200 executes a process (power-off process) programmed to be executed when the power is cut off.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing main program control processing of main controller 1200 in slot machine 1010. In the game control process executed by the main controller 1200, first, a game start process is executed (S1100), a game medal management process is executed (S1102), and the bet number matches a specified number as a start condition, and When the operation of the start lever is accepted (Y of S1104), the lever acceptance process is executed (S1106), and when at least one of the start conditions is not satisfied (N of S1104), the process returns to S1102. Subsequent to S1106, a winning combination determination process is executed (S1108), and whether or not a freeze (effect) is executed as a freeze lottery process and an effect mode during the freeze are determined (S1110). Furthermore, the advantageous game lottery, which is a lottery related to the transition to the advantageous game section, is executed according to the role lottery result and the current game state (S1112). A reel stop management process such as waiting for a wait time is executed (S1114), and a stop display symbol determination process is executed to determine whether or not a game combination is established (S1116). Next, a game medal payout process is executed (S1118), a game end process is executed (S1120), and the process returns to S1100 to repeat the flow of this figure.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in main controller 1200. In this timer interrupt processing, processing such as reading of each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation made by the player, detection (confirmation) of the signal level, transmission of each control command, and the like, It is performed at regular intervals (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). First, interrupt initial processing (register saving, interrupt prohibition, etc.) is executed (S1200), it is determined whether or not a power failure is detected, and if a power failure is detected (Y in S1202), the power is turned on. Disconnection processing is executed (S1204). In the power-off process, the registers are saved, the stack pointer is saved, and the interrupt status is saved. Further, the information about the winning combination determination result and the information about the RT gaming state, which are stored in a predetermined storage area, and the calculation and storage of the checksum are processed. When the power failure is not detected (N of S1202), timer measurement is executed (S1206). The timer measurement is to measure the elapsed time of an arbitrary timer set in the game control process. Next, the control of the display lamp (update of the display value on the display lamp based on the control data output to the output port, etc.) is executed (S1208), and the reading of the input port is executed (S1020). In the reading of the input port, reading and storage of the signal level of each game operation signal input to the input port, determination of the signal level, and the like are performed.

Next, the reel drive control (S1212) for controlling the acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, etc. of the rotation of the reels is repeated until all reels are completed (S1214). Next, a port output process for exciting the reel, hopper, blocker, etc. is executed (S1216), and a control command transmission process is executed (S1218). The outer end signal data stored in the predetermined storage area is read out, an outer end signal is output (S1220), interrupt termination processing (register restoration, interrupt permission, etc.) is executed (S1222), and interrupt return To do.

As another control process executed by main controller 1200, there is a main control power-on process. The main control power-on process is a process that is performed when power is supplied to the main control device 1200 (when the power is turned on), and a temporary stack pointer is set, a checksum is calculated, a check, and the like are performed, and a power recovery process is executed. Processed as you can. The stack pointer is restored and the interrupt is activated, and the game is played based on the information regarding the winning combination determination result, the information regarding the RT gaming state, and the like stored in the predetermined storage area when the power is turned off.

(First embodiment)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the above-described base technology. Hereinafter, the difference from the base technology will be mainly described, and the description of common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the base technology will be denoted by the same reference numerals.

Further, in the following description, the process of displaying the image of the effect on the effect display device 60 will be described as the operation of the effect determining unit 303, but as described above, the effect determining unit actually realized by the sub CPU 310. 303 (sub-main) transmits a command relating to the image of the effect to be displayed to the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) realized by the control CPU 320, and the effect control means 304 controls the display control circuit 326 to generate the effect image. Is displayed on the effect display device 60. Therefore, in the following description, the operation described mainly by the effect determining unit 303 may be expressed mainly by the effect control unit 304 or the display control circuit 346. In the following description, the structure for displaying an image can be replaced with a structure for outputting the information indicated by the image by voice.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment is provided with a plurality of starting winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, a plurality of holding lamps, and one large winning opening, like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology, changes the second special symbol 52 (hereinafter also referred to as "special figure 2"), the first special symbol 51 ( Hereinafter, it is also called "special figure 1") and is executed with priority (special figure 2 priority digestion). On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment is different from the base technology pachinko gaming machine 100 in that it has a small hit V function.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12, the first win/win lottery or the second win/win lottery is executed, and the determination result of the lottery is When it becomes a big hit, a special game is started in which the special winning opening 20 is repeatedly opened. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first win/win lottery or the second win/win lottery results in a predetermined result called small hit, a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a short time is executed. This small hit game is distinguished from the big hit because it has only one unit game repeated a plurality of times in the case of a big hit.

When the small hitting game is being executed, when the game ball that entered the special winning opening enters a specific area called the V zone in the special winning opening, the special electric auditors are continuously operated to execute the big hitting game. The condition device for operating the accessory continuous operation device is operated, and the special game in which the special winning opening is opened for a long time is executed by promoting from the small hit to the big hit. So-called small hit V occurs. That is, the special game control means 260, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit, or the game ball that entered the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game is a specific area inside the big winning opening 20. A special game is executed when passing. Therefore, the small hitting game in the first embodiment is substantially the same operation as the second kind of pachinko game called in the past. As a difference between the model that adopts the small hit V and the second type Pachinko game, in the small hit V, depending on the stop display mode (so-called one kind of hit type) of the special symbol that triggered the execution of the small hit game The condition device (feature continuous operation device) that operates when entering a specific area can be different, and the profit obtained by one V winning can be changed.

When the special game ends, a specific game called a variable time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as "time saving") is performed with a predetermined probability (100% in the first embodiment). Time saving is continued until a new big hit occurs after the special game ends or the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number. The time saving of the first embodiment is a state in which the ease of entering the second starting winning opening is higher than in the normal state, which corresponds to the easy state of entering the ball in the base technology, and is also called Den Chu support. Time saving includes (1) shortening of the variation time of the special symbol, (2) probability change of the ordinary symbol, (3) reduction of the variation time of the ordinary symbol, and (4) extension of the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90. The ordinary electric accessory 90 is a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 12 changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.

Further, as will be described later, in the win/loss lottery triggered by the ball entering the second starting opening 12, the probability of being determined as a small hit is set to be high. Therefore, a small hit is likely to occur during the shortened time when the ease of entering the second starting opening 12 is increased, and the possibility of the small hit V is also increased. In addition, it is a big hit compared with the small hit V, and the big hit at which the special game is started when the symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the big hit is also referred to as "symbol big hit". In the normal game of the normal state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to enter the second starting opening 12 except the situation of the chance effect (first hit of the normal symbol) described later, so first enter the first starting opening 11. Sphere, get the special jackpot of special figure 1 and shift to shorter working hours. Then, in the time saving, enter the second starting opening 12 to win the small hit V or the pattern big hit, and after the special game ends, the time saving continues to aim for continuous success of the small hit V and the pattern big hit. Becomes In the pachinko gaming machine that adopts the small hit V as in the first embodiment, when the setting function is installed, the big hit which is not affected by the set value and develops from the small hit is the main game purpose in the specific game. Therefore, as compared with the specific game (probability change state) in the model having the probability change function related to the winning or failure of the special symbol like the base technology, it becomes possible to suppress the setting difference in the game property during the specific game. Specifically, in the case of playing a specific game that continues 100 times, in the case of a model that adopts a small hit V (small hit probability 1/100), there is a possibility that a big hit can be won from a small hit during a specific game. 63%, but in the case of probability variation machines (probability variation probability: setting 1=1/100, setting 6=1/80) as in the base technology, the probability of a big hit during the probability variation is 63% (setting 1) ~ It greatly changes to 71% (setting 6).

FIG. 40 shows a main game flow of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. As described above, at the normal time (at the time of the normal game in the normal state), the player is allowed to enter the first starting opening 11 to obtain the symbol jackpot according to the special figure 1. The symbol jackpot of Toku-zu 1 is a so-called first hit, and includes a 15R jackpot in which 9 times are saved, a 4R jackpot in which 9 times are saved, and a 4R jackpot in which 1 hour is saved. Any of these multiple types of jackpots is assigned based on the type of jackpot symbol.

Nine times saving is given means that after the special game ends, the game shifts to a normal game in a time saving state, and the time saving state occurs when a big hit (including both a symbol big hit and a small hit V) occurs, or a normal play. It means that it ends when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in 9 is executed 9 times. In addition, once the time saving is given, after the special game is completed, the game shifts to the normal game in the time saving state, and when the time saving state causes a big hit, or the special game 2 in the normal game is changed once. It means to end when done. Note that the time saving end condition described here is described assuming that a preferable game is performed in order to obtain a payout in designing a gaming machine, and detailed end conditions will be described later.

In the case of a big hit to which 9 times are saved, when the special game ends, the game is shifted to a normal game in a time saving state, and the fluctuations of special figure 2 are executed 9 times, and the symbol fluctuations for the remaining 4 reserves at the end The rush effect is displayed while (typically, the four changes in FIG. 2) are executed. In addition, in the case of a big hit to which one time saving is applied, the game is shifted to the normal game in the time saving state after the special game is completed, and while the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed once, the four holdings existing at the time of the completion thereof. The chance effect is displayed while the symbol variation (typically, four variations of special figure 2) is executed. If a big hit does not occur due to the symbol fluctuation during the time saving and the symbol fluctuation for the four held, the normal time is restored.

In the symbol fluctuation during the time saving, or the symbol fluctuation four times after the end of the time saving, a small hit V (Special drawing 2 small hit V), the special drawing when the fluctuation result of the special drawing 2 is a small hit 2 symbol big hit, or special figure 1 symbol big hit can occur. Toku-zu 2 The small hit V is distributed to either a 15R big hit to which 9 times are shortened, a 10R big hit to which 9 times are shortened, or a 5R big hit to which 9 times are shortened. Special figure 2 design big hit is a 5R big hit, which is given 9 times reduction in working hours. The special figure 1 design big hit is distributed to either the 15R big hit to which 9 time saving is given, or the 4R big hit to which 9 time saving is given. When these big hits are finished, the game is returned to the normal game (rush effect) in the time saving state, and the symbols are changed during the time saving, or the symbols are changed four times after the end of the time saving, and it is aimed to obtain the big hit again.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment can open the ordinary electric accessory 90 for a long time in accordance with the hitting of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state. Then, the chance effect (normal electric opening effect) is displayed during the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and also during the symbol change of the special figure 2 held during that time. In the variation effect related to the suspension of the special figure 2 that occurs during the normal game in the normal state, since it is a big chance of winning the small hit V, the special effect that is different in appearance from the variation effect of the special figure 1 executed in the same state. Is what you do. Even during the change of the symbols of this special figure 2 hold, special figure 2 small hit V, special figure 2 symbol big hit, or special figure 1 symbol big hit may occur.

FIG. 41 shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. The first starting opening 11 is provided in the lower part of the center of the game area 81 and below the center decoration 64. The first operating port 31 is provided at the upper position of the first starting port 11. The first starting port 11 and the first actuating port 31 make it possible or easy for a game ball launched with a first strength (relatively weak strength in the first embodiment, in other words left hitting) to enter. It is provided in the position. On the other hand, the second starting opening 12, the special winning opening 20, and the second operating opening 32 are games that are launched with a strength different from the first strength (relatively strong strength in the first embodiment, in other words, right-handed). The ball is provided at a position where it can enter or is easy to enter. In the first embodiment, the left-handed game ball does not enter the second starting port 12, the special winning opening 20, and the second operating port 32, and the right-handed game ball is the first starting port 11. A game nail and a windmill are arranged in the game area 81 so that the ball does not enter the first operation port 31, and the flow path of the game ball is set.

Inside the special winning opening 20, there is provided a specific area in which a small hit development big hit occurs when the game ball passes, and the specific area passage detection device 504 detects that the game ball has passed the specific area. Detect that. The specific area opening/closing solenoid 506 controls a switching member that switches the state of the specific area between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass and an open state in which the game ball can pass. The specific area opening/closing solenoid 506 controls the switching member according to the control of the opening/closing control means 275 so as to open the specific area when the result of the win/win lottery (also referred to as the result of win/fail judgment) is a small hit. When a ball entering a specific area is detected, a decision is made to shift to a special game. When the entry into the specific area is not detected, the normal game is returned after the small hit game is over.

In the special game according to the first embodiment, the first special game (symbol big hit) executed when the symbol at the time of stop becomes a big hit, and the small hit after the symbol at the time of stop becomes a small hit. There is a second special game (small hit V) that is executed when it develops into a big hit. The first special game is the same as the special game shown in the base technology, that is, it is triggered by the symbol big hit. The second special game is a special game that accompanies the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, triggered by the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area during the small hit game (also referred to as "V prize"). Is.

A state display lamp 502 for indicating the game state of the gaming machine 500 is provided at the lower right position outside the game area 81. The status display lamp 502 is composed of, for example, two lamps, and the first lamp indicates whether or not it is in a time saving state (in this embodiment, a normal electric accessory is in the easy-to-enter state). The lamp indicates whether or not the player is in a game state in which the player should hit the ball to the right (a state in which a normal electric accessory is easy to enter or an operating state of a special electric accessory). The first lamp is turned on when it is a normal game in a time saving state, and is turned off when it is a normal game in a normal state. The second lamp is turned on in the gaming state where the player should hit the ball to the right, that is, in the time saving state, the small hitting gaming state or the special gaming state, and is turned off in the normal state. Therefore, the second lamp of the status display lamp 502 functions as a so-called right-handed indicator light, and displays whether or not the gaming state in which the right-handed person should be right-handed is in a constant display mode.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the probability of the symbol big hit of the special figure 1 and the probability of the symbol big hit of the special figure 2 are both 1/319. Since the pachinko gaming machine 500 does not have a probability varying function of the special symbol, the probability of the symbol jackpot does not vary, and the lottery is always performed at a constant probability for each probability determined by the set value. The small hit probability of Toku-zu 1 is 0, and the small hit probability of Toku-zu 2 is 1/10. As a modification, the small hit probability of Toku-zu 1 may be greater than 0 (for example, 1/500), but is set to a value that is at least smaller than the small hit probability of Toku-zu 2.

Also, in the small hit game, the opening/closing control means 275 opens the special winning opening 20 for a predetermined time of 1.8 seconds or less (for example, 1.6 seconds), and during that time, a specific area inside the special winning opening 20 is also opened. Control to become. It is preferable to adopt a slide-type attacker type (a type in which a game ball can roll on the lid member of the big winning opening and can enter the ball when the lid member is opened) as the big winning opening. The upper 20 or the flow path in the vicinity of the special winning opening 20 is configured, for example, in a zigzag shape, so that a plurality of game balls are retained in the vicinity of the entrance (the lid or the like) of the special winning opening 20. Further, the opening pattern of the special winning opening 20 is to be opened for 0.124 seconds and repeated 13 times with a predetermined closing time in between, so that the player can enter the game ball even if the player's launch is delayed. It is preferable to design so that it can be obtained. Thereby, when the special winning opening 20 is opened for a short time in the small hit game, it is possible to generate a ball entering the big winning opening 20 and a small hit V with a high probability. In other words, the pachinko game machine 500 of the first embodiment is configured so that if a small hit occurs, a small hit V can be obtained.

FIG. 42 shows a breakdown of big hits in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. The symbol big hit of special figure 1 includes 15R big hit of 9 hour-shortening, 4R big hit of 9 hour-shortening, 4R big hit of 1 hour-shortening, distribution probability is 1%, 49% and 50%. It should be noted that the 4R jackpot with one shortening time during the working hours is the same control as the 4R jackpot with nine shortening times. Therefore, in the big hit during the time saving, all 9 times saving time is given. The special jackpot of special figure 2 is a 5R jackpot with 9 hours reduction. The small hit V of the special figure 2 includes 15R big hits of 9 hours/hours, 10R big hits of 9 hours/hours, and 5R big hits of 9 times/hours, and the distribution probabilities are 60%, 10%, and 30%. In addition, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of times of shortening is set to 9, but it is possible to carry out a lottery with a small hit probability of 1/10 9 times, and the small hit or the big hit probability based on the symbol big hit during the time saving is About 61% is set, but as a premium hit, a small hit V and a pattern big hit that will shorten the working hour 100 are provided to substantially guarantee the continuation of the next time (with a probability of about 99.9%, the next small win). The player may have a game state that gives the player a sense of security that the player can win the hit, including the case where a big hit can be won.

1. Structure related to time saving and open lottery (ordinary symbol lottery):
As a result of the open lottery, three types are provided, that is, the first win and the second win. The first win is a hit involving long-time opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and the winning probability in the normal state is about 1/590 (special symbol variation conversion). The second win is a win accompanied by a short opening of the normal electric accessory 90, and the winning probability in the normal state is about 3/590. In the time saving state, the winning probability for the first winning is about 10/11, and the winning probability for the second winning is 0.

The opening/closing control means 275, in the normal game in the normal state, when the open lottery is the first hit (probability of winning 1/590) and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the first hit, a plurality of game balls The normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a predetermined time (hereinafter also referred to as "long open time") that is determined to be equal to or longer than the time interval at which is fired, in other words, it is possible or easy to enter the second starting opening 12. The normal electric accessory 90 is controlled to the open state so that Here, the time interval (shortest time interval) in which two game balls are continuously fired may be 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds. The long open time is less than 6 seconds, and is a value equal to or longer than the time interval at which the upper limit number of reserved game balls (4 in the first embodiment) of the special map 2 (second winning/winning lottery value) is shot. You may. In addition, the long open time may be a value that is equal to or longer than the time that is expected to be required from the start of the game ball launch until the special figure 2 hold increases from 0 to 4. The long opening time in the first embodiment is 5.9 seconds.

The opening/closing control means 275, in the normal game in the time saving state, when the open lottery is the first win (the winning probability is 10/11) and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode showing the first win, the above long time is also displayed. During the opening time, the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened. The long open time of the normal electric auditors product 90 in the normal state may be different from the long open time of the normal electric auditors product 90 in the time shortened state, but in any time, a plurality (preferably four) of games are played. It is set to a value equal to or longer than the time interval at which the sphere is fired. In this way, in the normal game in the normal state, by opening the normal electric accessory 90 for a long time with the first hit of the normal symbol, it is possible to provide the player with a chance to store a plurality of special figure 2 holds even in the normal state. That is, it is possible to provide the player with a chance to win a small hit V multiple times. For example, in the game flow of FIG. 26, it is possible to provide a route that shifts from a normal time to a state of a continuous game after passing a normal symbol.

In addition, when the result of the open lottery is the second hit, the opening time (“short opening time”) of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is shorter than the long opening time, and the maximum entry into the second starting opening 12 is possible. The time may be set to one or two. In addition, the short opening time may be set to a time when it is substantially difficult to enter the second starting opening 12.

The operation termination condition of the ordinary electric auditors product 90 is that the ordinary electric auditors product 90 has been opened for a predetermined time, or the number of balls entering the second starting opening 12 is the special figure 2 (here, the second winning/winning lottery value). This means that the upper limit value (four in the first embodiment) of the reserved number has been reached. The opening/closing control means 275 reaches (1) a long opening time (in the case of the first hit) or a short opening time (in the case of the second hit) after the control of the ordinary electric accessory 90 to the open state. If at least one of the following is satisfied and (2) the number of balls entering the second starting opening 12 reaches four, the ordinary electric accessory 90 is controlled to the closed state. In other words, the state of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is switched so that the ball cannot enter the second starting opening 12 (it is difficult as a modified example).

The long opening of the normal electric auditors product 90 in the normal game that does not go through the big hit (time saving) is an exceptional game flow (probability 1/590). Due to the above operation end condition, it is possible to suppress the excessive occurrence of the small hit V in the normal game which does not go through the big hit (time saving) which is an exceptional game flow, and it becomes easy to stabilize the payout rate within the design range. . Further, when the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a long time in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 from exceeding the expected value of 4 times, and the payout rate on the assumption of the four times fluctuation of the special figure 2. Can be easily realized.

The time saving end conditions are (1) a big hit or a small hit has occurred, and (2) the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 2 is 9 times (in the case of 9 times saving time) or 1 time (in the case of 1 times saving time). (3) The number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 has reached 7 times, (4) The total number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 15 times (in the case of 9 reductions in working hours) or 7 times. It is satisfied when any of the conditions (in the case of one time reduction application) is satisfied. The specific game control means 270 shifts the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to time saving, and individually counts the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 during the time saving. The specific game control means 270 ends the time saving when the above end condition is satisfied. When any of the above (2), (3) and (4) is established, the specific game control means 270 returns the game state of the normal game to the normal state.

In this way, by setting the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 as end conditions for saving time, it is possible to secure the value of one saving time. That is, by the time the fluctuation of the special figure 1 reaches seven times, it is possible to expect a long-opened second start opening 12 to enter the ball, and if a ball enters the second start opening 12, the special figure 1 The Toku-zu 2 changes more preferentially, and a small hit (and a small hit V) can be obtained with a high probability. The number of fluctuations 7 in Toku-zu 1 under the time saving end condition is the upper limit value (4) of the number of holdings in Toku-zu 1 that may exist at the end of the special game, and the first start that may occur if the player makes a left-handed mistake by mistake. This is the total insurance (3 pieces) for entering the mouth 11.

As will be described later, the change in Toku-zu 1 during time saving is only ultra-short change, so the number of insurances is increased in the first embodiment. As a modification, if the variation in Toku-zu 1 during a shorter time is longer, the number of insurances may be smaller (for example, one).

The specific game control means 270, when the time saving end condition is satisfied due to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, at the time of the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 in the variation (in other words, at the end of the change time). End the time saving and return the game state to the normal state.

Here, one symbol variation time (that is, one variation time of special figure 2) triggered by the entry into the second starting opening 12 in the time saving is continuous open lottery (in other words, ordinary symbol lottery) When it is executed as a result, it is set to a value equal to or longer than the time when at least a normal hit of the symbol can occur twice or more. In other words, the second variation pattern determining means 232 selects a variation pattern in which the variation time is defined as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 during the time saving, at least the variation time which is equal to or more than the time at which the normal symbol can be hit twice or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern table is configured such that, as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 during the time saving, at least a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time is specified that is equal to or longer than a time at which a normal symbol can be hit twice or more is selected. Good.

As described in the base technology, for example, the fluctuation time of one time of the ordinary symbol in the time saving may be 2 seconds. In this case, the time at which the hit of at least the normal symbol can occur twice or more is about 10 seconds (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol twice + the operating time of the normal electric auditors once). In the first embodiment, the one-time fluctuation time of Toku-zu 2 during time saving is set to a predetermined time of 10 seconds or more. As a modified example, the one-time fluctuation time of the special figure 2 may be set to a time longer than the long opening time (5.9 seconds in the first embodiment) when the normal symbol is the first hit.

Here, in the case of the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal time, the special figure 2 changes up to four times. This is because, when the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 reaches the upper limit value (4) of the reserved number of the special figure 2, the opening of the normal electric auditors product 90 ends. On the other hand, in the normal game after the end of the 4R big hit, the special figure 2 changes up to 5 times by one time reduction and four times after the end of the time reduction. The ordinary electric accessory 90 that is opened by the first hit of the ordinary symbol in a short time is temporarily closed when the number of balls entering the second starting opening 12 reaches the upper limit value (4) of the reserved number of the special figure 2. .. However, since the variation time of the special figure 2 is more than the time when the hit of the ordinary symbol can occur twice or more, the first hit of the ordinary symbol of the second time occurs and the ordinary electric auditors product 90 is opened, This is because it is possible to further enter the ball into the 2 starting port 12 (typically, the number of holding the special figure 2 is increased by 1).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the chance of passing through the big hit of the time saving once is more advantageous to the player than the chance based on the normal symbol hit in the normal time. Even if the time saving is the minimum one time, by increasing the possibility of winning the small hit V more than the time of the normal symbol hit in the normal time, it is possible to raise the awareness of the player who is trying to win the big hit, and , Can reward players who have won the jackpot.

The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252, when the time saving is finished at the time of stop display of the special symbol variation whose winning/winning lottery result is off, the special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is a predetermined special symbol. Extend the fixed time of the special symbol when it is fixedly displayed only for a fixed time. In other words, the next symbol variation based on the held winning/winning lottery value (typically, the second winning/winning lottery value) is not started until the special symbol fixed time set for a particularly long time elapses from the time saving end. 1st special figure control means 251 and 2nd special figure control means 252, whether or not it is the fixed display timing of the special symbol, (1) specific game control means 270 ended the time saving (big hit symbol, small It is determined by detecting (when the winning symbol stops, except when the time saving ends). As a modified example, (2) it may be determined by counting the number of times the special symbol (special figure 2) changes in time saving. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the special condition 1 and the special map 2 each have a time saving end condition independently determined, and the special map 2 change may be executed in normal times, so the method (1) is used. It is more suitable.

The special figure fixed time at the end of the time saving when the winning/winning lottery result in the first embodiment is out is 6 seconds. Therefore, even if the normal symbol hits immediately before the end of the time saving, the opening (5.9 seconds) of the normal electric accessory 90 ends before the special figure fixed time elapses. As a result, the special figure 2 hold increases more than expected (as a situation, when the special figure 2 does not have the fixed time of the special figure of 6 seconds and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 starts during the operation of the ordinary electric auditors, One unreserved vacant space can be created, so that it is possible to suppress the unintentional fifth variation of the special diagram 2 after the time saving is finished, that is, it is possible to prevent the small hit V from exceeding the design range. .

The effect determination means 303 executes the notice lottery when the result of the open lottery is out of place or the second win, and the first win occurs according to the result of the notice lottery, and the chance state (the long length of the ordinary electric auditors 90) is generated. A notice effect (also referred to as "gase notice effect") that causes the player to expect to enter the "open" is displayed. For example, the effect determination means 303 may display the preliminary announcement effect with a predetermined probability when the result of the open lottery is out or the second hit. In addition, in the first embodiment, the above-mentioned preliminary announcement effect is not displayed based on the result of the winning or failure drawing of the special drawing.

When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the first hit (long open) during the change of the special figure 1 in the normal game in the normal state, the effect determination means 303 corresponds to the change of the special figure 1 ( A normal electric opening effect (corresponding to a hold charge effect described later) is displayed in a mode according to the execution state of the decorative symbol 61 (variable effect, etc.). The normal electric opening production includes a notice production (hereinafter also referred to as “rush production”) having a content that suggests entry into a chance state. In addition, the normal electric opening release effect includes a notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “right-handed navigation”) that prompts a right-handed hit. The right-handed navigation may be a content that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at a ball entering the second starting opening 12 or a content that prompts the reservation of the special figure 2 to be accumulated. Here, if the normal electric accessory works immediately after the stop display of the normal symbol, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to hold enough hold even if he starts right-handing by seeing "right-handed navigation". , After setting the time for normal symbol fixing time or normal electric symbol operation start demonstration time, etc. until the normal electric accessory opens after the stop display is set, use that time to "right hit navigation" It is preferable to produce an effect. In addition, it is said that the execution start timing of the ordinary electric opening effect is stopped and displayed in a mode in which the normal symbol indicates the first hit, but if the right strike is not executed, the normal electric accessory (special figure 2 start opening) is displayed. On the other hand, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball, it may be executable from a predetermined timing before the stop display (for example, about 5 seconds remaining in the normal symbol variation time when the normal symbol is the first hit). At this timing, the normal symbol winning effect that is a successful pattern is executed with respect to the above-mentioned preliminary announcement effect, and the right-handing induction effect is made to let the player understand the situation where the player should right-hand in the remaining 5 seconds).

If the fluctuation of the special figure 1 at the normal time (during non-time saving game) is not established or the normal reach is established, the effect determination means 303 rushes together with the display of the variable effect (for example, overlaid on the variable effect). The effect may be displayed, and the right-hand navigation may be displayed in a relatively large size. On the other hand, if the change in Toku-zu 1 is in progress, the right-hand navigation may be displayed in a relatively small size without displaying the entry effect. That is, the effect determination unit 303 may display the priority of reach unfulfilled or normal reach<normal electric open effect<super reach. In addition, the first hit of the normal symbol can be established even while the variation of the special symbol is not executed in the normal state. Therefore, the normal electric opening effect can be displayed even if the variable effect is not being displayed. Regarding the display priority, in the drawing process for the effect display device 60, the one displayed in the foreground in a superimposed manner is treated as a high priority, the one having a large effect display area is treated as a high priority, Any display mode, such as a combination, may be used as long as it is a display mode that the player generally prefers to visually recognize.

2. Configurations related to multiple variations pattern modes:
FIG. 43 shows a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern modes. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of variation pattern modes in which the variation patterns of the variation patterns of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 are different. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation patterns of the special patterns 1 and 2 are determined by referring to the different fluctuation pattern tables for the respective fluctuation pattern modes. Hereinafter, the variation pattern table referred to in the mode N will be referred to as a mode N table.

The main board 200 of the first embodiment stores a mode 0 table to a mode 7 table. The first variation pattern determination means 231 selects any one of the mode 0 table to the mode 2 table according to the game state, and refers to the selected variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern of Toku-zu 1. The second variation pattern determination means 232 selects one of the mode 0 table and the mode 3 table to the mode 7 table according to the game state, and refers to the selected variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern of the special figure 2. . In other words, after the special game is finished, the mode states of the variation pattern tables of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are individually switched according to the number of times of variation. By doing so, among the time saving end conditions provided for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, particularly at a timing when there is an acceptance to produce a special effect such as the final variation of the special time saving game It is possible to solve the problem that the table to be deviated due to the execution of the fluctuation of the special figure 1.

The first variation pattern determining means 231 selects a variation pattern by referring to the mode 1 table for 7 variations of the special figure 1 after the 4R big hit of one time saving (after the special game), and then selects the mode 0 table. The variation pattern of Toku-zu 1 is selected with reference. Further, the first variation pattern determination means 231 is a variation pattern with reference to the mode 2 table for the 7 variations of special FIG. Is selected, and then the variation pattern of Toku-zu 1 is selected by referring to the mode 0 table. The 7 fluctuations in special figure 1 after the end of the special game correspond to the number of fluctuations in special figure 1 which is a time saving end condition. Both the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table define a fluctuation pattern of ultra-shortening fluctuation (about 3 seconds in the first embodiment). In other words, both the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table are set so that the ultra-shortening variation is selected.

When the variation pattern of the mode 1 or the mode 2 is selected by the first variation pattern determination means 231, the effect determination means 303 displays an effect indicating that the rush effect (effect mode of the time saving game) is being prepared. Good. Further, the effect determination means 303 may select a variable effect pattern (and a notice effect pattern, the same applies hereinafter) that displays a dummy round effect, and display the dummy round effect. The dummy round effect may be a content that makes it look as if a special game is currently being played, or a content that makes it appear as if the final round of the special game is continuing. In addition, when the variation of Toku-zu 1 in the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is a hit, "hit notification effect variation (10 seconds)" or the like other than "super shortening variation" may be selectable. It is preferable that the decorative symbol display on the effect display device 60 regarding the variation of the special figure 1 selected by the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is performed so as not to be conspicuous at the corners of the display area. When the variation of the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is the fifth time or the like, since the player may have left-handed without understanding the playability, a dedicated right-handed guidance effect is displayed. It may be one.

As a modification, at least one of mode 1 and mode 2 may not be provided. When mode 1 and mode 2 are provided, the fluctuation of special figure 1 is changed at the time of left-handing when the continuous holiday is ended by the fluctuation of special figure 2 (except when the time saving is ended by the fluctuation of 7 times of special figure 1). This is because there is a possibility of extremely short fluctuations. As another modified example, when mode 1 and mode 2 are provided, a special effect corresponding to the ultra-shortening variation of special figure 1 is provided, and the effect determining means 303 changes the special figure 1 after the end of the condominium state. The special effect may be displayed.

The second variation pattern determination means 232 selects the variation pattern of the special figure 2 by referring to the mode 3 table at the first variation of the special figure 2 after the one-time 4R big hit, and then refers to the mode 0 table. Then, the variation pattern of Toku-zu 2 is selected. Since the variation of Toku-zu 2 in the normal state is a chance to win the small hit V, the variation pattern of Toku-zu 2 in the mode 0 is a variation pattern for chance production. When the variation pattern for chance production is selected by the second variation pattern determination means 232, the effect determination means 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the chance effect and displays the chance effect.

Further, the mode 3 table is set so that the variation pattern for chance performance is selected. The chance effect includes a hold charge effect. The hold charge effect is an effect of urging the user to accumulate the hold of the special figure 2. The hold charge effect may be (1) a content that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the second starting opening 12, (2) a content that prompts a right hit, or (3) a right hit. If not performed, the content may suggest that it is disadvantageous. When the variation pattern for chance performance is selected by the second variation pattern determination means 232, the effect determination means 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the chance effect, and creates the chance effect (the reserved charge effect as the special figure variation effect). (Including) is displayed.

The variation pattern of the mode 3 table is a new firing of the game ball in a short time-passage of the operating port-opening lottery, a regular symbol variation-a regular symbol per time-a variation time which is equal to or longer than the time required to release the normal electric accessory 90. Stipulate. Here, if there is a failure in the open lottery, it is preferable that the insurance is defined as the above open lottery and the variable time that is equal to or longer than the time when the normal symbol fluctuation is equal to or more than 2 fluctuations. The reason for designing in this way is that the operation ending condition of the ordinary electric accessory 90 includes "when there are four game balls (upper limit of the number of special figures 2 which can be reserved)", and the mode 3 This is because if the normal electric accessory 90 is not operated at least once while the table is being changed, the four holdings of the special figure 2 cannot be stored. If the variation in the case of the mode 3 table is a small hit or a big hit, it will be in a shorter time game state even after the special game, so that an effect which is shorter than the above time and immediately informs the hit is displayed. Or may include what is executed.

The second variation pattern determining means 232, in the case of a big hit of 9 hours reduction, (1) refers to the mode 4 table once, (2) refers to the mode 5 table once, (3) refers to the mode 6 table 7 times, (4) The mode 7 table is referred to four times, and the variation patterns corresponding to the 13 variations in FIG.

The mode 4 table defines the variation pattern for the big hit end demonstration effect as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 first variation in the time saving. When the variation pattern for the jackpot end demonstration effect is selected by the second variation pattern determination means 232, the effect determination means 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the jackpot end demonstration and displays the jackpot end demonstration effect. The jackpot end demo production is a content that shows the end of the jackpot (current number of condominiums and cumulative winning ball display etc.), content that shows a rush to time saving, content that urges you to hit right, production mode selection screen for rush production (normal Character selection such as a type, a large number of notice types, a one-time notification type, etc.) may be included. The reason why the special jackpot 2 ending demonstration effect is displayed at the first change in special time chart 2 in a time saving is to prompt the right hitting and to save the special chart 2 hold. As another effect, it becomes easy to hide the special figure 1 change executed before the special figure 2 change, and it is easy to shorten the time from the end of the big hit to the start of the special figure 2 change seen by the player.

When the effect determination means 303 receives a command (not information including the variation pattern of the mode 4 table) instructing execution of the jackpot end demo from the main board 200, a round effect (for example, the final round effect of the special game). May continue. In this case, when the player stops the firing of the game ball in the final round, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 suspension does not occur and the end demo (special figure 2 variation effect by the mode 4 table) does not proceed indefinitely. Therefore, the effect determining means 303 is an effect that prompts a right-handed stroke after a lapse of a predetermined time after receiving the command for executing the jackpot end demonstration, in other words, a content that prompts a shot aiming at the second starting opening 12. May be displayed. Especially when it is the first hit (a big hit during non-hour saving), when shifting to the game state of 9 times saving time corresponding to the rush effect, there is often no situation where the special map 2 is not held, so only during the first hit The end demo effect may be allowed to be executed during the actual big hit end demonstration time of the main board 200, in which case the mode 4 table is omitted and the number of mode 6 tables is increased by one. In addition, when the fluctuation in the mode 4 table is a big hit or a small hit, instead of (or in addition to) the big hit end demo, the number of rounds additionally acquired (round number of the special game) The number of balls may be notified, and an effect that two big hits and a small hit are continuous may be provided. It should be noted that, by executing the effect that the hit is included in the hold in advance at the start demonstration of the big hit and the small hit, it is possible to change the hit variation of the mode 4 table from the end demo effect without feeling awkward. However, in that case, in the effect of the start demonstration, the notification type of the hit type can be executed when the actual variation of the subsequent hit is performed by setting the type of the subsequent hit as non-notification. , Even if it is a big hit, you can not wait to see how many balls will be added and wait for your expectations.

The mode 5 table to the mode 7 table may include a plurality of types of effects (first agitation effect, second agitation effect, third agitation effect,..., Normal effect, etc.), and the selection probability of each effect. A table in which different values are set may be used. By dividing the variation pattern table, it is possible to change the appearance frequency of the effect, and for example, it is easy to avoid the end of the condominium state without any irritating effect. As a modified example, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 may be determined by one variation pattern table from the second variation when the time saving is applied 9 times to the four variations after the time reduction is applied. When the fluctuation time of mode 5> the fluctuation time of mode 6, the order of mode 5 and mode 6 is switched in order to secure a long fluctuation time of the final fluctuation in a short time and to store the suspension of Toku-zu 2 up to the upper limit. May be.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment does not have a fluctuation pattern table dedicated to the final fluctuation for notifying the player of the payout at the time saving game end timing often found in general pachinko gaming machines. The final fluctuation in the present embodiment is a fluctuation in which the suspension of Toku-zu 2 is 0 after the end of time saving (mainly the fourth fluctuation after the end of time saving), and is typically the final fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 in the condominium state. . The reason is that since the small hit probability of Toku-zu 2 is as high as 1/10, it is better not to provide a difference from other fluctuations during the rush until then. In addition, if a variation pattern table dedicated to the display of payouts is provided, it is possible to use it in an irregular situation such as when the time saving ends due to fluctuations in special map 1 or when there are only 3 special map 2 suspensions at the end of time saving. There is a possibility that the payout notification effect may be displayed (original chance effect) during the change in the special figure 2 due to the normal symbol hit at that time. In order to avoid this, it is preferable not to provide a variation pattern table dedicated to the payout notification.

Here, the configuration of the payout notification will be described. The effect determination means 303, (1) when the fluctuation of the special symbol that triggers the end of time saving ends with the result of deviation, or (2) the second winning/winning lottery value remaining after the time saving ends (that is, special figure 2 hold) When the variation based on is ended as a result of deviation, the effect regarding the payout up to that point (hereinafter referred to as “ball payout notification effect”) is displayed for a predetermined time. The display time of the payout notification effect may be, for example, 5 seconds. The above (1) and (2) are cases where the effect state to be controlled by the effect determining unit 303 returns from the time saving state (rush effect) to the normal time. Further, the above (1) is a case where there is no reservation of Toku-zu 2 at the time when the final change of time saving is completed. When the variation of (1) or (2) is a big hit (including a small hit V), the payout notification effect is not executed until the next time saving end.

The payout notification production is (1) a payout during a special game, (2) a win for a small hit game, and (3) a payout during a time saving period (special prize 2 starting prizes and winning awards such as general winning awards For spheres, the content of notifying only (1), the content of notifying (1)+(2), the content of notifying (1)+(3), or the content of (1)+(2)+(3) It may be the content to be notified. The notified payout ball may be the total payout ball during the extended holiday period when one or more special games are continuously executed with one or more time saving. In addition, the notified payout ball is the total of the payout balls in the initial win and the continuous vacation state in FIG. 26, in other words, from the occurrence of the initial win in the normal time to the return to the normal time again through the continuous vacation state. It may be the total.

The payout may be the number of game balls paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 500 (the number of prize balls), and the number of game balls that have been out is subtracted from the number of game balls paid out. It may be a number (so-called net increase). The effect determination means 303 may acquire the number of game balls paid out from the payout control board 155, or the number of out balls from the out detection device 39 to count the number of balls paid out.

When the special symbol (that is, special figure 1) indicating the result of the hit determination based on the ball entering the first starting opening 11 is changing, the effect determination means 303 pays out in a mode with higher visibility than the variable effect. Display the notification effect. Specifically, the effect determination means 303 may temporarily hide the variable screen of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation in the special figure 1 except when the decorative symbol 61 is stopped and display the payout notification effect. .. Further, the effect determination means 303 may display the payout notification effect in an area different from the variable display area (stop display area) of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the special figure 1 change. Moreover, when displaying the payout notification effect, the effect determination means 303 may display the special figure 1 fluctuation on a screen smaller than the normal screen (such as a wipe) or a screen smaller than the display screen of the payout notification effect. Good.

According to this aspect, the variation effect related to Toku-zu 2 having a relatively high probability of a small hit is displayed without hindering the payout notification effect, and the time saving effect mode (rush effect) is ended according to various situations. In this case, the payout can be notified at a suitable timing and mode. It should be noted that, after the time saving, the effect determination unit 303 (1) when both the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation have not been executed for a predetermined time, or (2) when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is started. (Except when 10 minutes or more has elapsed after the end of the rush effect), it may be determined as the payout notification timing, and the payout notification effect may be displayed.

3. Configuration related to opportunity production:
The effect determination means 303 is changing the special figure 2 when the change pattern mode of the special figure 2 is the mode 0 (in other words, when the special figure 2 change pattern of the mode 0 is selected by the second change pattern determination means 232.) , Display the chance production. The chance production is displayed at the time of the special figure 2 hold occurrence when (1) the normal symbol in the normal case of FIG. 26 is the first hit. In addition, (2) It is displayed after the 4R big hit of one time saving, and during the remaining retention (holding of special figure 2) after the completion of the time reduction. In any case, the four fluctuations of Toku-zu 2 are assumed.

In addition, the game state of the main board 200 is the same (normal state) during the above (1) and (2), after the big hit of 9 times saving, and when the remaining holding (holding of special figure 2) after finishing the saving time is being exhausted. However, since the variation pattern modes are different (different variation patterns are selected from different variation pattern tables), the former and the latter display different effects. The former is chance production, and the latter is rush production.

When the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long open) in the normal state, the effect determination unit 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the above-described hold charge effect. The effect determination means 303 may display the hold charge effect for the time period during which the normal electric accessory 90 is controlled to be in the open state. The hold charge effect may include an effect (normal electric opening effect) having a content of notifying the opening of the normal electric auditors product 90. Further, the hold charge effect may include an effect (chance inrush effect) having a content that gives advance notice to the opportunity effect.

The hold charge effect and the opportunity rush effect are of high priority among the image effects displayed by the effect determination means 303 (for example, an error display, a right-handed display, a decorative pattern at the time of stop display, a hold number display, etc. of the player). The priority is set lower than the information necessary for the game, and the priority is set higher than other notice productions that are changing). This is because, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, whether or not the small hit V is obtained has a great influence on the payout, and it is important to save the special figure 2 hold in order to obtain the small hit V. However, when a jackpot game machine with a high probability of a big hit (for example, about 70%) when it operates in a specific mode (herein referred to as a "special jackpot") is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 500, a special jackpot. May be executed with priority over the hold charge effect and the opportunity rush effect. Further, during the display of the hold charge effect and the entry of the chance, the effect of operating an accessory other than the special accessory (an accessory having a lower expectation of a big hit than the special accessory) may be canceled.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation is started during the normal hold charge effect display, the effect determination means 303 changes the special figure 2 fluctuation after the display of the hold charge effect (after the operation of the ordinary electric auditors product 90 ends). The variable display of the corresponding decorative pattern 61 is started. In this case, the effect determination unit 303 may start the change of the decorative pattern 61 based on the change effect pattern corresponding to the change pattern of the special figure 2 from the middle. Further, the effect determination means 303 may display the variable display of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the change in the special figure 1 in the area different from the display area of the hold charge effect, which is smaller than usual, during the hold charge effect display. It may be displayed in an area smaller than the display area of the charge effect (wipe display or the like).

As described with reference to FIG. 43, the reserved charge effect is displayed at the first change in the special figure 2 during the time saving after the end of the 4R big hit of one time saving. The effect determination unit 303 does not display the effect related to the deviation variation of the special figure 1 during the time saving (displays a small decorative design 61 in order to make it possible to identify that the variation is occurring). This is because the change in Toku-zu 1 during the shortening of time is fixed for 3 seconds for the purpose of immediate digestion, and important contents directly linked to the payout are not displayed.

The effect determination means 303 is held in both the case where the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long opening) in the normal state, the time saving after the end of the 4R big hit of the time saving once, and the case of the first variation of the special map 2. Display the charge effect. However, there is a difference in that the former is an effect during the opening of the normal electric auditors product 90 and the latter is an effect during the change of the special figure 2. Since the special figure 1 may fluctuate in various patterns while the normal electric accessory 90 is opened, the effect determination unit 303 causes the pending charge effect to be displayed and causes the fluctuation (including deviation) of the special figure 1 to occur. The variable effect of the corresponding decorative pattern 61 is displayed smaller than the hold charge effect (wipe display or the like).

The display priority of the hold charge effect in the normal state is set by the situation of the change effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the change in the special figure 1. For example, if the variation pattern of special figure 1 is not of high importance such as super reach, the effect determination unit 303 causes the hold charge effect to be displayed in a mode with relatively high visibility, and the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61. May be displayed in a mode with relatively low visibility. A mode with high visibility is that the display size is large, the color is conspicuous (high brightness, high saturation, etc.), the effect is added, or the image is drawn in front of other effects. May be included. In addition, when the variation pattern of the special figure 1 is of high importance such as super reach, the display priority is reversed, and the hold charge effect is displayed in a small size in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 60 (simply reduced. However, the form may be changed such that the display is simplified), and the super reach effect corresponding to the change in Toku-zu 1 may be displayed in a large size.

The effect determination means 303 is held in both the case where the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long open) in the normal state, the time saving after the end of the 4R big hit of the time saving once, and the first variation of the special map 2. The charge effect is displayed, and after the hold charge effect is completed, the chance effect is displayed as the variation effect of special figure 2. The effect determination means 303 basically advances the chance effect based on the button operation of the player, but a special effect is also provided when the button is not operated. For example, when the player operates a button, the chance effect is developed into a reach effect via a plurality of notices such as notice 1, notice 2, notice 3 and the like. On the other hand, when the player does not operate the button, the chance effect is developed into a reach effect through a plurality of notices such as notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, notice 4, etc. This is a special effect during operation, and is not displayed during button operation. The effect determination means 303 may perform the effect lottery of the advance notice 4 when there is no operation after the expiration of the effective period of the button, or draws both effects to be executed depending on whether there is a button operation at the start of fluctuation. As a specification, a suggestion effect (for example, special button image display or mini character icon display) in which the notice 4 appears without operation may be executable during the button effective period.

The effect determination means 303 displays the hold charge effect in both the case where the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long open) in the normal state and the case of the first variation of the special figure 2 during the time saving, but the hold charge With respect to the suspension of special figure 2 that occurs during the display of the effect, it is detected (so-called look-ahead) whether or not the hit is out based on the advance determination information (previous determination information in the first embodiment). In the normal state, the effect determination means 303 pre-reads the presence or absence of the symbol big hit and the small hit, while in the time saving state, it pre-reads only the presence or absence of the small hit. This is because the symbol big hit of the special figure 2 in the time saving state is lower in profit than the small hit V.

As described in the base technology, the effect determination unit 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display a hold lamp image indicating the number of reserved pieces of the special figure 1 and the number of reserved pieces of the special figure 2 at the bottom of the screen. The effect determination means 303 displays the prefetch result as a pending change. For example, as a result of pre-reading, if the certain special figure 2 hold is a small hit (or a pattern big hit), the effect determination means 303 outputs a hold lamp image corresponding to the special figure 2 hold from the normal mode to the small hit (or the pattern big hit). ) Is changed to a special mode. For example, when the hold lamp image shows a present box, the shape and color of the present box may be changed.

Further, the effect determination means 303 may further execute prefetching for holding the special figure 1. When the first hit of the normal symbol occurs while the pre-reading of the special figure 1 is being held, the production determining means 303 cancels the pre-reading results up to that point and the pre-reading production that has been executed until then, and the reserved charge production. May be displayed. As an exception, the look-ahead effect that changes the lottery mode of the variable effect pattern, such as transition of the effect zone that changes the tendency of the effect (type of the appearing character, world view, etc.), may be executed as it is.

Further, the effect determination means 303, even if it detects a symbol big hit in the pre-reading of special figure 1 hold, if it becomes a big hit due to the change of other hold before the big hit hold, in the future for the big hit hold subsequent. Do not execute the performance to notify the big hit. In the state where the big hit of special figure 1 has been confirmed, if a small hit V occurs from the first hit of the normal symbol, the special figure 1 big hit is digested and the number of time saving is reset without accumulating the special figure 2 hold during the time saving. Because it becomes possible. This is because, for example, there is a strategy that increases the possibility of a new small hit V by changing from 1 time reduction to 9 times.

4. Configurations related to the condominium status:
The extended state is a mode in which the direct shift is 50% of the special figure 1 big hit in the normal time, and the direct hit is a direct shift in the small hit V after the normal symbol first hit. When the time is shortened in the condominium state, typically, 9 times are saved + 4 times the remaining reservation is executed, and the special figure 2 lottery with a small hit probability of 1/10 is executed 13 times in total. The probability of winning a small hit or a big hit during the 9 time reductions is about 61%, and the probability of winning a small hit or a big hit during the remaining 4 holdings is about 34%, so the probability that the condominium state will continue is It is about 75%.

The effect determination means 303 displays the big hit end demonstration and the hold charge effect (right-hand navigation) according to the change pattern of the mode 4 at the time of the first change of the special map 2 in the shortened time in the condominium state. When the special figure 1 is a big hit when the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed before the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 (when the special figure 2 hold is 0) in the time saving in the condominium state, the effect determination means 303 is special. During the final round effect of the game (or during the end demonstration effect), a predetermined accessory (special accessory, etc.) may be operated to output an effect that makes it appear as if the jackpot was extended. As another aspect, the effect determination means 303 determines whether or not the big hit is extended by the appearance of the special game, such as temporarily stopping the round effect of the special game, rewinding, and playing, during the change of the special figure 1 which is a big hit. You may look like. It should be noted that the same effect can be executed when the special figure 2 variation in the mode 4 table is a small hit or a big hit.

The effect determination means 303 displays the rush effect as the variable effect of the special figure 2 during the shortening of the time in the condominium state. The rush effect is designed on the assumption that the special figure 2 hold (4 pieces) remains at the maximum at the end of the time saving. In the Pachinko gaming machine 500, the expectation of the small hit V is high even when the remaining is held after the time is shortened (the small hit probability is 1/10), so it is important that four special map 2 holds are accumulated at the end of the time saving. . Therefore, the effect determination unit 303 displays the reserved charge effect even in the final (9th) change in Toku-zu 2 during the shortened working hours.

The hold charge effect at the final change of special time chart 2 of the time saving is also the content for urging the launch of the game ball aiming at the second starting opening 12, as in the hold charge effect at the first change of the special figure 2 of the time saving. The effect determination unit 303 may display the pending charge effect in the final variation of the special drawing 2 in a shorter time period in a manner overlapping with the corner of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61. In the first embodiment, since the special map 2 fluctuation in the time saving is 10 seconds or more, it is sufficient to display the hold charge effect only for the final fluctuation (separate for the initial fluctuation), but the special character for a short time in the final fluctuation. In the case of adopting the specification in which 2 changes can be selected, the hold charge effect may be displayed from the 7th change or the 8th change.

It is assumed that a player who is accustomed to a 1-kind 1-kind gaming machine that does not have a small hit V is likely to make a stop shot during a short and long time fluctuation, but by displaying the hold charge effect at least at the final fluctuation. It is possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to obtain a very large profit of the small hit V.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the final fluctuation (9th fluctuation) of the special figure 2 in the time saving is set to be long for the symbol fixing time. The symbol fixed time is the time when the stop display is continued from the change stop of the special symbol, and is the time to delay the start of the next symbol fluctuation based on the held lottery value. The symbol fixing time of the special fluctuation 2 final fluctuation in the time saving is set to be equal to or longer than the opening time (6 seconds) of the ordinary electric accessory 90 accompanying the first hit of the ordinary symbol, and is 6 seconds in the first embodiment. The symbol fixing time at other points of time may be shorter than the symbol fixing time of the special fluctuation 2 final fluctuation in time saving, for example, 1 second or 0.5 seconds.

On the other hand, as described above, the specific game control means 270, when the special condition 2 fluctuation satisfies the time saving end condition, here, when the number of fluctuations of the special map 2 reaches 9, When the stop display of 2 is displayed, the time saving is ended. In other words, the time saving is ended before the symbol fixed time transition. Therefore, even when the normal symbol becomes the first hit just before the end of the time saving, the long opening of the normal electric accessory 90 ends within the symbol fixing time. Then, in the special symbol fixed time, since the time saving state has ended, the probability of being the first hit is rare as 1/590 even if the normal symbol newly starts changing. This prevents the special figure 2 reservation of +1 from occurring for the four special figure 2 reservations at the end of the time saving. This is because if the special figure 2 suspension of +1 occurs, it is not preferable because the possibility of a small hit increases more than the design, and it is not preferable because the chance effect is displayed immediately after the rush effect. In addition, when the normal symbol becomes the first hit at 1/590 after the time saving, the hold charge effect which is the ordinary electric open effect may be executed as in the normal time. In such a case, In the case of the variation of the mode 0 table, the additional variation after the 4 variations for the rush effect is the variation of the mode 0 table, and the chance effect is continuously executed after the rush effect. It should be noted that although the effect data increases, in the case where it is possible to provide a variation effect pattern for the rush effect even with respect to the variation pattern of the mode 0 table, the continuity with the rush effect in the effect determination means 303. It may be determined that the rush effect is continued even when the mode 0 table changes.

The rush effect of the first embodiment is displayed in the same manner before the end of time saving and after the end of time saving. For example, the effect determination unit 303 selects the variable effect pattern corresponding to the rush effect of the same or similar content in both the variation pattern of mode 6 and the variation pattern of mode 7, Display a rush effect with the same or similar content. Therefore, the player may erroneously recognize that it is during the time saving (the right-handed state is advantageous) even after the time-saving has been completed (the left-handed state is advantageous).

The effect determination means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display an image (referred to as a “right-handed recommended image”) that prompts the player to make a right-hand hit during the time saving period. Production determination means 303, from the 10th variation of special map 2 during rush production (that is, the 1st variation of special map 2 after the end of time saving), or the symbol after the 9th variation of special map 2 during rush production. Instead of the right-handed recommended image from the fixed time, an image (referred to as “left-handed recommended image”) that prompts the player to left-hand may be displayed.

However, since the effect contents are the same before and after the end of time saving, it is possible to confuse the player if flashy left-handing is recommended. Therefore, it is not desirable to store the special figure 1 reservation in advance. Therefore, the effect determining unit 303 may display the left-handed recommended image in a smaller size than the right-handed recommended image so as to be inconspicuous. Moreover, the effect determination unit 303 may display the left-handed recommended image instantaneously or for a short period of time, or temporarily or at predetermined time intervals.

Further, the effect determination means 303 does not display the right-handed recommended image from the tenth variation of the special drawing 2 during the rush production, or from the symbol fixed time after the ninth variation of the special drawing 2 during the rush production. The left-handed recommended image may also be hidden. In this case, left-handing may be recommended only for the lighting mode of the status display lamp 502. In addition, it is desirable that the display timing of the left-handed recommended image be conspicuously started in the same time as the payout notification effect or after the payout notification effect. At this time, when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is being executed, it is preferable to display the left-handed recommended image at a timing that does not overlap with the timing when the decorative symbol stops in order to notify the game result. ..

The variable effect pattern for rush effect may include (1) pseudo variable effect 4 to 8 times (minimum 4 times), (2) notice effect, and (3) reach effect (only some variable effect patterns). , (1), (1)+(2), or (1)+(2)+(3), the variation effect corresponding to one variation in Toku-zu 2 ends. Generally, in the small hitting high probability pattern (special drawing 2) in the small hitting V spec, it is possible to notify only the pre-reading information regarding the success or failure in advance. Further, for the held lottery value, the symbol and the variation pattern are unknown until the time when the symbol variation based on the lottery value is executed. On the other hand, the player is accustomed to the continuous prefetching effect including the pattern and the variation pattern in the conventional model, and there is a possibility that the player feels uncomfortable without such prefetching effect. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the degree of expectation is displayed by the pseudo look-ahead effect during the pseudo variable effect that is similar in appearance to the look-ahead effect of the conventional model. Pseudo-variation effect is actually 1 by stopping the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 61 for a time less than a predetermined reference value (0.5 seconds, etc.) (temporary stop), and then restarting the variable display of the decorative pattern 61. Although it is a change of the number of times, it is a content that appears to be changed more than once. Along with the temporary stop or re-change of the pseudo variation, (2) advance notice production and (3) pseudo prefetch production that suggests the execution expectation degree and execution content of the reach production are performed. As an example of the pseudo prefetching effect, a combination of decorative patterns that are categorized into the same type (color, form, character, etc.) is preliminarily stopped, and the effect pattern displayed around the screen is temporarily stopped. There is an effect step-up look-ahead that transitions to a high-expected one with each re-change.

The effect determination means 303, as a prefetch effect in the original meaning that affects the next symbol variation, responds to the variation of the previous special drawing 2 in accordance with the prior winning/deciding determination information of the lottery value corresponding to the next symbol variation. A zone transition symbol stop prefetch effect may be displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation effect. The zone transition symbol stop lookahead effect is a content that gives notice that the next symbol change will be displayed in the high-expectation effect mode. Further, the effect determination means 303, if the change of the next variation is a small hit of the special figure 2 or out of place (executes a gambling), causes the zone transition symbol stop lookahead effect to be displayed at this variation, while the next time In the case of the symbol big hit of the special figure 2, whether or not the variation is appropriate, it is not necessary to execute the zone transition symbol stop prefetch effect in this variation (because of low profit). In addition, even if the next variation is a small hit, if the variation this time develops to reach production (3), attention is paid to the result of the variation (decorative pattern of the decorative pattern). The pre-reading effect using the transitional pattern may be excluded from the lottery. Therefore, the pre-reading effect determines whether or not the next suspension is held each time the fluctuation of the special figure 2 starts, and controls to execute the pre-reading lottery according to the type of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation to be started. On the contrary, if the final stop symbol of the variation is the zone transition symbol regardless of the reach variation, a method of notifying that the next variation will be hit may be adopted.

The effect determination means 303 hides the hold lamp image during the rush effect. This is because the significance of the above-described pseudo-variable effect is lost if the number of held pieces is notified by the holding lamp image. On the other hand, the effect determination means 303 displays the remaining number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 during the rush effect (during the time saving). For example, in the second variation of the special figure 2 (first variation of the rush effect start) in the time saving, since the remaining number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is eight, "8+extra" is displayed, and At the second change, "7+extra" is displayed. “Extra” shows the fluctuation due to the retention of special figure 2 after the time saving. In addition, when the special figure 2 hold that is digested after the end of the time saving actually occurs, for example, when the hold 4 occurs after the sixth variation of the special figure 2 during the time saving, the effect determining means 303 indicates “extra. May be displayed. It should be noted that the display of the number of remaining fluctuations may be either the number including the current fluctuation or the number of fluctuations up to the end of the time saving excluding the current fluctuation. Further, the remaining number of times display may not be directly expressed as “remaining N times”, but may be a long-distance expression such as “Nth day/8th day+extra”. At this time, the time elapses such as Nth day (morning), Nth day (day), Nth day (night), Nth day AM 10:00, Nth day PM 2:00, Nth day PM 8:00. Along with the display, the display may be divided into the (1) pseudo variable period, (2) notice production period, and (3) reach production period. Furthermore, the degree of expectation of a hit, such as when the minute portion (and hour portion) of the above-mentioned 12-hour notation is advanced for each pseudo-variation, and when it becomes the "Nth day PM 5:55" at a certain timing, etc. A method of notifying that the score is high or the hit is confirmed may be adopted.

5. Configuration related to the game standby demo:
The effect determination means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the image of the predetermined game standby demo when the change in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not made in the predetermined standby demo transition time. The game standby demo may be a video showing the theme, motif, story, outline, etc. in the production of the Pachinko gaming machine 500.

The standby demo transition time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol when the universal figure holding means 242 holds the universal figure lottery value to the upper limit. In the first embodiment, the upper limit of the number of holdings of the universal drawing lottery value is four, and the longest variation time (in the normal state) of one variation in the case of the normal symbol being off or the second hit is 10 seconds, and the first The maximum time for one variation in the case of a hit is 15 seconds (in the normal state). In this case, when the universal symbol lottery value is held up to the upper limit, the first hit (long opening) of the ordinary symbol in the situation where the variation of the special symbol is not executed is the longest time that will be notified the latest Is 45 seconds (10 seconds x 3 hold pieces + 15 seconds x 1 hold piece). Therefore, the standby demo transition time is set to be longer than 45 seconds, for example, 60 seconds.

As described above, when the normal electric auditors product 90 is opened for a long time with the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state, the effect determination means 303 is a game ball aiming at the second starting opening 12. Display the hold charge effect that prompts the user to launch. The standby demo transition time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol when the ordinary symbol lottery value is held up to the upper limit, and the ordinary symbol becomes the first hit while the game standby demonstration is displayed. It is possible to avoid that the accessory 90 is opened for a long time, in other words, it is possible to avoid displaying the hold charge effect during the display of the game standby demo. This makes it easy to prevent the player from losing the chance of winning the small hit V without noticing the pending charge effect. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first hit of the normal symbol has a great influence on the playability, so it is preferable to handle the variable display of the normal symbol as a state in which the game is in progress, and It is prevented that the progress state of the game based on the variable display is erroneously recognized as being out of game due to the display of the game standby demo.

As a modified example, the effect determination means 303, the entrance of the game ball into any of the plurality of winning openings or entrances provided in the game area 81, the above-mentioned standby demo transition time has not been detected, and If the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not changing, the image of the game standby demo may be displayed. The plurality of winning openings or ball entrances include a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating opening 31, a second operating opening 32, and a general winning opening 33. The presence or absence of a winning ball may be detected by sensors (first starting winning prize detecting device 16, second starting winning prize detecting device 17, etc.) provided at each of these winning holes and winning holes. Also in this modification, the same effect as that of the above-mentioned embodiment is obtained.

As another modification, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is provided with the first starting opening 11 and the first operating opening 31 vertically adjacent to each other, and the gaming ball that has passed through the first operating opening 31 is almost certainly (or 100%). ) The game area 81 (game nail, windmill, etc.) may be configured so as to enter the first starting opening 11. Further, the game area 81 may be configured such that the game balls that enter the first starting port 11 are limited to the game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31.

in this case,
The average demodulation time + waiting demo transition time related to the four reserved symbols of the special symbol (here, special diagram 1)> The standby demo transition time may be set so that the maximum variation time of the four reserved symbols of the normal symbol becomes the maximum variation time. For example, if the maximum fluctuation time of the four reserved symbols is 45 seconds, and the average fluctuation time for the four reserved special symbols is 20 seconds, the standby demo transition time is longer than 25 seconds (for example, 30 seconds). ) May be set. Also in this modification, the same effect as that of the above-mentioned embodiment is obtained.

The present invention has been described above based on the first embodiment. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the first embodiment is merely an example, and that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. Modifications will be described below.

Modification 1 will be described. As described in part in the first embodiment, the effect determining means 303 causes the hold charge effect to be displayed when the normal electric auditors product 90 is released due to the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state. You may. Then, during the display of the hold charge effect, the effect determination unit 303 may reduce (wipe) the variable effect of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the change of the special figure 1. For example, the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 may be displayed in a size smaller than the hold charge effect. Further, the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 may be displayed in a size smaller than the display size when the hold charge effect is not executed.

In the modified example 1 as well, as in the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in the normal game during the time saving is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in the normal game in the normal state (3 seconds in the first embodiment). ) Fixed. In the modified example 1, the effect determination means 303 continuously displays the jackpot end demonstration and the hold charge effect from the end of the final round in the special game to the end of the first fluctuation of the special map 2 in the time saving. The effect determination means 303 hides the variable effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the change of the special figure 1 while displaying the hold charge effect in the normal game during the time saving.

In addition, during the time saving, the effect determination means 303 hides the variable effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure 1, and only the stop mode which is the result of the variable effect is the simple symbol (smaller than the normal decorative symbol 61). It may be shown by (pattern). Alternatively, only the result of hit or miss may be shown by a simple design. In addition, when the symbol big hit of special figure 1 occurs during the time saving, the production determination means 303 may notify the symbol big hit by the operation of the special accessory described in the first embodiment.

In this way, the effect determination unit 303 of the modified example 1 further reduces the visibility of the variable effect of the special figure 1 during the time saving, as compared with that during the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 associated with the normal symbol first hit in the normal time. Display it. In this way, when the variation effect of Toku-zu 1 is relatively low in importance, by displaying or hiding the variation effect in an inconspicuous manner, the player can make a profit such as a pending charge effect. Other important effects can be emphasized and presented.

A second modification of the second starting port 12 will be described. FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the starting opening unit 510. The starting opening unit 510 is a component in which the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and a plurality of general winning openings 33 are integrated. The starting opening unit 510 is provided below the center decoration 64. That is, the second starting opening 12 of this modified example is provided at the lower center of the game area 81. FIG. 45 is a top view of the starting opening unit 510, and the bottom is the front.

46 is a cross-sectional view of the starting port unit 510, specifically, a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 45. The left-handed flow path 512 is a flow path that guides the left-handed game ball to the left out port 514. The right-handed flow path 516 is a flow path that guides the right-handed game ball to the right out port 518. The game nails and the wind turbines in the game area 81 are set so that only the game balls that have flown in the right flow path of the center decoration 64 can flow into the right flow path 516. .

The slide plate 520 normally functions as the electric accessory 90, and in this modification, functions as a guide member that guides the game ball that has flown into the right-handed flow path 516 to the second starting opening 12. With the slide plate 520 retracted, the game ball (game ball 524 in FIG. 46) flows from the right striking channel 516 into the right out port 518, and does not flow into the second starting port 12. The blocking member 522 is interlocked with the slide plate 520 and protrudes so as to block the inlet of the second starting port 12 when the slide plate 520 is in the retracted state. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 12. Further, the blocking member 522 is in the retracted state when the slide plate 520 is in the protruding state, and opens the entrance of the second starting opening 12.

When the normal symbol hits, the opening/closing control means 275 of the first embodiment controls the ordinary electric accessory 90 to the open state, but the opening/closing control means 275 of this modified example causes the slide plate 520 to project. In addition to controlling, the blocking member 522 is controlled to the retracted state. As a result, the entrance of the right out port 518 is blocked, the entrance of the second starting port 12 is opened, and the game ball rolling in the right striking flow path 516 flows into the second starting port 12. According to the starting port unit 510, while normally allowing the ball to enter the second starting port 12 at the time of hitting a symbol, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second starting port 12 in other situations.

Modification 3 will be described. When the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long open) during the hit variation of the special map 1 (typically at the time of initial hit), the effect determination means 303 does not hold the reserved charge effect (normal electric open effect). It may be displayed. This is for displaying the hold charge effect in the special figure 2 fluctuation during the time saving after the big hit ends. If the special map 2 hold is stored first, the special map 1 hold tends to remain at the end of the condominium state because the special map 2 priority is exhausted, but since the payout notification effect is displayed at the end of the condominium state, This is because it is better not to execute the variation in FIG. According to this configuration, while the special symbol 1 is changing, the first hit of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and if the reserved charge effect is not displayed nevertheless, the symbol big hit of the special symbol 1 is determined. In addition, in the normal state immediately after the end of the condominium state, if the prefetch of the special map 1 hold is prohibited, it can be said that an important effect related to the special figure 1 change is difficult to be displayed during the payout notification effect, so that The hold charge effect may be displayed during the variation of the hit to accumulate the special figure 2 hold. In addition, the timing when the normal symbol is the first hit is not during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, but the hit confirmation notification in the pre-reading of the special figure 1 (for example, the premium hold display, the number of times saved after a big hit is indefinite) Even when is being executed, a prohibition pattern for prohibiting display may be included. By doing this, when the small hit or big hit of the special figure 2 shifts to the rush state before the hit confirmation pending of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the hit of the special figure 1 is shortened 9 times. This is because the

Modification 4 will be described. When the state of the condominium (time saving + 4 holdings) ends irregularly, specifically, when the time saving ends with 7 times fluctuations of Toku-zu 1 or the holding of Toku-zu 2 at the end of time saving is 3 When the number is less than or equal to the number, the variation pattern mode of special figure 2 at the normal time can be for rush effect (mode 3 to mode 7). In this case, when the first hit of the normal symbol occurs in normal time, the variation pattern for the rush effect or the variation pattern for the hold charge effect is selected in the subsequent special figure 2 fluctuation, and an unintended effect is displayed on the design. There is a possibility of doing.

In order to cope with this, the effect determination means 303 rushes in the normal game in the normal state after the special figure 1 has changed a predetermined number of times after the time-saving transition or after the time-saving transition (for example, after the completion of 10 time changes of the special figure 1 after the time-saving transition). When the variation pattern for production is selected, the variation production pattern for chance production may be selected as an alternative and the chance production may be displayed. Alternatively, the effect determination unit 303 may display the irregular effect/display by a telop or the like while displaying the rush effect in the above situation.

Modification 5 will be described. Since the time saving game may end in any of the variations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 as described above, for example, when the variation pattern table of special figure 2 is in the selected state of mode 6, If the time saving game is ended based on the fluctuations, and if the time saving game is ended based on the fluctuations of the special map 2 when the special map 1 is in the mode 2, then the small hit is won and the special area is entered. If not performed, the mode of the variation pattern table of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be controlled to be "0". By doing so, it is possible to prevent the rush effect pattern from being selected with the special figure 2 being held from the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal state.

Modification 6 will be described. In the rush effect of the first embodiment described above, 9 fluctuations in working hours are fixed, and 1 fluctuation is for a relatively long time (10 seconds or more), so it is assumed that the player stops (stops firing). Therefore, in the modified example, the number of times of shortening in the extended state is set to be indefinite (for example, it is decided from one time, three times, five times, nine times, and thirteen times according to the winning symbol among a plurality of types), and one variation is also compared. It may be a short time (about 5 seconds). In this way, when the stopping is performed, the stopping can be suppressed by setting the specification that there is a risk that the special figure 2 suspension cannot be accumulated.

Modification 7 will be described. You may make it easy to create the fifth variation of Toku-zu 2 after the time saving. For example, (1) the opening end condition of the ordinary electric auditors's figures 90 may be set to the upper limit number of reservations + N (N is a positive integer) in Fig. 2. Further, (2) the symbol fixing time at the end of time saving may be set to the same length as the normal time or a length shorter than the normal time. Further, (3) the ball entrance sensor (second start winning detection device 17) of the second starting opening 12 is arranged at a back position away from the entrance of the second starting opening 12, and the fourth time of the special diagram 2 after the time saving is completed. After the end of the fluctuation and after the end of the fixed time (after the start of the next fluctuation), a new suspension of special figure 2 may be likely to occur. Moreover, you may combine said (1)-(3). In addition, in the case of the configuration of the modified example 4, instead of preferentially digesting the special figure 2, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be drawn in parallel, or may be drawn in the winning order.

Modification 8 will be described. When the design change means 303 wins the small hit, and the pattern changes (when the small hit V changes, hereinafter "this change"), it detects that there is another small hit in the remaining hold, it changes this time. The big hit effect (for example, a special game effect) of the small hit V may be displayed as a special big hit effect different from the normal big hit effect. The special jackpot production may include content for notifying that it has been decided that two 15R jackpots will occur. When the modification 7 is adopted, the small hit V in the special figure 2 may be only the 15R big hit.

Also, when the small hit V in the special figure 2 is distributed to a plurality of kinds of big hits as in the first embodiment, the fact that the small hit V accompanying the fluctuation this time is the maximum profit is notified by the big hit production, and after the big hit ends. Also, a continuous effect may be displayed that makes it look as if the big hit is continuing, and a big hit effect that makes it look like an extra hit at the next small hit V. In this case, since the number of rounds of the next small hit V (additional amount per extra) is unknown at the time of the previous small hit V and cannot be reported, the continuous effect is being displayed after the end of the previous big hit. The additional amount (the number of rounds) per extra may be notified at the start of the symbol variation related to the small hit V.

Modification 9 will be described. Here, a specific example of the effect will be described. 47 (a) and (b) of FIG. 47 is a chance effect in a normal time (an effect that is displayed with a long opening of a normal symbol in a normal game in a normal state, and can also be called a normal electric opening effect, a rush effect, and a hold charge effect. .) is shown. FIG. 47A shows an aspect of the chance effect 530 in the case where the variation effect of the special figure 1 is not a predetermined content with high expectation such as super reach. In the opportunity effect 530 of FIG. 47A, a special figure 2 holding image 532 showing the content for urging a right-handed stroke and the number of holding pieces (two pieces in the figure) of the special figure 2 is displayed large in the center of the screen. On the other hand, the variation effect 536 of Toku-zu 1 that was largely displayed in the center of the screen before the display of the chance effect 530 is reduced and displayed on the wipe 534 which is a small area of the screen corner. In addition, even in a situation where the special effects of special maps 1 and 2 are not executed, the normal standby screen is wiped to display a chance effect even when the changes of special maps 1 and 2 start. The variation effect is displayed as it is on the wipe screen until is completed.

FIG. 47B shows a display form of the chance effect 530 when the variation effect of the special figure 1 is a predetermined content with high expectation such as super reach. In the figure, a super-reach variation effect 536 including a super-reach object 538 such as a battle image of a character is displayed large in the center of the screen. On the other hand, the chance effect 530 is displayed small on the wipe 534 at the corner of the screen. 47(a) and 47(b) show how to properly use the chance effect in the normal time, but the determination timings of these kinds of use are appropriately used in the manner of the variable effect that is executed at the start timing of the chance effect. Therefore, for example, in a change in which the change effect of special figure 1 is super reach, before the change to super reach, the change effect is executed by the wipe display shown in FIG. 47(a), and after the change to super reach, the change effect is displayed on the wipe screen. Is continuously displayed (the specification is returned to the super reach screen when the opportunity effect is finished, that is, when the operation of the ordinary electric auditors product 90 is finished). Note that the present invention is not limited to this example, and the specification may be changed from the mode of FIG. 47(a) to the mode of FIG. 47(b) at the timing of transition to high-expectation degree production such as super reach. It should be noted that although it is possible to change the mode of chance production depending on whether or not a high-expectation degree pattern such as super reach is selected as the variation production pattern of special figure 1, if such a configuration is adopted, Immediately after the start of fluctuations before the transition to super reach, the transition to high-anticipated performance will be noticed first.

FIG. 48 shows an example of a chance effect during a time saving game (for example, an effect displayed when the variation pattern mode is mode 3, which can also be called a hold charge effect). Even in the chance effect 530 during the time saving game, the content for urging the player to hit the right side and the special figure 2 reserved image 532 are displayed. On the other hand, as already described in the first embodiment, the variation effect of special figure 1 is not displayed during the time saving game, and the chance effect is made to appear as the variation effect of the first time saving game variation of special figure 2. There is. Therefore, the change effect 536 is not displayed by the wipe 534, which is different from the normal chance effect. The reason why the chance effect is produced as the variation effect of the special figure 2 is that, if the variation effect is executed only for notifying whether or not the time is short, especially in the case of the one time reduction, the game play is to retain four holds. Is not able to be fully understood and may give a disadvantage to the player. It should be noted that, in the case of the variation effect when the first time-saving variation of Special Figure 2 is a win, the chance effect may be non-executed, or the effect notification result is executed after the chance effect. May be.

(Second embodiment)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. In particular, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has features relating to control or performance of the small hit development big hit area in addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, description will be made focusing on differences between the base technology and the first embodiment, and description of common points will be omitted. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the base technology and the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals.

An outline of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has the following five main features.

Features 1. Winning Balls in Small Win Games:
Up to now, the machines that have developed small hits and big hits have used two big winning openings for V winning, which have a specific area, and large winning openings for winning many winnings. Since the opening of the V winning big winning opening and the opening of the winning winning opening are due to the operation of different special electric auditors, the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls of the V winning big winning opening (regular count The number of small hits was reduced, the small hit game was ended early, and the big hit game was moved early. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment (small hit development big hit installation machine), the number of special electric auditors (large winning hole) is one. By opening the special winning opening up to 15 times in the small hit game, it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls in the small hit game and realize a new playability and interest.

Features 2. Small hit game production:
Performing a performance to make the player understand the possibility of winning coins in the small hitting game (that is, the first round of the small hitting development big hit) after the V winning in the small hitting game (that is, after the right to win the big hit). Then, urge the player to launch.

Features 3. Small hit development Big hit production:
Development of small hits From the first round of big hits (that is, small hit games), you can expect to win a prize ball equivalent to the first round of big hits. , "1 round" display is started in order to inform that the winning ball equivalent to 1 round of the big hit can be won.

Features 4. Small hit development Big hit start production in big hit:
Small hit development During the first round (small hit game) and the second round (first unit game of special game) in the big hit, an effect that suggests the amount of profit that the player can obtain is executed.

Features 5. Small hit ahead look:
By prefetching the hold of the small hit, the fact that the next small hit development big hit can be obtained within a short time is notified until the completion of the present small hit development big hit.

Hereinafter, the above five features will be sequentially described.
<Characteristics 1. Winning ball winning ability in small hitting games>
FIG. 49 shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment. The second starting opening 12 has a normal electric accessory 90 that is a ball entry variation mechanism that can be displaced so as to change a game ball into a relatively easy state from a relatively difficult state. The ordinary electric accessory 90 is also called a so-called electric tulip, and various shapes and specifications can be applied. The ordinary electric accessory 90 may be any of a slide type (for example, a specification in which a slide member advances or retracts backward to facilitate entry of a ball), a tulip type, or a tongue type.

The special game control means 260 operates the special electric auditors product 556 at the start of each unit game in the special game. The special game control means 260 controls the opening/closing control means 275 to control the specific area opening/closing solenoid 506 to open the special winning opening 20 a predetermined number of times. The small hit game control means 265 actuates the special electric accessory 556 once at the start of the small hit game. The small hitting game control means 265 controls the opening/closing control means 275 to control the specific area opening/closing solenoid 506 to open the special winning opening 20 a plurality of times during one small hitting game.

The special winning opening 20 includes an opening/closing member (a slide plate 540 described later) for switching between the open state and the closed state of the special winning opening 20. When the special winning opening 20 is closed, the game ball rolls on the opening/closing member. FIG. 50 is an external perspective view schematically showing the structure of the special winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 can be said to be an opening/closing door for the special winning opening 20. As shown in FIG. 50(a), the slide plate 540 is in a closed state in which it covers the special winning opening 20 (box-shaped member 542), and in an open state in which it is retracted inward as shown in FIG. 50(b). It can be displaced between. When the slide plate 540 is closed, the special winning opening 20 is also closed, and when the slide plate 540 is open, the special winning opening 20 is also open.

The figure shows an example of a configuration for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of a game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 provided on the upper surface of the special winning opening 20 is provided so as to be slightly inclined so as to be downward leftward with respect to the horizontal direction. As a result, the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 tends to accelerate as it is, and even if the slide plate 540 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the game ball cannot be well guided inside the box-shaped member 542. There is a fear.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by moving the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 in a zigzag manner, the moving distance of the game ball is increased and the momentum of the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 is reduced. In this way, the residence time of the game ball on the slide plate 540 is increased. As a result, even when the special winning opening 20 is repeatedly opened for a very short period of time, the game ball stays on the slide plate 540 for a long time, and the game ball enters during the short period of opening. Make it more likely.

FIG. 50A shows the special winning opening 20 when the slide plate 540 is in the closed state. As shown in the figure, within the range in which the game ball rolls on the slide plate 540, a plurality of protrusions 546a are provided on the game board side, and a plurality of protrusions are also provided on the transparent plate side facing the game board. 546b is provided. Further, the plurality of protrusions 546a on the game board side and the plurality of protrusions 546b on the transparent plate side are arranged alternately along the flow path on the slide plate 540. The plurality of protrusions 546b on the transparent plate side are attached to a transparent transparent plate 544 extending upward from the box-shaped member 542. By not directly fixing the plurality of protrusions 546b to the transparent plate 103 covering the front side of the game board 80, the protrusions 516b are exposed to the outside when the transparent plate 103 is opened for the purpose of game machine maintenance or the like. It is possible to prevent the situation from becoming easy to be damaged. Further, by configuring the transparent plate 544 with a transparent member, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game ball entering the special winning opening 20 from being impaired. In addition, in a modified example, a protrusion or a recess for forming a zigzag flow path may be formed in the slide plate 540.

By alternately providing the plurality of protrusions 546a and 546b on the slide plate 540, the game ball can be moved in a zigzag manner so that the momentum of the game ball tends to decrease. For example, a game ball is continuously shot to the special winning opening 20 by hitting it to the right (for example, one ball is launched at an interval of 0.6 seconds), rolling on a slide plate 540 and falling to the left side of the special winning opening 20. When it is decelerated so as to require a time of 2 to 3 seconds, there will always be about 3 to 5 game balls on the slide plate 540. As a result, even when the slide plate 540 is opened for a short time, a plurality of game balls can be collectively guided inside the special winning opening 20, as shown in FIG. The game balls that have fallen into the box-shaped member 542 pass through the passage opening 548 one by one, and a prize is detected.

The number of game balls staying on the slide plate 540 and the staying time can be adjusted by changing the length and inclination angle of the special winning opening 20, the number and intervals of the protrusions 546a and 546b, and the like. In this embodiment, one to three game balls are designed to stay on the slide plate 540 when the right-handed continuous firing is continued, and the slide plate 540 is held for a short time (for example, 0.052 seconds). Even when it is displaced to the open state, approximately 1 to 3 game balls are adjusted to enter the inside of the box-shaped member 542 during one short-time opening. Therefore, according to the structure of the special winning opening 20 of the present embodiment, if a proper firing operation (for example, right hitting) is performed at an appropriate timing during the small hitting game (for example, after notification of right hitting), the game ball is given a big winning opening. It is possible to get the ball into the ball 20 almost certainly.

The structure of the special winning opening 20 shown in FIG. 50 is merely an example, and the special winning opening 20 having a structure different from the illustrated example may be provided. For example, the opening/closing member (slide plate 540) of the special winning opening 20 may include a plurality of opening/closing members provided at distant positions, and the plurality of opening/closing members may be controlled to be opened/closed at the same time.

FIG. 51 is a diagram schematically showing the internal structure of the special winning opening 20, particularly showing the structure of the lower region 550 of the special winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 opens and closes the entrance of the special winning opening 20 under the control of the special winning opening solenoid 92. The special winning opening solenoid 92 controls the slide plate 540 in an open state, and operates the slide plate 540 so as to open the entrance of the special winning opening 20, so that a game ball can flow into the special winning opening 20. And The special winning opening solenoid 92 controls the slide plate 540 to be in a closed state, and operates the slide plate 540 so as to close the entrance of the special winning opening 20, so that the game ball cannot flow into the special winning opening 20. And The game ball that has entered the special winning opening 20 once flows to the left and flows into the lower region 550 of the second special winning opening 22 from the passage opening 548 through which the balls can pass one by one. The special winning detection device 25 detects the entry of the game ball into the special winning opening 20 in order to provide the prize ball, and specifically detects the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 548 and dropped into the lower area 550. To do.

A discharge path 554 is provided in the lower region 550 of the special winning opening 20. The discharge path 554 is a path for discharging a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 20 to the outside of the special winning opening 20, and is typically a path for discharging to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 500. . Further, in the lower region 550, a specific region opening/closing device 552 is provided in the middle of the flow path from the passage port 548 to the discharge path 554. The specific area which is a condition for transitioning to the small hit development and the big hit corresponds to an area below the specific area opening/closing device 552, which can be passed when the specific area opening/closing device 552 is opened, and the specific area opening/closing device 552 is closed. If you do, you will not be able to pass.

The specific area opening/closing device 552 operates so as to switch between an open state in which passage through the specific area is possible and a closed state in which passage through the specific area is impossible. The specific area opening/closing device 552 has a slide member or a valve member that operates under the control of the specific area opening/closing solenoid 506. The specific area opening/closing device 552 operates so as to open the flow path to the specific area, and becomes an open state in which the game ball can pass to the specific area, and operates to close the flow path to the specific area. As a result, a closed state is established in which the game balls cannot pass through the specific area. The specific area opening/closing device 552 shifts to the open state with the opening of the special winning opening 20, and after the special winning opening 20 is closed, the game balls inside are expected to flow down to the position of the specific area opening/closing device 552. It waits for the design value and operates so as to be in the closed state with a delay from the transition to the closed state of the special winning opening.

The specific area passage detection device 504 is provided below the specific area opening/closing device 552 and detects passage of the game ball in the specific area. The specific area passage detection device 504 generates specific area passage information indicating the passage when the game ball passes through the specific area. Upon receiving the specific area passage information, the entry determination means 201 of the main board 200 determines that the game ball has passed the specific area.

In the second embodiment, both the unit game in the special game and the small hit game are finished when the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 reaches the same predetermined number (10 in the embodiment). In other words, both the operation end condition of the special electric auditors product 556 in the unit game of the special game and the operation end condition of the special electric auditors product 556 in the small hit game reach 10 in the special winning opening 20. Including that. Specifically, the special game control means 260 finishes one unit game of the special game when a predetermined time has elapsed or when the number of balls entered into the special winning opening 20 reaches 10. If it is satisfied, terminate it. The small hit game control means 265 ends the small hit game as the end condition is satisfied when a predetermined time has passed or when the number of balls entered into the special winning opening 20 reaches 10. It should be noted that the V winning is not a condition for ending the small hit game, and even after the V winning, the small hit game continues until the ending condition is satisfied.

The one-time opening time of the big winning opening 20 in the small hit game is set to a short time in which the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 can enter the big winning opening 20. In addition, the small hitting game control means 265 opens the special winning opening 20 for a short time through the opening/closing control means 275 in one small hitting game (during one operation of the special electric accessory 556). It can be repeated a predetermined number of times. The upper limit number of times is equal to or more than the number of balls (that is, 10) that enter the special winning opening 20, which is a condition for ending one unit game and a small hit game in a special game (in other words, a condition for ending operation of the special electric accessory 556). Is the number of times. In the embodiment, the number is 15 times, which is larger than the number of entered balls. The small hitting game control means 265, when the number of balls entering the big winning hole 20 during the small hitting game reaches 10, even if the number of times of opening the big winning hole 20 during the small hitting game is less than the upper limit number (15 times). At that point, the special winning opening 20 is closed and the small hit game is finished.

The small hitting game control means 265 opens the special winning opening 20 for a short time (opening time 0.052 seconds) and opens the big winning opening 20 for the first to twelfth opening of the small hitting game. Repeat the set of short-time closing (closing time 1 second). Also, the small hit game control means 265 opens the special winning opening 20 for a short time (opening time 0.052 seconds) and opens the big winning opening 20 for the 13th and 14th opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hit game. Perform a set of long-term closing (closing time 4 seconds). In addition, the small hitting game control means 265 executes the operation of opening time 0.052 seconds for the 15th big winning opening 20 in the small hitting game, and when the 15th opening is completed, or the operation end condition. When a game ball with a specified count number is entered, the closing is performed for 3.5 seconds.

According to the configuration of Feature 1, only one big winning opening is arranged in the game area 81, in other words, the big winning opening for obtaining the V winning and the big winning opening for increasing the number of coins are shared. As a result, it is possible to secure a wide board surface area for displaying the effect, operating the accessory, and the like, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect. Also, in the small hit game, the same special electric accessory 556 as in the special game will be activated, so that the payout is performed with a common number of prize balls, and the small hit game is controlled in the above-described opening mode. Based on this, it is possible to expect a predetermined number of balls, which is the condition for ending the operation of the special electric auditors, so it is possible to obtain the same number of payouts as a single unit game of the special game, and a sufficient number of payouts for the player. It can give a feeling.

As described with reference to FIG. 50, when the player continues to shoot the game ball, the game ball stays on the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20, so that the single big winning opening 20 in the small hit game occurs once. Even if the opening time is short, at least one ball can be expected. However, the right hitting of the game ball may be delayed because the player does not notice the start of the small hit game. Therefore, the number of times of opening the big winning opening 20 in the small hitting game is set to be more than the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 which is a condition for ending the small hitting game (in the embodiment, the number of times is larger than the number of entering balls). Then, in the small hit game, it is easy to obtain the same payout as the unit game of the special game.

Furthermore, for the 13th and 14th opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hitting game, by relatively lengthening the closing time, the player is aware of the small hitting game without the game ball being fired. Ends, that is, misses the opportunity to win big hits and wins big wins, and because the time saving ends due to the occurrence of small hit games, there is a high probability that small hits will occur (small hit V). It becomes easy to prevent that the variation of the received second special symbol becomes difficult to execute. However, if the number of long-time closings is increased too much, out-balls (in other words, waste balls) that pass through the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20 will increase when the player continuously shoots game balls. Therefore, by closing the large winning opening 20 for a long time in the small hitting game twice, it is possible to suppress both the small hitting game ending without the V winning and the increase of the out balls.

In the second embodiment, the opening time is 0.052 seconds for each of the multiple opening of the special winning opening 20 during the small hit game. However, as a modified example, at least one opening time is provided. However, it may be different from other opening times. For example, the small hit game control means 265 may open the special winning opening 20 for 0.052 seconds 13 times and open the big winning opening 20 for 0.104 seconds once during the small hit game. . That is, at least one of the game balls rolling on the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20 should be released 10 times or more, which is supposed to enter the special winning opening 20.

<Characteristics 2. Small hit game production ＞
The effect determination means 303 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 60 during the small hit game, and changes the display mode of the effect image in accordance with the entry into the special winning opening 20 during the small hit game. .. This effect image includes a first effect image and a second effect image. In the second embodiment, the effect determining unit 303 determines whether to display the first effect image or the second effect image by a predetermined effect lottery (in other words, with a predetermined probability). As a modification, the effect determination means 303 may be configured to display only one of the first effect image and the second effect image during the small hit game.

The first effect image is an image corresponding to the number of balls that enter the special winning opening 20, which is a condition for ending the small hit game. As described above, the number of balls entered into the big winning hole 20 (that is, the specified count number), which is the condition for ending the small hit game, can be said to be the maximum number of balls entered into the large winning hole 20 during the small hit game, which is special. It is 10 balls, which is the same as the number of balls that enter the special winning opening 20, which is the condition for ending the unit game in the game.

FIG. 52 shows an example of an effect during a small hit game. The effect determination means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the small hit game effect screen 560 during the execution of the small hit game. The small hitting game effect screen 560 includes a right hitting instruction image 562 for urging the player to make a right hit, a V notification image 568, a round image 564, and an incoming ball number notification image 566 as the first effect image. The V notification image 568 and the round image 564 will be described later. The number-of-balls notification image 566 includes the same number of treasure chest images as the number of balls (10 balls) entering the big winning opening 20 which is the condition for ending the small hit game. In FIG. 38, the unopened treasure box is shown by a rectangular parallelepiped, and the opened treasure box is shown by a star.

The production determination means 303 switches one unopened treasure box image to an opened treasure box image each time a ball entry into the special winning opening 20 is detected by the ball entry determination means 201 during a small hit game. . This suggests to the player that 10 balls can be entered into the special winning opening 20 during the small hit game, in other words, suggests to the player that a large number of coins can be obtained during the small hit game. A player can be prompted to shoot a game ball during a winning game.

The second effect image will be described. The second effect image is an image (hereinafter also referred to as an “expectation degree image”) indicating the degree of expectation that a high profit (the possibility of winning a large number of coins) is suggested in the later suggestion effect. It can be said that the expectation image is an image that suggests that there is a possibility that a large number of payouts will be obtained in the later game. The details will be described below.

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment (FIG. 42), the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment is also stopped in a manner in which the symbol fluctuation indicates a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a “small hit design”). In this case, the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit differs depending on the small hit design. In the second embodiment, the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit is distributed to either 10 rounds or 4 rounds according to the small hit pattern (the first round is the small hit game).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, the number of time saving continuations (in other words, the number of continuations of the electric Chu support) is different depending on the small hit symbol. Specifically, if the small hit pattern is a particular type, it is a small hit development big hit with 10 rounds and 100 shortened continuation times. If the small hit pattern is another type, it is a small round with 10 rounds and 9 shortened continuation times. It will be a jackpot jackpot or a jackpot jackpot jackpot with 4 rounds and 9 times of shorter working hours. When the number of time saving continuations is 100 times, the next small hit occurs almost certainly during the time saving (during rush production), and the holiday resort is formed.

Incidentally, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, in the case of the symbol big hit of the special figure 1, (1) 10 rounds and the number of time saving continuations is 9 times, (2) 4 rounds and the time saving continuation depending on the big hit symbol. It will be distributed to 9 big hits, (3) 4 big rounds and 1 big short win. The distribution probabilities (1) to (3) in the embodiment are 1%, 49%, and 50%. The special jackpot of special figure 2 is a jackpot with 4 rounds and 9 times of shortening time.

When the V winnings are generated in the small hit game, the effect determination means 303 is determined by the player depending on the type of the symbol indicating the small hit (that is, the type of the small hit symbol when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) after the small hit game is finished. Any one of a plurality of suggestive effects that suggest the profit that can be obtained is displayed. For example, a plurality of types of suggestive productions are associated with any of a plurality of types of small hitting symbols, and each number of rounds of the small hitting development big hits determined by the small hitting design, each number of time saving continuations after the end of the small hits development big hit, or , May be provided for each combination of the number of rounds and the number of shortening hours. In addition, the content (motif, character, color, etc.) of a plurality of types of suggestive effects differs depending on the amount of profit that the player can obtain. The suggestive effect will be described later in the description of Feature 4.

The effect determination means 303, during the small hitting game, the expectation image showing the degree of expectation that a high profit (for example, a big hit of 10 rounds, a reduction of 100 time reductions) is suggested in the above-mentioned suggesting effect. Is displayed. For example, the effect determination means 303 may display an expectation degree image instead of the number-of-balls notification image 566 on the small hitting game effect screen 560 shown in FIG. It may be displayed. Further, the V notification image 568, which is an image for notifying that the V prize has been won, in other words, an image for notifying the right acquisition of the big hit, may be used as the expectation degree image.

The effect determination means 303 changes the degree-of-expectation image according to a ball entering the special winning opening 20 during a small hit game. The effect determination means 303 may change any one of the shape, the pattern, and the color of the expectation degree image according to the ball entering the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game. For example, (1) the expectation image is the V notification image 568, and (2) the colors of the V notification image are red, orange, yellow, green, and white from the one with the highest expectation of profit that the player can obtain. It is assumed that (3) the small hit symbol corresponds to 10 rounds and 100 times of shortened working hours. In this case, the effect determination means 303 may initially display the V notification image in white when the V winning is detected in the small hit game. After the V winning, every time a predetermined number (for example, one or two balls) of entering the special winning opening 20 is detected, the effect determining unit 303 sets the color of the V notification image to green, yellow, orange, or red. May be changed in this order.

In the above example, when the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 during the small hit game increases, the V notification image is finally displayed in red, so that the player's expectation for the subsequent suggestive effect and profit state. Can be increased. In this way, as the number of balls entering the special winning opening during the small hitting game increases, the accuracy of the expectation image increases, in other words, the reliability of the content of the suggestive effect after the expectation image increases. In other words, by entering the big winning opening during the small hit game, it is possible to identify the degree of expectation that a high profit is suggested by the subsequent suggestion effect, and thus the game ball during the small hit game (particularly after the V winning). The player may be given an incentive to launch. In addition, even in the small hitting game, the player can be made aware of the playability that can obtain a payout equivalent to one round of the special game.

The V notification image 568 is an image displayed after the game ball is detected by the specific area passage detection device 504 inside the special winning opening 20, and the game ball already entered in the small hit game when the display is started. Since the number (remaining number of remaining balls) may vary depending on the situation, the initial display should be unified in the form at the time of entering, such as white (or green from the beginning as a chance up pattern that eventually becomes red or more), and the subsequent The mode that changes according to the ball is displayed according to a predetermined change pattern from the time of entering the second ball to the time of entering the tenth ball, skipping the change mode in the middle when changing according to the prize. Can be adopted. In this case, "white (initial)", "green (3)", "yellow (5)" "orange (7)" (the number is the timing of change the number of game balls entered during the small hit game (Shown), when the specific area passage detection device 504 detects passage in the fourth ball, "white" is displayed as the V notification image, and the V notification image is displayed when the next game ball enters (fifth ball). Will be "yellow". By adopting the method of skipping the intermediate display mode in this way, it is not necessary to have a performance determination table depending on which ball has passed the specific area, and furthermore, when entering a ball, the lottery result is fixed. Since it is displayed, it is possible to identify whether the display of the initial mode is the chance pattern and the final change mode. It should be noted that the pattern that changes in response to a ball entering the special winning opening 20 may have an additional pattern that is defined as the over-winning of the eleventh ball and the twelfth ball, which is equal to or more than the specified count (usually As the final aspect, the 10th ball is applicable, and the over-winning amount is set to be the same as the 10th ball or an exceptional premier appears.)

Further, the effect determining unit 303 may change the expectation level image with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%) so that the expectation level image shows a content different from the content of the suggestion effect. For example, when the content of the subsequent suggestion production suggests a high profit, it may be changed to an expectation degree image indicating that the expectation degree is low. Similarly, when the content of the later suggestive effect suggests a low profit, it may be changed to an expectation degree image indicating that the expectation degree is high. As a result, the player's expectation and anxiety can be mixed with each other, or the player can have an unexpected feeling, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

A modified example related to the feature 2 will be described. The sub-board 300 may further include prize ball counting means for counting the number of paid prize balls (the number of paid balls). The payout control board 155 or the main board 200 may notify the sub board 300 of the number of paid prize balls. The prize ball counting means may count the number of prize balls paid out during the small hit game and the special game, based on the number of prize balls notified from the payout control board 155 or the main board 200. Alternatively, the entry determining means 201 of the main board 200 may notify the sub-board 300 of information indicating entry of a game ball into each winning opening. The prize ball counting means may count the number of prize balls paid out during the small hit game and the special game, based on the information indicating the balls entering the special winning opening 20 notified from the main board 200. . It should be noted that the number of prize balls when one ball is entered into the special winning opening 20 is 12.

The effect determination means 303 of this modification displays the small hit game effect screen 560 as shown in FIG. 52 during the small hit game, and the small hit game effect screen 560 shows the small hits counted by the prize ball counting means. The acquired prize ball information indicating the number of prize balls paid out during the game is displayed. Here, the winning prize ball information is in the form of “O/X”. “O” indicates the number of prize balls paid out up to the present time. “X shot” indicates the maximum number of prize balls that can be paid out in the present hit, in other words, the maximum number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player in the present hit.

As described above, the small hit game of the second embodiment is designed such that the specified winning number (ie, 10 balls) can be entered while the special winning opening 20 is repeatedly opened for 15 times and for a short time. Therefore, "120 shots", which is the number of prize balls at the specified count, may be displayed in the "small shot" game during the small hit game (12 prize balls per ball entry x 10 ball entries). However, since the small hit game is a specification in which short opening is repeated, and winning of a prize ball is not certain, the effect determination means 303 of the present modification, for the small hit game, for both "O" and "X" , The initial value is set to "0 shots", and 12 shots are added every time a ball is entered into the special winning opening 20. This makes it difficult for the player to feel dissatisfaction even when 10 balls are not entered into the special winning opening 20 during the small hit game due to the opening/closing timing of the special winning opening 20.

As will be described later in relation to feature 4, the effect determination means 303 displays a suggestive effect that suggests a jackpot type (round number, etc.) at the start of a special game in the jackpot development jackpot. The effect determination unit 303 of the present modification updates “x shots” of the winning prize ball information to a value according to the number of rounds at the timing of displaying the suggested effect, in other words, at the timing of indicating the number of rounds. Specifically, to the value of "x shots" up to that point (that is, the number of winning prize balls in the small hit game), (the number of rounds-1) x the value of 12 prize balls per ball entry x the value of 10 ball entries Is set to “x”. For example, in the case of 10 rounds, a value obtained by adding 1080 shots to the number of winning prize balls in the small hit game is set to "x shot".

According to the configuration of this modified example, by presenting the player with the number of winning prize balls even for the first round (small hit game) of the small hit development big hit, it becomes easy for the player to have a sufficient payout feeling. Note that the effect determination means 303 may execute a round number promotion effect that increases the number of rounds of the special game in appearance (for example, increases from 4 rounds to 10 rounds) during the special game. In this case, the effect determination unit 303 may update "x shots" (add a difference of "720 shots" for 6 rounds when the promotion effect occurs) in accordance with the apparent number of rounds. In addition, the winning prize ball information may further include the cumulative number of prize balls during the condominium (that is, while repeating the jackpot acquisition during the time saving), and the effect determining unit 303 determines that the condominium is counted by the prize ball counting unit. The total number of prize balls paid out may be displayed as the cumulative number of prize balls.

<Characteristics 3. Small hit development Big hit production>
As shown in the small hitting game effect screen 560 of FIG. 52, when the V winning is generated during the small hitting game, the effect determining means 303 displays the V notification image 568 which is an effect for notifying that the V winning is won. In addition, the effect determination means 303 displays a round image 564 that shows the cumulative number of times the special electric auditors product 556 has operated from the small hit game to the special game triggered by the V winning in the small hit game.

The effect determination means 303 displays the round image 564 indicating that it is the first operation of the special electric auditors product 556 during the small hit game after the V winning. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the round image 564 showing the first round is displayed. During the small hit game, the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20 is opened up to 15 times, but the special electric accessory 556 is operated once. When the small hit pattern corresponds to the big hit of 10 rounds, the round image 564 showing the 10th round is displayed in the final round of the small hit development big hit.

According to the feature 3, even during the small hit game, an image showing the “first round” or the like is displayed, that is, a series of count displays from the small hit game to the special game. This suggests that a coin equivalent to one round of the special game can be obtained in the small hit game, and can encourage the player to shoot the game ball even after the V winning during the small hit game. If there is no V winning in the small hit game, the second and subsequent rounds (special games) are not executed. Therefore, by displaying the round image 564 on the condition of V winning, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the second and subsequent rounds will continue when there is no V winning.

<Characteristics 4. Small hit development Big hit start production in big hit>
As already mentioned in part, the first profit type that the player can obtain for the special game executed when the V prize is won in the small hit game, and the normal game after the special game is over At least one of the types of second profits that can be obtained differs depending on the type of the small hit symbol at the time of symbol fluctuation stop. The first profit is, for example, the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit, and includes 10 rounds and 4 rounds in the second embodiment. The second profit is, for example, the number of continuation of reduced working hours, and includes 100 times and 9 times in the second embodiment.

When the V winning is made during the small hitting game, the effect determination means 303, after the last opening of the big winning opening 20 in the small hitting game is finished, the big winning opening in the special game which is executed subsequent to the small hitting game. By the first opening of 20, the suggestion effect suggesting the type of profit that the player can obtain is displayed according to the type of the small hit pattern that triggered the small hit game. The suggestive effect is at least one of the number of times the special electric accessory 556 is operated in the small hit development big hit, the number of times the accessory continuously operating device is operated in the special game, and the number of time-saving continuations (eg, 100 times, 9 times) after the end of the special game. The content may suggest one or any combination. For example, the suggestive presentation may include a content for displaying a bonus name “XX bonus”, “XX bonus”, and “ΔΔ chance” corresponding to a combination of the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit and the number of time saving continuations.

Further, the suggestive effect may include a button effect. For example, the suggestive effect may be a content for prompting the player to operate the effect button 109 or the cross key 110. When the predetermined button operation (for example, the button is pressed a predetermined number of times or more) is input while the suggestion effect is being displayed, the effect determination means 303 suggests the type of profit that the player can obtain, for example, the above bonus. You may display a name on the screen of suggestive production.

FIG. 53 shows the display timing of the suggestive effect. The effect determination means 303, the closing period (3.5 seconds) after the last opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hit game + start demonstration time of the accessory continuous operation device (combination operation start demonstration time) (10. In other words, within 14 seconds (5 seconds), in other words, the suggestive effect is displayed between the first round and the second round of the small hit development big hit. In addition, in FIG. 39, the situation where the big winning hole 20 in the small hit game is opened 15 times is shown, but when the number of balls entering the big winning hole 20 reaches 10 balls during the small hit game, at that time point The small hit game is over, and a closing period of 3.5 seconds is provided after the opening is completed no matter how many times it is opened. In addition, the expectation effect described in Feature 2 is executed before the suggestion effect.

According to Feature 4, the interest of the game can be enhanced by suggesting the types of profits that the player can obtain in association with the small hit development and the big hit. Further, by displaying the suggestion effect on the condition of the V winning in the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the effect contents from being inconsistent with the actual profit when the V winning does not occur in the small hit game.

A modified example related to the feature 4 will be described. When there is no V winning in the small hit game, the effect determination means 303, the closing time (3.5 seconds) after the last opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hit game + the end demo of the small hit game (for example, 0. The failure effect may be displayed within 1 second). The failure effect may be a content that suggests or informs that the jackpot will not be developed, or may be a content that suggests or informs that the planned profit acquisition has failed. Incidentally, in FIG. 53 of the second embodiment, when the V prize is won, the end demo time of the small hit game is not set, but this is the end demo time which is set in advance when the V prize is won ( Because 0.1 seconds when V prize is not won) is canceled (which is not executed as "0 seconds" or is not substantially executed as "0.004 seconds (1 interruption)"). is there.

Another modification related to the feature 4 will be described. The effect determination means 303 is a special type of content that suggests that the occurrence of the next small hit development big hit (in other words, a small hit development big hit consort) is substantially determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect may be displayed as a suggestive effect. The special effect may include, for example, a display of a “VV bonus” indicating that a bonus (small hit development big hit or big hit) continuously occurs. The predetermined condition may be that the occurrence of the next small hit development big hit is substantially determined. Specifically, as described in (1) Feature 5, there is information that will be a small hit in the hold due to prefetching, (2) This big hit (small hit pattern) is given 100 times of time saving continuation It may be something that is done.

Yet another modification related to the feature 4 will be described. The effect determination means 303, the feasible period of the suggested effect, that is, after the final opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hit game is completed, the big winning opening 20 in the special game executed subsequent to the small hit game. Before the first release, one or both of the music selection effect and the character selection effect may be displayed in addition to the suggestive effect (displayed at the same time as the execution of the suggestive effect or after the end of the suggestive effect). The music selection effect may be an effect in which the music to be output from the speaker during one or both of the special game and the normal game after the special game can be selected from a plurality of candidates. The character selection effect is an effect in which a character (that is, an effect mode which is an embodiment of the effect) to appear in the effect in one or both of the special game and the normal game after the special game can be selected from a plurality of candidates. May be

In the small hit development big hit, the small hit game is the first round, and the number of rounds in which the big hit effect (special game effect) can be executed is small by one round. Therefore, by making it possible to select a music piece or a character between the first round and the second round, it is possible to provide the player with an effect using the music piece or the character selected by the player for a longer time. If the selectable period of the music or character is considered to be insufficient only between rounds, the selectable period may be continued over the execution period of the second round.

Yet another modification related to the feature 4 will be described. In the above embodiment, the suggestive effect is displayed during the last closing period (3.5 seconds) of the special winning opening 20 in the small hit game + the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the accessory continuous operation device. .. As a modification, the suggestive effect may be displayed during the period of the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the accessory continuous operation device. In addition, when the small hitting end demonstration (for example, 0.004 seconds) is executed at the end of the small hitting game where the V winning occurs, the last closing period (3.5 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hitting game + small The suggestion effect may be displayed during the period of the hit end demo time (0.004 seconds) + the start demo time (10.5 seconds) of the accessory continuous operation device.

Yet another modification related to the feature 4 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 may further include vibration detection means for preventing fraud. The vibration detection unit may detect the presence or absence of vibration when the special winning opening 20 is opened in the small hit game, and when the vibration is detected, may execute predetermined fraudulent notification processing (warning display, notification to external device, etc.). .. Generally, in a unit game or a small hit game of a special game that opens and closes a special winning opening having a specific area, it is carried out to enable the vibration detection during the opening period and the remaining ball detection period after the opening period ends. According to the configuration of Feature 4, the suggestion effect is performed at a non-vibration detection timing (if the vibration detection effective period is 5 seconds after the transition to the closing period of 3.5 seconds for the special winning opening, the suggestion effect is performed. Since the button effective period is generated after 6 seconds from the start), it is possible to perform a suggestive effect in which vibration occurs, such as an effect in which the player presses the button. In the button valid period, before the image display that indicates the valid period (the image display that imitates the effect button 109), a display that indicates that the valid period is reached (the button image is faded in, etc.) is displayed. Button display introduction effect) may be performed, but when the button display introduction effect is started, the effect button 109 may be operated by the player before the effective period, so the button display introduction effect may be performed. It is also preferable to shift the start of (1) after the end of the vibration detection effective period.

<Characteristics 5. Small hit ahead look ＞
As described in the base technology and the first embodiment, the advance determination unit 235 of the main board 200, when there is a ball entering the second starting opening 12, the lottery value acquired upon the entrance (for example, the lottery value). Regardless of whether or not the symbol variation based on the winning/winning lottery value is immediately started, the result when the winning/winning determination (main determination) based on the lottery value acquired by the entry is executed is a big hit or a small hit. It is determined in advance whether or not it will be a hit. When the advance determination result of the incoming ball is a big hit or a small hit, the advance determination means 235 transmits advance determination information indicating that the variation corresponding to the incoming ball is a big hit or a small hit to the effect determination means 303. .. The pre-determination information transmitted to the effect determination means 303 is transmitted in a manner that can identify whether a big hit or a small hit is to be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, by transmitting the information indicating the hit/miss range “4” as the preliminary determination information, it is possible to identify the small hit.

The effect determination means 303, when the V winning is generated during the small hit game, and the pre-determination information received from the main board 200 regarding the suspension for the special figure 2, one or more lottery values for the small hit are suspended. If there is, from the V winning, until the special game ends and the normal game starts, the effect of giving advance notice of the occurrence of a small hit in the normal game after the end of the special game (hereinafter, "small hit notification" It is also referred to as "effect".) can be executed one or more times. In other words, the effect determination means 303, if the right to transfer to the big hit is obtained during the small hit game, and there is a hold that the winning/winning lottery becomes the small hit, at least one or more small hits are executed. The small hit announcement effect of the content to be suggested or informed can be executed during the period until the big hit ends and the time saving state starts. The hold that becomes the pre-reading target of the small hit is the special figure 2 hold that is the main game during the time saving. In the embodiment, the effect determination means 303 displays, as a small hit advance notice effect, V stock images that make the appearance of "V" appearing to be in stock, for the number of small hits to be announced.

The effect determination means 303 can execute the small hit advance notification effect at a plurality of notification timings from the V winning to the time reduction state after the small hit development big hit ends. The plurality of notice timings are configured such that the greater the number of rounds for the small hit development big hit, the greater the number of notices for holding the small hit. Specifically, a plurality of notice timings in the second embodiment are the time of V winning, the third round of the small hit development big hit, the ninth round of the small hit development big hit, and the big hit end demonstration. The number of small hits to be announced at each of the plurality of notification timings is limited to one. That is, the V stock image is increased by one in one small hit advance notice effect.

Therefore, only when the number of rounds for the small hit development big hit is the maximum (specifically, 10 rounds), it is possible to execute the small hit prediction announcement four times, that is, all of the four hold (special figure 2 hold). When it is a small hit, it can be suggested to the player. In other words, if the number of rounds for small jackpot development jackpots is four, it is not possible to execute the jackpot preliminary announcement effect for the ninth round, so even if all four reservations are jackpots, a maximum of three jackpots will be announced. Stay in. The effect determination means 303 determines, by the lottery, how many times the small hit advance notice effect is to be executed and at which advance notice timing, with the number of the preliminary determination results for the small hit being held as the upper limit.

If the pre-determination information for all of the four existing holdings is a small hit, the effect determination means 303 executes the small hit announcement effect four times, but at least one of the small hit announcements is performed. As the effect, a premium effect may be displayed. The premiere effect is a rare effect that is displayed only when all of the four holdings are small hits, and may be content that suggests or informs that a very large profit can be obtained.

According to the feature 5, by suggesting that the small hit development big hit can be continuously obtained in the small hit development big hit mounted machine, it is possible to make the player recognize that a large profit is likely to be obtained. It is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of the game.

A modified example related to the feature 5 will be described. When the three small hits are held in the first small hit development big hit (or the big hit) that has occurred earlier, the effect determination means 303 conceals one small hit and two V stock images. May be displayed. When the second small hit development big hit occurs due to the change immediately after the small hit development big hit ends, the V stock image is updated to reduce to 1 (at this time, the hold existing from the first small hit development big hit) There are two small hits.) In addition, when one of the holdings that occurred during the variation of the second small hit is a small hit (the number of small hits in the holding changes to three), the effect determination means 303 accompanies the second small hit. Even during the small hitting game or the big hitting game, even if a small hitting notice effect is displayed in which the V stock image is increased by 2 including the number of small hits in the hold which were present during the first small hitting big hitting big hit. Good. The definition of the first small hit development big hit and the second small hit development big hit is, as described above, a special game that is performed during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device after V winning in the small hit game. However, as the execution timing of this small hit prefetching effect, since it includes "at the time of V winning" as described above in this embodiment, there is also one that performs small hit prefetch (V stock notification) during the small hit game. In this paragraph, it is expressed as a small hit prefetch executed in "the first small hit development big hit" and "the second small hit development big hit".

As a method 1 for realizing this, the effect determination means 303, in the case of a small hit or a big hit (for example, when the small hit design or the big hit design is stopped or at the time of V winning in the small hit game), in advance determination information. The number of small hits in the hold may be specified based on the above. The effect determination means 303 calculates the difference between the number of V stocks being displayed and the number of small hits in the hold, and using the difference as an upper limit, one of the V V effect effect patterns that can be notified is selected by lottery. You may. For example, a small hit advance notice effect that increases the number of differences and the V stock image may be displayed.

Further, as method 2, the effect determination means 303 specifies the number of small hits in the hold based on the preliminary determination information at the time of a small hit or a big hit, and the pattern of the small hit advance notice effect based on the specified number of small hits. (For example, the display timing of the small hit advance notice effect) may be determined. The effect determination means 303 may cancel the display of the small hit announcement effect in accordance with the displayed V stock number at the display timing of the small hit announcement effect based on the determined pattern, or replace it with a normal effect pattern. Good. For example, when a small win notice production (3 times of V winning, 9th round, end demo) is decided and two V stocks are displayed from before the small hit, 2 small wins are displayed. You may cancel the hit announcement effect (for example, the ninth round in the back, at the end demonstration).

According to this modification, in order to specify the number of small hits held for each small hit (or small hit development big hit), a special effect (premier effect) when the number of held small hits is maximum (4 pieces) Can increase the opportunity to perform. Since the timing of displaying the fourth V stock image by the small hit advance notice effect varies, for example, the effect determining unit 303 turns each V stock image into a rainbow color when four V stock images are accumulated. It is preferable to change and display the special effect (premier effect) in the normal game immediately after the small hit development big hit ends.

Another modification related to the feature 5 will be described. Even if there is no small hit in the hold, the effect determination means 303, if the number of time saving continuations after the end of the small hit development big hit this time is a predetermined value or a predetermined value or more, by lottery (with a predetermined probability), the hold The same small hit announcement effect as when there is a small hit may be displayed. In this modified example, when the number of shortening times is 100, the small hit advance notice effect (that is, the V stock image) can be displayed. This is because the small hit probability of the special figure 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 500 is 1/10, and the small hit occurs almost certainly during the fluctuation of 100 times in the time saving state. The number of time saving continuations for displaying the small hit advance notice effect is not limited to 100 times, and may be a value equal to or more than the number of times that a small hit is expected to occur almost certainly according to the small hit probability. It should be noted that the V stock image displayed in the small hit advance notice effect of this modified example must delete the V stock image indicating that it is a chance of the V prize even in the case of a big hit that does not require the subsequent V prize. There is a possibility of giving a misunderstanding about the game after that (decrease in reliability of display due to occurrence of a situation in which a small hit does not occur even though there is V stock display). The hit announcement effect is referred to as a second small hit announcement effect.

According to the second small hit advance notice production of this modified example, the V stock image remains even after the four small hit development big hits have been digested, so that the possibility of executing the small hit (or big hit) is extremely high. Since it can be continuously executed, it is possible to realize an unexpected production. For example, the effect determination unit 303 causes the V stock image to display an image of “HOLD” in an overlapping manner when the fourth holding (out) digestion after the small hit development big hit, and displays “HOLD” until the change of the big hit or the small hit. The displayed V stock image may be maintained. The effect determination means 303 may end the display of the “HOLD” V stock image at the start of the symbol change of the big hit or the small hit, during the change, or at the end of the change.

In the present embodiment, the V stock display is subtracted and displayed when notifying that the execution of the small hit game is definite in the execution of the small hit change (when the value is 0, the display is erased). About the V stock display for 100 times shortened in the modified example, the reason for deleting the V HOLD image that is "HOLD" even when it is a big hit is that when the big hit is reached, the number of times saved for a short time is reset. This is because there is no compensation for occurrence of. For the same reason, if there is no small hit and there is a big hit in the hold, the second small hit advance notice effect is displayed even if the number of time saving continuations after the end of this small hit development big hit is above the predetermined value. Do not let Alternatively, the execution of the relevant effect is canceled even if the lottery for the small hit advance notice effect is won.

Still another modified example regarding the feature 5 will be described. Even if there is a small hit and a big hit in the hold and the big hit fluctuates before at least one small hit, the effect determination means 303 notifies the number of the small hits in the hold by the V stock image. Is displayed. The effect determination means 303, as the V stock digestion effect, is the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image (the number of V stock images indicates the number of small hits) as a V stock digesting effect from the start of the variation of the small hits to the start of the small hit game. In this case, the V stock image itself) is decreased by one.

On the other hand, the effect determination unit 303 does not change the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image and maintains the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image over the big hit period, when the big hit changes. If there is a small hit in the pending newly generated during the big hit variation or during the big hit game, the effect determination means 303 displays a small hit notice effect for increasing the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image during the big hit game. You may let me.

The effect pattern of the V stock digestion effect executed in the small hit variation in the normal game in the time saving state may include a special mode effect pattern such as the V stock image is emitted in a rainbow color and erased (normal pattern. Is an example of what is erased by emitting white light). The effect determination means 303, in the case where the small hit design of this time is one that brings a high profit (for example, a small hit development big hit of 10 rounds or 100 times of shortening time), a special aspect of the effect as a V stock digesting effect effect pattern. A pattern may be selected to display a special V stock digestion effect. As a result, it is possible to effectively notify the player that high profit will be provided. In the present embodiment, the effect determination means 303 refers to when determining the execution of the small hit advance notification effect, and the result of the pre-determination of the suspension of the special figure 2 which is consumed in the normal game during the time saving game is a special symbol. It does not include information on the stop display mode (small hit pattern), and uses the preliminary judgment information related to the random number used for the win/fail judgment to judge in advance only whether or not the hold is the small hit. Therefore, at the stage of being displayed as a V stock image, it is not possible to determine the type of small hit development big hit that occurs at each V winning opportunity, so it is simply to display the number of V winning opportunities. However, like this modification, by switching the pattern to the digestive effect based on the stop symbol information of the special symbol transmitted to the effect determination means 303 from the main CPU 290 when the fluctuation actually starts, the V stock It is possible to diversify the performance using images and improve the interest.

Still another modified example regarding the feature 5 will be described. As described in the first embodiment, the specific game control means 270 ends the time saving when a small hit occurs. Therefore, if no V prize is won in the small hit game (so to speak, puncture), after the small hit game is over, the normal game in the normal state is started, which is not the time saving game. The production determination means 303 did not win the V in the small hit game, but if the V stock image showing that at least one small hit is being held at the end of the small hit game is displayed, after the small hit game is finished. , It is also possible to display an effect that makes it look as if time saving has been continued. In other words, the effect determination means 303 may display an effect (or an effect with similar contents) in the time saving state as an effect in the normal game in the normal state after the small hit game is finished.

According to this configuration, it is possible to connect to the next small hit while maintaining the player's expectation of the Renso. In this modification, the effect determination means 303 is an exceptional effect in which the symbol variation pattern that can be selected by the main CPU in the normal state is associated with the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern, notice effect pattern) during time saving. A pattern table is stored, and an effect pattern is determined by referring to the exceptional effect pattern table.

The present invention has been described above based on the second embodiment. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the second embodiment is merely an example, and various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention.

A first modification will be described. The first modification mainly shows a configuration for continuing the firing even after the V winning, for the features 3 and 4 of the second embodiment. During the small hitting game, the effect determination means 303 displays a mission effect such as "Enter the attacker (big winning hole 20) and save the gauge!" instead of the counting effect by the object of the treasure box or the like. Good. As an example of this production, an empty indicator display (or an indicator having a different initial amount depending on the chance degree) is displayed in the display area of the production display device 60 in accordance with the occurrence of the small hit game, and a large hit during the small hit game is displayed. An example of executing an effect (an effect of accumulating a gauge) of enlarging the area of the indicator of expectation in the indicator display along with the entry into the winning opening 20 is given.

Further, as in the display of the expectation degree image of feature 2, the effect determination unit 303 causes the mission effect to display an image showing the expectation of the result of the suggestion effect between the first round and the second round of the small hit development big hit. The aspect of the image showing the degree of expectation of profit to be obtained in the small hit development big hit may be changed according to the degree of achievement of the mission (in the above example, the degree of accumulation of the gauge). In addition, the display of the indicator is not limited to the increase mode, but may be a decrease mode, or it continuously changes like the indicator as an effect to encourage the continuation of the firing by connecting to the suggestion of the degree of expectation. No, instead of displaying "Items are displayed when the treasure chest is opened in response to a ball, such as "A chance to acquire items ○○, a big chance if you can acquire all three items". Then, the degree of expectation may be suggested based on the number and combination of the finally displayed suggestion objects.

Further, the effect determination means 303 is withheld each time a predetermined unit amount (1 ball, 2 balls, etc.) of a game ball enters the special winning opening 20, or each time the gauge in the mission effect increases by a unit amount. Whether or not to display an effect that suggests or informs the number of small hits (small hit announcement effect of feature 5) may be determined by lottery. When this lottery is won, if there is an unannounced small hit in the hold, the effect determination means 303 may display a small hit advance announcement effect that suggests or notifies the small hit.

In addition, when there is a small hit in the hold, the effect determination means 303 has a predetermined probability (for example, 2%) in the vicinity of the special winning opening 20 in accordance with the entry into the big winning opening 20 after the V winning. You may turn on the light guide plate installed in. When the light guide plate is turned on, the effect determination means 303 is a special effect that suggests that the small hit development big hit consort has been decided as the suggested effect between the first round and the second round of the small hit development big hit (described above). May be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 100%).

A second modification will be described. The second modified example also mainly shows a configuration for continuing firing even after the V winning, with respect to the features 3 and 4 of the second embodiment. The effect determination means 303 includes a special winning opening image showing the special winning opening 20 and a character image at the start of the small hitting game, and has an effect of promoting the aiming at the special winning opening 20 (referred to as "shooting promotion effect"). .) may be displayed. When the V winning is won in the small hitting game, the effect determination means 303 displays the V notification image as shown in FIG. 52, but after the V notification image is displayed, the display of the launch promotion effect is continued for a while. Good. That is, the V notification image and the launch promotion effect may be displayed in parallel.

The timing for ending the display of the launch promotion effect is the earlier when a certain time has passed after the V winning and the closing condition of the big winning opening in the small hitting game is satisfied (10 balls entering or 15 opening ends) May be Alternatively, the timing for ending the display of the launch promotion effect is when there is a V prize and three or more balls have entered the special winning opening 20, or when there is a V prize after entering three or more balls into the special winning opening 20 (even after a few seconds. Good).

In addition, the effect determination means 303, from the V notification image 568, an object for displaying the number of balls entered into the special winning opening 20 during the small hitting game (such as the number-of-balls notification image 566 in FIG. 52) and an image of the launch promotion effect from the V notification image 568. Also, the display priority may be increased. For example, the effect determination means 303 draws the number-of-balls notification image 566 and the image of the launch promotion effect on the drawing layer of the upper layer of the drawing layers of the plurality of layers provided in the effect display device 60, You may arrange so that it may not be hidden by other images. In addition, when the display priority of the V notification image 568 is increased, the effect determining unit 303 does not overlap the V notification image 568, so that the effect determination unit 303 does not overlap the V notification image 568, and the number-of-balls notification image 566 and the shot number are notified. You may arrange the image of promotion production. In addition, the effect determination unit 303 may reduce the size of the number of incoming balls notification image 566 or the image of the launch promotion effect to be smaller than the case where the V notification image 568 is not displayed so as not to overlap with the V notification image 568.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, an example of effects applicable to the second embodiment and the modification will be described. FIG. 54(a) shows a variation effect screen 570 for notifying the occurrence of a small hit (or a big hit), showing a state in which the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is stopped in a mode showing a small hit (or a big hit). There is. Further, on the variation effect screen 570 of FIG. 54(a), the character image 572 is displayed in a mode of suggesting or notifying a small hit (or a big hit).

54(b) shows a small hit game effect screen 560 following FIG. 54(a). The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54B is displayed, for example, as a small hit game start demonstration. The small hitting game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54B includes a right hitting instruction image 562 for instructing the player to hit the right hand, a big winning opening image 574 simulating the appearance of the big winning opening 20, and a character image 572. .. On the small hitting game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54(b), the character image 572 is displayed in a mode for prompting a right hit (for example, a state in which the user points to the right).

FIG.54(c) has shown the small hit game effect screen 560 following FIG.54(b). The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54(c) is displayed, for example, after the occurrence of a V winning in the small hit game. The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54(c) prompts the player to aim at the V notification image 568 for notifying the V winning, the round image 564 indicating the first round, and the attacker (big winning opening 20). It includes a message 576 and a gauge image 578 showing the number of balls entered into the special winning opening 20. The gauge image 578 corresponds to the number-of-balls notification image 566 of the second embodiment, and the color thereof changes according to the number of balls to the special winning opening 20, for example.

55(a) shows a small hit game effect screen 560 following FIG. 54(c). In the small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 55(a), the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 during the small hitting game becomes a predetermined number or more (for example, 7 balls or more), so the target is launched at the special winning opening 20. The message 576 for encouraging the user to win and the special winning opening image 574 are hidden.

55(b) shows the inter-round effect screen 580 following FIG. 55(a). The inter-round effect screen 580 displays the inter-round effect displayed from the end of the small hit game (first round) to the start of the first unit game (second round) of the special game. The inter-round effect corresponds to the suggestion effect of the characteristic 4 of the second embodiment. The inter-round effect screen 580 includes a button image 584 that prompts the user to operate the effect button 109 and the like, and a bonus suggestion image 582 that indicates the type of the big hit this time from among a plurality of kinds of big hits having different numbers of rounds and the number of time saving continuations. The bonus suggestion image 582 may include an image simulating a roulette that rotates in response to an operation of the effect button 109 or the like. Further, the inter-round effect screen 580 includes an effect image 586 at the screen end portion. The effect image 586 may change its color over time, and may change to the same color as the gauge image 578 on the small hitting game effect screen 560 at the end of the inter-round effect.

FIG. 55(c) shows a big hit effect screen 588 following FIG. 55(b). The jackpot effect screen 588 of FIG. 55(c) shows the effect of the first unit game (second round) of the special game. As described above, the jackpot effect screen 588 includes a round image 564, winning prize ball information 590, and a V stock image 592. The V stock image 592 of FIG. 55(c) indicates that two small hits are stocked (that is, two small hits exist in the hold).

A third modification will be described. The conditions for ending the time saving in the pachinko gaming machine 500 are (1) the number of fluctuations A of the special diagram 1 (for example, 7 times), (2) the number of fluctuations B of the special diagram 2 (for example, 100 times, 9 times or 1 time), ( 3) Includes the number of fluctuations C of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (for example, 100 times, 15 times, or 7 times (A+B-1)). As already described in the first embodiment, the first fluctuation pattern determination unit 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determination unit 232 switch the fluctuation pattern tables according to the fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively.

Processing related to time saving end 1:
The first fluctuation pattern determination unit 231 of the present modification switches the fluctuation pattern table to the mode 0 table at the timing of the time saving end. The number of fluctuation pattern candidates (the number of candidates that can be selected) defined in the time saving fluctuation pattern table of Toku-zu 1 is small. Therefore, by forcibly switching the variation pattern table to the mode 0 table at the end of the time saving, the effect determined by the variation of the suspension of special figure 1 becomes monotonous during a plurality of changes after the end of the time saving. It can be avoided.

Process 2 for time saving end:
On the other hand, the second variation pattern determination unit 232 of the present modified example refers to a variation pattern table (mode 7 table of FIG. 43) different from usual for the four variations after the end of the time saving even if the time saving ends. The fluctuation pattern of Toku-zu 2 is determined. In Pachinko gaming machine 500, the time saving effect mode (rush effect of FIG. 40) continues while the holding of special map 2 is completed after the end of time saving, so the time saving ends exceptionally under the time saving end condition of special figure 1. However, if the special figure 2 hold occurs, it is necessary to select a variation pattern corresponding to the time saving effect mode.

Processing for time saving end 3:
In the case of no V win (puncture) in the small hit game which is an exceptionally short time end, the first variation pattern determination unit 231 switches the variation pattern table of Toku-zu 1 to the mode 0 table of Toku-zu 1. In addition, the second fluctuation pattern determination unit 232 also switches the fluctuation pattern table of special figure 2 to the mode 0 table of special figure 2.

The processing 3 described above, if the small hit does not occur in the special figure 1 as in the first embodiment, or the small hit may occur in the special figure 1, and the small hit game of the special figure 1 In the same way as in Toku-zu 2, it is executed when a V prize can be won. On the other hand, there is a possibility that a small hit occurs in Toku-zu 1, but when the opening/closing control of the specific area opening/closing device 552 is performed so as not to win the V in the small hit game of Toku-zu 1 (Small hit in Toku-zu 1 (If the game is designed to puncture almost certainly), the above-mentioned process 3 and the control of the time saving end are not performed in the small hit game of special figure 1. That is, in the small hit game of the special figure 1, the time saving is continued even if the V prize is not won. At the time of the first hit (at the time of the shift to the first time saving), in order to avoid ending the time saving due to the flat blow of the small hit game when the small hit occurs due to the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 before the special figure 2 hold occurs. Is.

A fourth modification will be described. In the fourth modification, a modification regarding the round indicator light will be described. As described in the base technology, the game state display unit 76 functions as a round indicator light that displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) executed in the special game by the 7-segment LED. The main board 200 (for example, the main display control means 250) is a game state display section 76 (that is, a round indicator light) for both the 10-round symbol big hit and the 10-round small hit development big hit (small hit 1R, big hit 9R). May be emitted in the same pattern. Similarly, the main board 200 (for example, the main display control means 250) has the same pattern as the game state display section 76 for both the four-round symbol big hit and the four-round small hit development big hit (small hit 1R, big hit 3R). You may make it emit light.

In the main board 200, in the 10 round small hit development big hit and in the 4 round small hit development big hit, a special game state is started based on the operation of the V prize or the accessory continuous operation device after the V prize (small hit development. Until the big hit), the game state display section 76 may be made to emit light in a common pattern for small hit games. After the V winning, the gaming state display unit 76 may be caused to emit light in the same pattern as the 10-round symbol jackpot and the same pattern as the 4-round symbol jackpot. This makes it impossible or difficult to distinguish between 10 rounds and 4 rounds before the V winning.

A fifth modification will be described. In the fifth modification, a modification regarding the performance display unit 159 will be described. The performance display unit 159 is, as described in the prerequisite technique, "to calculate and display the ratio (called a base value) of the total number of prize balls to the total number of fire balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls." In this modification, it is assumed that the base value at the time of a normal game in a normal state (low-probability game state and non-time saving game state) is displayed, during normal game during time saving game and during operation of the accessory continuous operation device. During the special game, it is not treated as count data for display on the performance display section.

In the gaming machine described in the first and second embodiments, when the small hit game corresponding to the substantial first round of the small hit development big hit starts, the time saving game is ended, and the small hit game is ended. Along with this, the accessory continuous operation device is operated. Therefore, during the small hit game, it means that it is the same state as the normal game in the normal state (low probability game state and non-time saving game state), which corresponds to the practical first round in the small hit development big hit. However, the acquired game ball will be counted as the base value during the normal game in the normal state. When the base value of the fifth modified example is calculated in such a situation, a safe ball equivalent to a payout of 1R for the big hit is generated every time the small hit development big hit, which is the small hit V (second embodiment). Since 120 balls) is added to the base value, the count data of the performance display unit 159 includes values that should not be originally counted in the small hit game that should be treated as a special game. There is a fear that it will happen.

Therefore, as a fifth modified example, an optimum method as a data counting method of the performance display unit 159 in the first and second embodiments adopting the small hit development big hit will be described below.

Regarding the data displayed on the performance display unit 159 of the fifth modified example, the main CPU 290 determines that the execution of the jackpot game is definite when a V winning is made during the execution of the jackpot game which is a jackpot development jackpot. After the V winning, it is regarded as the big hit, and the base value is calculated for the prize balls generated by entering the large winning opening 20 after the V winning, and the total number of safe balls and out balls fired after the V winning. The method of controlling to be outside is adopted. As a method for satisfying a gaming state equivalent to a big hit after a V winning, based on the fact that a V prize is won during a small hitting game, the flag relating to the operation of the condition device or the accessory continuous operation device becomes equal to that during a big hitting. You can switch to the value.

By doing in this way, for example, during the small hitting game of the second embodiment, when the game ball entered in the third ball passes through the specific area (wins V), from the fourth game ball, It can be regarded as a prize ball generated in the big hit development, and only "36 balls" (12 prize balls × 3 balls entered) are added as the counting target as the number of prize balls generated during the normal game in the normal state. Therefore, in the gaming machine that adopts the small hit development big hit, the base during the normal game in the normal state is excessively raised based on the fact that the small hit game corresponding to the substantial first round occurs. Can be prevented.

A sixth modification will be described. In each of the examples, the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit and the number of time saving continuations after the end of the small hit development big hit were determined according to the small hit design. As a modified example, at least one of the number of rounds and the number of shortened hours may be determined according to the result of the lottery (the small hit symbol may be involved) at the time of V winning, not the small hit symbol.

(Third embodiment)
The basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, the functional configuration of the main board 200, and the functional configuration of the sub-board 300 are the same as those of the second embodiment (FIG. 49, FIG. 3, FIG. 4). , FIG. 11). Further, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment is provided with a setting changing device 170 (FIG. 2), similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology, and has six stages of setting (setting 1 to setting 6). ), the probability that the win/win lottery will be a big hit has a setting difference in addition to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, and the probability that a small win will be a setting has no setting difference.

Hereinafter, description will be made focusing on differences between the base technology and the first and second embodiments, and description of common points will be omitted. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as the elements described in the base technology, the first embodiment and the second embodiment are given the same reference numerals and described. To do.

An outline of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment has the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first and second embodiments, but in addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first and second embodiments. Then, an effect of suggesting the set value stored in the setting change device 170 (setting memory) to the player (hereinafter, also referred to as “setting suggestion effect”) is executed.

The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500 may be stored in both the RAM of the main board 200 (for example, the memory of the setting change device 170) and the RAM of the sub board 300. The sub-board 300 may execute the setting suggestion effect with reference to the set value stored in the RAM of the sub-board 300. For example, the main board 200 may transmit a predetermined command indicating the changed setting value to the sub-board 300 at the timing when the setting change is confirmed, and the sub-board 300 may store the setting value in the RAM. The main board 200 may also send a predetermined command indicating the current set value to the sub-board 300 when the power is turned on and the RAM is cleared.

Further, the main board 200 may include setting value information indicating the current setting value in various commands transmitted to the sub-board 300 for each symbol variation. Similarly, the main board 200 may include setting value information indicating the current setting value in various commands transmitted to the sub-board 300 at the time of special game and error recovery. In this way, by transmitting the set value information at a predetermined trigger even during the game, the set value stored in the main board 200 and the set value stored in the sub board 300 are synchronized even during the game. It is possible to maintain the fairness of the game. For example, when an illegal operation is performed to illegally change only the main setting value while dropping the sub-board 300, the setting value after the illegal change is reflected on the sub-board 300 side, and the setting value after the illegal change is played. It can be presented to a person or staff of an amusement store.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment has the following four features regarding setting suggestive effects. These features can be implemented as a single unit and can be combined in any way, and can be combined with any of the features described in the base technology and the first and second embodiments.

Features 1. Ends only when Vstock is set Demo suggestion:
Since the setting suggestion effect is not common in the past Pachinko game machines, when the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the end demonstration of the special game, the setting suggestion effect is in an advantageous state (for example, a certain change state or a pending state that is a specific game). There is a possibility of causing the player to misunderstand that it is one that suggests or informs that a shift to Uchirenso is planned. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment is a special game provided that the "advantageous notification effect", which is an effect that suggests or notifies that a transition to an advantageous state is scheduled, has been executed. The setting suggestion effect is displayed in the end demo of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the setting suggestion effect and to prevent the player's expectation that the player should shift to an advantageous state.

Features 2. Prevention of downgrade of setting suggestion production:
If the suggestion content of the setting suggestion effect executed at a later time point has a lower player's profit (in other words, the degree of advantage) than the suggestion content of the setting suggestion effect effected at an earlier time point, the setting at the previous time point The player's expectation of seeing the suggested production will be impaired. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, a higher setting priority is given to a setting suggesting effect that suggests that the profit for the player is greater, and after the setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first priority is executed. , The execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second priority lower than the first priority is restricted. This can prevent the player's feeling of expectation from being impaired.

Features 3. Ended when V is not winning
As described above, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, it does not develop into the big hit and returns to the normal game after the demonstration of the end of the small hit game. The execution time of the small demonstration game end demonstration effect is very short, and it is difficult to secure the time of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment does not execute the setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration of the small hitting game, so that a lottery process or a display process that is substantially meaningless for the setting suggestion effect is performed. Can avoid execution.

Features 4. Difference in hold change frequency:
In the Pachinko game machine, one game (for example, a symbol variation) does not progress at the trigger of an operation by the player like a slot machine, but progresses over time. Therefore, by pre-reading the information of the held lottery value, it is possible to execute the pre-reading effect which is executed over a plurality of symbol variations. Regarding the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, regarding the effect by the hold prefetch that can be executed over a plurality of times of symbol variations, a specific effect mode in the effect suggests a set value. As a result, the hold prefetching effect can be presented to the player as an indication of a big hit and also as an indication of a set value, which can further enhance the player's expectation and interest in the game. Further, since it is executed over a plurality of times of symbol variations, it becomes easy to prevent the player from missing the suggestion contents.

Hereinafter, the above four features will be sequentially described in detail.
<Characteristics 1. Ends only when V stock is suggested for demo setting>
In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, a V prize is generated during the small hit game, and the pre-determination information received from the main board 200 for holding the special figure 2 is small. When one or more lottery values to be won are suspended, V stock image as a small hit advance notice production from the V winning until the small hit development big hit (special game) ends and the normal game starts. Can be displayed. The small hit advance notice effect is an effect of adding or adding a V stock image, and is also referred to as “V stock effect” below.

The effect determination means 303 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 stores two conditions as displayable conditions for the setting suggesting effect in the special game end demo effect (also referred to as “big hit end demo effect”). The first condition is that one or more V stock images are displayed before the start of the end demo effect, in other words, that the V stock effect is executed one or more times before the start of the end demo effect. Is. The second condition is that the V stock production in the end demonstration production is not won. When both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the effect determination means 303 determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the end demo effect with a predetermined probability.

As described in the second embodiment, the effect determination means 303 is triggered by the V winning in the small hit game, whether to execute the V stock effect, how many times the V stock effect is executed, or the V stock effect. The execution timing (for example, at the time of V winning, the third round of the small hit development big hit, the ninth round of the small hit development big hit, and the big hit end demonstration) is determined by lottery. If the result of this lottery is a specific pattern, the effect determination means 303 does not execute the setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration effect of the special game. For example, when the lottery result is a pattern for executing the V stock effect and executing the V stock effect during the big hit end demonstration, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the end demonstration effect of the special game.

In the case of a gaming machine that has a probability variation state, the second condition above is not winning a probability variation promotion effect (for example, a revival effect that wins a once-defeated battle by reversing, etc.) as an end demonstration effect of the special game. But it's okay. The reason for providing such a second condition is to preferentially display an effect that suggests or informs the contents directly related to the player's profit rather than the set value, such as the V stock effect or the probability variation promotion effect. If the player understands that there is a clear difference in appearance between the setting suggestion effect and the V-stock effect (or the probability variation promotion effect), the second condition is not specified and only the first condition is specified. In some cases, they may be displayed simultaneously.

In addition, the probability variation promotion effect in the end demo may be designed to lengthen the end demo time in order to secure the scale of the effect, and to stop the big hit (small hit in the case of small hit V). It may be performed based on. In this case, as the second condition, it is determined that the big hit (small hit in the case of a small hit V) stop symbol is not a specific mode in which an effect that is prioritized over the setting suggestion effect, such as the probability variation promotion effect, is executed at the time of the end demo. May be If the stop symbol of the big hit is the above-mentioned specific symbol, the effect determination means 303 may determine that the second condition is not satisfied and avoid executing the setting suggestion effect during the end demonstration effect.

56(a)-(d) show an example of a big hit end demonstration effect. As shown in FIG. 56( a ), the effect determination means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the end demo screen 600. The effect determination means 303 causes the end demo screen 600 to display a wallpaper image 602 indicating the content (motif, type of character, etc.) according to the number of consecutive holidays. Although not shown, the effect determining unit 303 may display the number of consecutive villas in the advantageous period and the total number of winning prize balls in the advantageous period on the end demo screen 600.

56(b)-(d) show setting suggestion effects. As shown in FIG. 56( b ), the effect determination unit 303 causes the end demo screen 600 to display the character image 604, and causes the wallpaper image 602 that has been displayed until then to be displayed as an action (animation) for the character image 604 to remove. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56(c), the effect determination unit 303 displays an action in which the character image 604 selects setting. Finally, as shown in FIG. 56(d), the effect determining unit 303 displays the votive panel image 606, which is an object having the content that suggests the set value.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500, votive panel images 606 in a plurality of types (shapes, patterns, colors, etc., which can also be referred to as appearances) corresponding to a plurality of set values are stored in advance. The effect determination means 303 selects any one of a plurality of types of votive panel images 606 according to the set value stored in the setting change device 170 and a predetermined selection probability. The plurality of types of votive panel images 606 have appearances corresponding to “setting 6 confirmed”, “setting 4 confirmed”, “setting 4 or more”, “setting 2 or more”, “setting value is odd”, etc. including. As a result, the expected value of the set value changes depending on the form of the votive panel image 606 presented in the setting suggestion effect. The effect determination unit 303 changes the display mode (for example, in the band display mode) on the effect screens of FIG. 56(b) and subsequent screens for the number of consecutive games and the total number of won prize balls displayed in FIG. By continuously displaying in the corner, the number of consecutive games and the total number of won prize balls may be confirmed on the effect screens after FIG. 56(b).

FIG. 57 is a time chart regarding a big hit end demonstration effect. FIG. 57(a) shows a time chart in a normal state in which neither the V stock effect nor the setting suggestion effect is executed. FIG. 57B shows a time chart when the V stock production is executed during the end demonstration production. FIG. 57C shows a time chart when the setting suggestion effect is executed during the end demonstration effect. The time for the big hit end demonstration effect is 13 seconds in each of the normal time, the V stock effect execution, and the setting suggestion effect execution. The time of the big hit end demonstration effect is, for example, an effect executed in accordance with the end demonstration time of the special game (S814 of FIG. 28) in the main control device, and the type of the big hit game (when the big hit starts. It is set for each of the big symbols that are special symbols that are stopped and displayed), and if the time for the big hit end demonstration production is insufficient for the setting suggestion production, etc., such kind In the big hit, the setting suggestion effect may not be performed.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), normally, a background (wallpaper image 602) corresponding to the number of consecutive holidays is displayed for 6 seconds, a rush effect character string is displayed for 6 seconds, and a background image transition is displayed for 1 second. To do. Further, as shown in FIG. 57(b), when executing the V stock effect, the background (wallpaper image 602) corresponding to the number of consecutive holidays is displayed for 3 seconds, the addition of the character and the V stock image is displayed for 9 seconds, and the background image is displayed. The transition is displayed for 1 second. Further, as shown in FIG. 57(c), during execution of the setting suggestion effect, the background (wallpaper image 602) corresponding to the number of consecutive holidays is displayed for 2 seconds, the rotation of the character image 604 and the votive panel is displayed for 6 seconds, and then stopped. The displayed votive panel image 606 is displayed for 5 seconds. Although not shown, in FIGS. 57(b) and 57(c), regarding the notification of the rush effect rush, in order to notify the player of the subsequent game state, a mode different from the normal time of FIG. 57(a) The entry into the rush effect may be notified by (for example, a telop or icon display in the corner of the screen).

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment displays the setting suggestion effect in which the character operates in animation. Therefore, it becomes easier to attract the player's attention to the effect, as compared with the case where the background image of the big hit end demo is simply replaced with the special background suggesting the set value. On the other hand, since it is an animation effect, it is easy for the player to misunderstand that it is foretelling the player's profit such as a big hit (small hit V) by the holding inner villa or a transition to a specific game such as a certain change. Also, unlike the slot machine, the Pachinko gaming machine 500 ends with a big hit end demonstration when time elapses, so if a special performance occurs without involvement of the player operation, it also notifies the pending inner villa or a sudden change It is easy for the player to misunderstand that

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, an effect that gives an advance notice that it is in an advantageous state (this is an effect corresponding to the above-mentioned one that gives an advance notice of the profit to the player, and the V stock effect in the third embodiment. ) Has been executed, the setting suggestive effect is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake and to prevent the player's expectation from being impaired.

The effect determination unit 303 continues to display the votive panel image 606 presented in the setting suggestion effect at the time of the end demo in the corner of the effect screen (in other words, the corner of the effect display device 60) even in the subsequent game. By doing so, it becomes possible to provide the information about the set value to the next player even in the situation where there is no player playing the game, which leads to improvement of the motivation of the game and motivation of the game. However, the effect determination unit 303 does not display the votive panel images 606 presented in the past setting suggestion effect during the small hit game, the big hit game (except for the end demonstration with the setting suggestion), and the super reach effect. Display The effect determining unit 303 may display an effect of replacing the votive panel image 606 presented in the past setting suggestion effect with a new votive panel image 606 at the time of the end demo in which the setting suggestion is executed.

Further, the effect determining unit 303, when a plurality of types of votive panel images 606 having different appearances are presented in a plurality of setting suggestion effects, in other words, when a plurality of types of votive panel images 606 suggesting different setting values are presented. , These plural types of votive panel images 606 are continuously displayed in the subsequent games. As described above, the votive panel image 606 of the third embodiment has (1) a set value that is an even number or an odd number (or a high expectation of being an even number or an odd number), and (2) a set value. Indicates that the value is greater than or equal to a specific value (or the expected value that is greater than or equal to the specific value is high), (3) The set value is a specific value (or the expected value that is a specific value is high) ) Is included. Therefore, by combining a plurality of votive panel images 606, it becomes possible to narrow down the actual set value, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Even when a plurality of votive panel images 606 are displayed, inconsistent suggestions may be displayed if a plurality of votive panel images 606 are displayed with the same type of contents described in (1) to (3) above. When the votive panel images 606 of the same type that are difficult to connect are displayed, a part of the votive panel images 606 of the votive panel images 606 of the same type may be hidden based on the priority or the like described later.

As a modified example, when the effect determination unit 303 displays a plurality of votive panel images 606 having different appearances in a plurality of setting suggestion effects, the votive panel image 606 with the highest priority among the plurality of votive panel images 606 (in other words, Only the votive panel image 606) presented in the setting suggestion effect with the highest priority may be displayed in the subsequent game. The priority will be described later. Further, the effect determination means 303 may display only the votive panel image 606 that suggests the highest setting value in the subsequent game, instead of or together with the priority. In this modified example, even when only one votive panel image 606 is displayed during the game, the effect determination means 303 responds to the operation on the menu screen during the game standby demonstration with the big hit history and during each big hit. The votive panel images 606 presented in the setting suggesting effect may be arranged side by side and displayed as a list, or the votive panel images 606 displayed may be displayed in the order of display or in a predetermined display by operating the cross key 110 or the like. The display may be sequentially switched according to the order (the undisplayed votive panel image 606 is not displayed as the setting suggestive effect).

As another modification, the effect determination means 303 does not always display the votive panel image 606 in the game after the setting suggestive effect is executed, but displays the votive panel image 606 during the game standby demonstration or only on the menu screen. Good.

As yet another modified example, the effect determination means 303 does not execute the V stock effect in this big hit (small hit development big hit or pattern big hit), but as a result of executing the V stock effect in the previous big hit, the V stock image is If it remains, the setting suggestion effect may be displayed at the time of this big hit end demonstration. For example, if the effect determination means 303 displays the V stock image of the result of executing the V stock effect in the previous big hit on the big hit effect screen of this time, the setting suggesting effect is displayed at the end of this big hit demonstration. Good.

Further, as another modification, regarding the votive panel image 606 that is continuously displayed during the normal game, not only is it updated by displaying a new votive panel image 606 in the big hit end demonstration, but also a special effect in the variation effect. When the announcement lottery is won, an effect of replacing the votive panel image 606 with another image may be executed. For example, the effect is equivalent to the hold change effect in which the hold lamp image is switched when the other hold image is involved in the hold lamp image, and the other object image is involved in the votive panel image 606 instead of the hold lamp image. A certain amount of points are added when the votive panel image 606 is replaced by displaying an image, when a special reach effect (SP reach) is missed, or when a specific effect occurs, and a predetermined point is added. An example is one in which the votive panel image 606 is replaced (or a replacement execution lottery) based on the value being reached. In addition, when performing such replacement, it is preferable to control so as to prevent the downgrade of the setting suggestion effect (votive panel image 606) shown in Feature 2 described later.

The above-described feature 1 and modification of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment are also useful in the slot machine 1010. For example, the effect determination unit 1304 of the slot machine 1010, in a special game such as a big bonus, gives an advantageous notification effect (for example, an effect that notifies the assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) winning) before the start of the end demo. When executed, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable in the end demonstration effect. Further, the effect determination means 1304 may limit the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the end demo effect when the advantageous notification effect is not executed before the start of the special game end demo. The advantageous notification effect in the slot machine 1010 may be that a plurality of symbols are arranged in a specific mode during execution of the special game, or may be an effect that notifies the ART winning when a predetermined button is pressed. It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be displayed within the advantage notification effect (ART winning notification effect).

<Characteristics 2. Prevention of downgrade of setting suggestion production>
The effect determination means 303 stores a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects and a plurality of priorities in association with each other. The plurality of types of setting suggestion effects are effects that present the votive panel images 606 of different modes in the third embodiment, and therefore, the effect determining unit 303, the plurality of types of votive panel images 606 that can be presented in the setting suggestion effects, It can be said that a plurality of priorities are associated and stored.

In the third embodiment, the setting suggestion effect (in other words, the votive panel image 606) having a higher profit for the player is associated with a higher priority. Specifically, as shown in (1) to (11) below, the higher the priority is associated with the setting suggestion effect having a narrower range of suggested set values (in other words, it is easier to specify the actual set value).

(1) Suggestion setting presentation that presents a votive panel image 606 suggesting a set value of 2 or more (set values 2 to 6) → priority 1
(2) Setting suggestion presentation that presents a votive panel image 606 suggesting a set value of 3 or more (set values 3 to 6)→priority 2
(3) Setting suggestion presentation that presents the votive panel image 606 suggesting a high setting (setting values 4 to 6) → priority 3
(4) Setting suggestion presentation that presents the votive panel image 606 that suggests that the set value is an odd number (set value 1, 3 or 5)→Priority 3
(5) Setting suggestion presentation that presents the votive panel image 606 that suggests that the set value is an even number (set value 2, 4, or 6)→Priority 3

(6) Setting suggestion presentation that presents the votive panel image 606 that definitely suggests (in other words, informs) the setting 1→priority 4
(7) Setting suggestion presentation that presents an votive panel image 606 that definitely suggests setting 2→priority 4
(8) Setting suggestion presentation that presents the votive panel image 606 that definitely suggests setting 3→priority 4
(9) Setting suggestion presentation that presents a votive panel image 606 that definitely suggests setting 4 → priority 5
(10) Setting suggestion presentation that presents the votive panel image 606 that definitely suggests setting 5→Priority 5
(11) Setting suggestion presentation that presents an votive panel image 606 that definitely suggests setting 6→Priority 6 (maximum priority)

The effect determination means 303, after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority (for example, the setting suggestion effect of the above (4)), the setting suggestion corresponding to the second priority lower than the first priority. The execution of effects (for example, the setting suggestion effect of (1) above) is restricted. In other words, the effect determining unit 303 limits the execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the relatively low priority after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the relatively high priority. In the embodiment, the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second priority is prohibited. For example, the effect determining unit 303 may cancel the execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority, and then, if the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second priority is won by lottery.

Note that the effect determining unit 303 may execute the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the same priority after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to a certain priority. In addition, the priorities (6) to (11) are set such that the higher the set value, the more advantageous the player is, and the higher the set value, the higher the priority. As described above, in the embodiment, the narrower the width of the set value suggested as the main parameter and the higher the set value of the sub-parameter, the higher the priority is given.

As a modified example, the effect determination means 303 may store a higher priority in association with a set value having a higher game advantage, regardless of the range of suggested setting values. For example, setting 1→priority 1, setting 2→priority 2,..., Setting 5→priority 5, setting 6→priority 6 may be set. The association with this setting value is associated with the setting value with the lowest degree of advantage among the one or more setting values suggested by the setting suggestion effect. However, odd suggestions (settings "1", "3", "5" suggestion), even suggestions (settings "2" "4" "6"), etc. that should be treated in the same case are set to the same priority. It is desirable to keep. In addition, for a setting suggestion effect of a type in which a certain set value is definite, since the meaning of the appearance of the setting suggestion effect thereafter is weak, a high priority is set. Then, the effect determination means 303, after executing the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value corresponding to the first priority, the setting suggesting the setting value corresponding to the second priority lower than the first priority. You may restrict execution of suggestive production.

As another modified example, the effect determination means 303 can execute the setting suggestion effects of the priority level 6 or higher after executing the setting suggestion effects of the priority level 6, and limit the execution of the setting suggestion effects of the priority levels 1 to 3. You may. Further, the effect determining unit 303 may enable the setting suggestive effects of the priorities 2 to 6 after executing the setting suggestive effect of the priority 4, and may limit the execution of the setting suggestive effect of the priority 1. In this way, the execution of the setting suggestion effect having a priority smaller than the priority of the executed setting suggestion effect by a predetermined value or more (for example, 2 or more) may be restricted. In other words, the execution of the suggestive effect having a priority within a predetermined range from the priority of the executed setting suggestive effect may be permitted. Further, priority 1 to priority 3 may be grouped as level 1 and priority 4 to priority 6 may be grouped as level 2 to allow execution of the setting suggestion effect at the same level as the executed setting suggestion effect. .

As yet another modified example, the effect determining unit 303 stores the setting suggestion prohibition flag (or the setting suggestion when the setting suggestion effect indicating the content (votive image 606) for definitely informing the highest setting value is displayed. The prohibition flag may be turned on), and while the flag is being stored (or when the flag is on), the lottery as to whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may not be executed. Alternatively, as a result of the lottery, the setting suggestive effect may be won or the execution of the setting suggestive effect may be canceled.

Still another modification will be described. The setting suggestion effect suggests different setting values for different combinations of the types of images displayed on the effect display device 60, the sound pattern output from the speaker 108, and the light emission pattern of the decoration lamp 111. You may. For example, a combination suggestion effect that suggests a combination (first combination) of the rainbow emission of the decoration lamp 111, the sound “believe it or not” and the image showing the setting 3 or higher with the reliability of 100%. May be defined as The lottery table referred to by the effect determination means 303 and used to determine the type of effect is selected with a predetermined probability when the setting suggestion effect of the first combination is setting 3 or more, and selected when setting 2 or less. It may be configured not to be performed.

In addition, the combination of the normal light emission of the decoration lamp 111, the sound “Maybe good”, and the image showing the setting 3 or higher (second combination) is used as a setting suggesting effect that suggests the setting 3 or higher with a reliability of 40%. May be set. In the lottery table, the possibility of the setting value when the setting suggestion effect of the second combination is selected is set 3 or more: less than setting 2 = 4:6 (for example, set at a certain timing when the setting suggestion effect is won). When the value is “3” to “6”, the total sum of the numerical range to win the second combination is the second when the set value is “1” to “6” at a certain timing when the setting suggestive effect is won. The value obtained by dividing by the total sum of the number ranges selected for the combination is “0.4”). In this way, even when the same setting suggestion image (for example, the votive panel image 606) is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion may be different if the output contents of other effect devices combined are different.

For example, the priority of the setting suggestion effect that can be selected in the lottery table may be set higher as the set value range suggested in the following order of pattern 1<pattern 2<pattern 3<pattern 4 becomes narrower.
Pattern 1. Setting 2 or more suggestive pattern (image only, reliability 30%)
Pattern 2. Setting 2 or more suggestive pattern (image, sound, lamp chance up emission, 100% reliability)
Pattern 3. Setting 3 or more suggestive pattern (image only, confidence 40%)
Pattern 4. Setting 3 or more suggestive pattern (image, sound, lamp chance up emission, 100% reliability)
As another example, the priority of the confirmation notification and the production of high reliability may be increased so that the priority is set to pattern 3<pattern 2.

Still another modification will be described. Since the setting suggestion effect at the time of the end demonstration is a condition of V stock (that is, it is a suspension string and shifts to an advantageous specific game state such as a probability change as a modified example), the execution condition is considered to be strict in the first place. This is because, for example, there are some conditions in which the winning sequence is satisfied only when the winning is won in the holding and when the big hit is made in the time saving mode. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect at the time of the end demo may be exceptionally executable even if the conditions such as the hold reservation are not satisfied. However, the winning probability of this exceptional setting suggestive effect in the lottery for determining the presence or absence of the setting suggestive effect is set to be lower than the winning probability at the time of establishment of the continuous holding. Further, it may be configured so that the player can win only in the case of the first win (normal win, for example, a hit other than the rush state).

Also, a player with a lot of game experience can easily recognize that the setting suggestion effect suggests a set value. Therefore, if the conditions such as the hold-up sequence are not satisfied, the effect determining unit 303 wins the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect and at the specific timing during the end demonstration effect, the effect input operation device 115 (effect button 109 or the like). When is pressed, a setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a so-called back button effect. The back button effect can be viewed by a player who is familiar with the game or a person who has the knowledge that there is a setting suggestion. Therefore, the button used for the back button effect here is a sub-button (volume adjustment button, cross key 110, etc.) different from the effect button used in the normal game, so that the setting suggestion effect due to an erroneous operation by a beginner can be obtained. The display can be prevented.

The above feature 2 and modification of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment are also useful in the slot machine 1010. For example, the effect determination unit 1304 of the slot machine 1010 stores a plurality of setting suggestion effects and a plurality of priorities in association with each other, and after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority, the first priority. The execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the lower second priority may be restricted.

<Characteristics 3. End when V is not winning
When the V winning occurs during the small hit game, the effect determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute the V stock effect (small hit announcement effect) and the execution timing, and when the condition described in Feature 1 is satisfied, the special game ends. Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect at the time of the demo (in other words, the combination operation end demo) is determined. Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be determined at the start of the special game end demo. In addition, when performing the big hit based on the stop of the big hit symbols, the determination of the V winning is not performed, and therefore the lottery of the setting suggestion effect is performed at the start of the big hit game or the start of the big hit end demonstration effect.

On the other hand, similarly to the second embodiment, also in the third embodiment, when there is no V winning during the small hit game, the big hit is not developed and the game is shifted to the normal game. Specifically, after the closing time (3.5 seconds) after the last opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hit game + the end demonstration time of the small hit game (for example, 0.1 seconds), the normal state of the normal state Move to game.

In the closing time after the final opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hit game, the opening/closing control means 275 of the main board 200 closes the entrance of the special winning opening 20 (for example, the slide plate 540 of FIG. 50). It is necessary to open and close a valve member in a specific area (for example, the specific area opening/closing device 552 in FIG. 50) to eliminate the ball clogging and increase the possibility of passing through the specific area. Therefore, it is necessary to secure a certain length of the closing time (3.5 seconds in the embodiment). At the closing time, since the special winning opening 20 is closed, it seems to the player that the round is finished. Therefore, I want to execute a small hit end demonstration production, but if the small hit end demonstration time is also long, if the V prize is not awarded while the big winning opening 20 is open, the determination of the V prize in the residual ball during the small hit end demonstration Based on the above, it is necessary to make the end demonstration effect redundant so that it can be replaced with a transition to a big hit game, which makes the effect control complicated, and on the contrary, may detract from the interest of the game. In order to solve such a problem, the closing time of the small hit game is shortened while the closing time is lengthened.

When there is no V winning during the small hit game, the effect determination means 303 executes the end demo effect of the small hit game. In the third embodiment, a small hitting game end demonstration effect is executed for 3.6 seconds which is a closing time after the last opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hitting game + a small demonstration game ending demo time of 3.6 seconds. That is, if there is no V winning during the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 has a time (3.6 seconds) shorter than the execution time (13 seconds in the third embodiment) of the end demonstration effect of the special game, the small hit game. The demonstration production is executed.

The effect determination means 303 limits the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the embodiment even if the V stock effect has already been executed (the V stock image 592 has already been displayed) in the end small hit game demonstration effect. , Prohibits or cancels the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Since the time scale for the small win end demonstration production when V is not winning is very short (3.6 seconds even if the closing time of the special winning opening 20 is added), it is difficult to execute meaningful setting suggestion production. Is.

<Characteristics 4. Setting difference in hold change frequency>
The effect determination means 303 of the third embodiment shifts to a special game in the future symbol fluctuation according to the preliminary determination information transmitted from the main board 200 (in the third embodiment, a big hit and a small hit, hereinafter collectively referred to as , Simply referred to as “win”.) It is possible to execute the suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation that occurs over a plurality of symbol variations until the future symbol variation.

In the third example, the effect determination means 303 displays a pending change effect as the above-mentioned suggestive effect. The effect determination means 303 changes the color of the hold lamp image corresponding to the special figure 2 hold that is the target of the prefetch based on the preliminary determination information to a color different from the default color (for example, white) as the hold change effect. Specifically, the default color is changed in one or more steps from blue, green, red, and gold. The target of the pending change effect may be the special figure 1 hold, or both the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold.

That is, the effect determining unit 303 can change the color of the hold lamp image one or more times after the start of the hold change effect, and as a result of one or more pattern fluctuations being consumed. For example, the special figure 2 hold that is the prefetch target is the fourth hold (hereinafter also referred to as “hold 4”) in the variable order, the third hold (hereinafter also referred to as “hold 3”), and the second hold ( Hereinafter, the color of the hold lamp image showing the special figure 2 hold is changed as the first hold (it is the hold of the next variation target and is also referred to as “hold 1” below). Can be changed more than once.

The effect determination means 303 stores a hold change lottery table that defines a plurality of scenarios (patterns) of hold change effect, and refers to the hold change lottery table to determine a specific scenario to be executed in this hold change effect. . The pending change lottery table is designed such that the color of the pending lamp image at the final stage of the change of the pending lamp image (holding 1) is blue, green, red, and gold in order of increasing probability of occurrence of a hit. In addition, the scenario of the hold change effect is designed such that the degree of expectation of hitting suggested by the aspect (color) of the hold lamp image is equal to or higher than the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the previous pattern variation. That is, the scenario of the hold change effect is designed such that the color of the hold lamp image changes stepwise and irreversibly in the order of blue, green, red, and gold.

58 and 59 show examples of the pending change lottery table. FIG. 58 is a hold change lottery table (hereinafter referred to as “outside hold change lottery table”) according to the type of the sub change pattern (change effect pattern) when the special figure 2 hold (trigger hold in the figure) of the prefetch target is out. Is called). FIG. 59 shows a lottery table of hold change effects (hereinafter referred to as “hit hold change lottery table”) according to the type of sub change pattern (change effect pattern) when the special figure 2 hold of the prefetch target is a hit. Shows. The effect determination unit 303 may identify the sub-variation pattern of the pre-reading target special figure 2 reservation according to the result (variation pattern range) of the preliminary pattern determination for the pre-reading target special figure 2 reservation.

In both tables of FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, the total number of random numbers for effect is set to 10000, and the number of units (selection probability) is assigned to 47 scenarios of the pending change effect. The disengagement hold change setting table and the hit hold change setting table are provided for each set value, and the effect determining unit 303 refers to the disengagement hold change setting table and the hit hold change setting table corresponding to the set value of the player's own machine, and holds change Determine the production scenario.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the probability that the hold lamp image indicating the special figure 2 hold of the prefetch target in the hold change effect is in a specific mode is stored in the setting change device 170 (actually, in the RAM of the sub-board 300 as well). Depends on the stored value). The particular aspect is gold in the third embodiment and is also referred to below as "gold reserve". In the pachinko gaming machine 500, this is the frequency of occurrence of money holding, in other words, the probability of selecting a scenario in which money holding finally appears is set to be higher as the setting is higher. This means that the higher the setting of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the lower the expectation of winning when a gold hold is issued (which can also be said to be the reliability of the gold hold). In other words, there are a lot of money hold cases. I can say.

Specifically, in setting 1, the reliability of money holding becomes about 99%, as the setting becomes higher, the reliability of money holding gradually decreases, and in setting 6, the reliability of money holding becomes about 70%. The out-of-hold hold change lottery table and the hit hold change lottery table are designed. For example, in the out-of-hold hold change lottery table for setting 1, the numbers assigned to the scenarios of ID36 to ID47 (hatched areas in FIG. 58), and in the hit-hold change change lottery table for setting 1 the scenarios of ID36 to ID47 (in FIG. 59). The number assigned to the shaded area) is (1) the probability of being an outlying variation, the probability of selecting an outlying variation pattern that can be held as a prefetch target, and the probability of multiplying the probability of winning ID36 to ID47 in the prefetch lottery (that is, If a certain hold becomes a read-ahead target hold and a variation is executed, the probability of winning a read-ahead that becomes a gold hold), (2) probability of becoming a fluctuation, probability of selecting a hit fluctuation pattern that can be a pre-read target holding, The ratio with the probability of multiplying the probability of winning ID36 to ID47 in the pre-reading lottery (that is, the probability of winning pre-reading in which a certain holding is held as a pre-reading target and is held in gold when a variation is executed) is 1:99. Is set. On the other hand, the numbers assigned to the scenarios of ID36 to ID47 in the out-of-hold hold change lottery table for setting 6 and the numbers assigned to the scenarios of ID36 to ID47 in the hit-hold change change lottery table for setting 6 are as described above. The ratio of 1) and (2) is set to be 3:7.

Note that the reliability of the blue display of the hold lamp image (blue hold), the green display of the hold lamp image (green hold), and the red display of the hold lamp image (red hold) is constant regardless of the set value of the own device. For example, it may be 5%, 10%, and 20% in that order. The reliability of blue hold, green hold, and red hold may also be realized by the ratio of the number range in the outlying hold change lottery table to the number range in the hit hold change lottery table.

In this way, in the hold change effect, by designing a specific mode among the modes of the hold lamp image that irreversibly changes in stages to lead to the setting suggestion, the change mode in the middle stage (for example, blue, green, red ), there is a sense of expectation as to whether or not this green hold will be hit, as well as "there may be a high setting if it changes once again". It is easy to increase the player's motivation for the game by increasing the player's sense of expectation regarding the setting that the setting is likely. In addition, even if the money hold is unsuccessful, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the high setting, and the bad impression that "the high expectation hold has been missed" is "the possibility of the high setting has increased". It is possible to reduce it with a good impression, and it is possible to suppress a decline in game motivation.

A first modified example regarding the characteristic 4 will be described. In the above-described embodiment, the holding change effect in which the mode of the holding lamp image is changed between the holding winning prize and the holding 1 has been described. As a modified example, the effect determination means 303 is a notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “the suggestion effect” below) that suggests the degree of expectation for hitting the variation according to the result of determination of the variation (the symbol variation being executed), the result of the symbol determination, or the like. May be displayed.). Here, the suggestion effect may have an appearance similar to the hold lamp image, and the effect control unit 304 causes the hold lamp image displayed in the hold 1 to be moved to the object of the suggestion effect until the fluctuation starts. Alternatively, the hold lamp image and the object of the suggestive effect may be linked.

The object of the suggestive effect may be controlled to any one of a plurality of kinds of effect modes (for example, default color, blue, green, red, and gold) as in the hold lamp image of the third embodiment. You may design so that the expectation degree of a hit may differ according to a performance mode. Here again, the expectation of winning increases in the order of blue <green <red <gold. Then, the probability that the object of the suggestive effect becomes a specific effect mode (here, it is gold and is also referred to as “gold object”) may be different according to the setting value stored in the setting changing device 170. .

Also in this modification, the effect determination unit 303 may determine the effect mode of the object of the suggestion effect by referring to the deviation hold change lottery table or the hit hold change lottery table for each set value of the own machine. Similar to the tables of FIGS. 58 and 59, the deviation hold change lottery table and the hit hold change lottery table in this modified example, depending on the type of the sub change pattern in the change, produce a plurality of presentation modes of the object of the suggestive production. The number will be assigned to.

Also in this modification, the reliability of money holding is about 99% when the pachinko gaming machine 500 is set to 1, and the reliability of money holding is gradually decreased as the setting is increased, and the reliability of money holding is set to about 6 in setting 6. The deviation hold lottery table and the hit hold change lottery table may be designed to be 70%. Also in this modified example, the same effect as the above-mentioned feature 4 is obtained.

Note that the effect determination means 303 may collectively determine the change scenario of the hold lamp image from the hold prize to the hold 1 and the display mode of the object in the suggestion effect during the hold prize. Further, the change of the hold lamp image and the display mode of the object in the suggestive effect may be set as a series of scenarios in the out-of-hold hold change lottery table and the hit hold change lottery table. That is, the single scenario may include both the change scenario of the hold lamp image and the display mode of the object in the suggestive effect.

A second modified example regarding the characteristic 4 will be described. Only the gold hold display at a specific timing in the process from the hold winning prize (when the hold is generated) to the hold 1 may be a target for which the appearance rate is varied depending on the set value. Here, the specific timing is defined as the time of occurrence of the hold (corresponding to "at the time of hold winning in FIG. 59"), that is, the gold hold display at the time when the hold lamp image is first displayed (hereinafter, "direct boiling money hold"). (Also referred to as ".").

Also in this modification, the reliability of the direct boiling gold holding is set to about 99% in the setting 1, the reliability of the direct boiling gold holding is gradually decreased as the setting is increased, and the reliability of the gold holding is set to about 70% in the setting 6. To do. In this case, the number assigned to the scenario of ID47 (the bottom row of the shaded area in FIG. 58) in the out-of-hold hold change lottery table for setting 1 and the scenario of ID47 in the hit-hold change change lottery table for setting 1 (see FIG. 59). The number assigned to the lowermost row of the shaded area is (3) the probability of being an outlier change, the probability of selecting an outlying change pattern that can be reserved as a prefetch target, and the probability of multiplying the probability of winning ID47 in the prefetch lottery (that is, , Probability of winning a read-ahead that becomes a gold hold when a certain hold becomes a read-ahead hold and a deviation change is executed), (4) probability of a change, and probability of selecting a hit variation pattern that can be a read-ahead hold The ratio with the probability that the ID 47 is won in the pre-reading lottery is multiplied (that is, the probability of winning the pre-reading in which a certain holding becomes a pre-holding target holding and a money holding is performed when a variation is executed) becomes 1:99. Should be set so that In addition, the numbers assigned to the scenario of ID47 in the out-of-hold hold change lottery table for setting 6 and the numbers assigned to the scenario of ID47 in the hit-hold change change lottery table for setting 6 are (3), (4 It suffices if the ratio is set to 3:7.

Note that the target of setting suggestion may be a combination of the occurrence of the hold (the first display timing), the hold 1, the variation, or may be limited to an arbitrary place. Further, in the case of targeting a specific hold (gold hold) at the time of holding occurrence, the effect determination means 303 may output a voice indicating a chance when the gold holding is performed at the time of holding occurrence, and the higher the setting, the greater the chance. A special pattern may be output with high probability as a voice pattern indicating. In addition, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect (holding change effect, etc.) is determined when the hold is generated, the setting suggestion effect is set at a timing other than the execution of the effect lottery accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 500 (that is, the start of the pattern variation). It can be said that the presence or absence of execution and the mode are determined.

A third modified example regarding the characteristic 4 will be described. In the above embodiment, the target of the setting suggesting effect is gold holding, but as a modification, a setting of a holding lamp image with a relatively low hit reliability such as “blue holding” that makes the holding lamp image blue is set suggesting. It may be the target of the effect. For example, the reliability of blue hold may be set to about 3% in setting 1, and the reliability of blue hold may be gradually increased, and the reliability of blue holding may be set to about 6% in setting 6.

In this case, in the out-of-hold hold change lottery table for setting 1, the numbers assigned to the scenarios of IDs 1 to 4 (upper part of FIG. 58) and the scenarios of IDs 1 to 4 in the hit hold change lottery table for setting 1 (of FIG. 59). The number assigned to the upper row is (5) the probability of being an outlying variation, the probability of selecting an outlying variation pattern that can be reserved as a prefetch target, and the probability of multiplying the probability of winning ID1 to ID4 in the prefetch lottery (that is, there is If the hold is the read-ahead hold and the outlier change is executed, the probability of winning the read-ahead that becomes blue hold), (6) The probability of being a change per hit, the probability of selecting a hit change pattern that can be the hold of the read-ahead, the read-ahead The ratio with the probability of multiplying the winning probability of ID1 to ID4 in the lottery (that is, the probability of winning the prefetch that becomes blue pending when a certain hold becomes a prefetch target hold and a variation is executed) is 97:3. Should be set so that In addition, the numbers assigned to the scenarios with IDs 1 to 4 in the out-of-hold hold change lottery table for setting 6 and the numbers assigned to the scenarios with IDs 1 to 4 in the hit-hold change change lottery table for setting 6 are as described in (5) above. ) And (6) may be set to be 94:6.

In the embodiment, the situation in which the player is discouraged because the money is out of hold leads to the setting suggestion, while in the third modified example, the situation in which the player feels unexpected due to the blue hold leads to the setting suggestion. It should be noted that blue hold may be the target of the setting suggestion effect only for the special figure 2 hold for which the prefetch result is a hit. This is because the higher the setting, the higher the distribution ratio of the hit variation to the blue suspension (for example, the scenarios of ID1 to ID4 in FIG. 59) and the easier the mounting.

A fourth modified example regarding the characteristic 4 will be described. In the hold change effect, as a rule, (a) if there is a hold that has been changed (or a look-ahead effect other than the hold change is performed), the new hold cannot be changed. (ii) Reach to the first hold If there is a change, it cannot be changed, (c) It can be changed if there is a pending hold, (d) It cannot be changed if there is a hold, (d) A change in the game state such as the end of a time saving or a change pattern table change It may not be changed if it is done up to and including at least a part. If there is such a prohibition, the frequency of executing the setting suggestion becomes low.

A special setting suggestion lottery may be executed in order to make a setting suggestion in a situation where the prohibition of pending change is applied. For example, when the prohibition is applied when the hold occurs, the effect determining unit 303 may output the special sound indicating a chance with a predetermined probability while displaying the hold lamp image of the hold in the default color. In such a special setting suggestion lottery at the time of prohibition, when what is visible to the player is being executed (for example, in the situation of (a) above, when the hold lamp image of the prefetch target hold is not the default) It is desirable to carry out only.

Note that the effect determining unit 303 prohibits simultaneous execution of a plurality of pre-reading effects in a pre-reading effect other than the hold changing effect (such as pre-reading for the same-color chance to be described later), while it sets a plurality of hold changing effects relating to different holds. You may advance simultaneously. In this case, the effect determining unit 303 can execute a new hold change effect as a setting suggestion effect even while the prefetch effect of the same category (for example, another hold change effect targeting a different hold) is being executed. Further, the effect determining unit 303 may allow a plurality of pending change effects below a predetermined level to be displayed, while prohibiting a plurality of pending change effects above a predetermined level. For example, multiple simultaneous display is allowed for the pending change effects whose change range is within the default color to green hold, and multiple simultaneous display is prohibited for the pending change effects whose change range reaches red hold or gold hold. Good.

A fifth modified example regarding the characteristic 4 will be described. In the pre-reading effect (and the lottery for the pre-reading effect), the pre-reading information of the variation pattern (that is, the information of the preliminary pattern determination) can also be used as a parameter. Therefore, when executing the hold change effect for the hold that the specific change pattern is scheduled to be executed, the hold lamp image displayed at the time of shifting to the specific change pattern (here, an object showing the change, It may also be referred to as the “variable ramp image”)) mode (color or the like) may be used for setting suggestion.

Specifically, the ratio of the color distribution of the variable lamp image at the time of developing the battle reach as a specific variation pattern may be set as follows. In the case of setting 1, the default colors may be 30%, blue: 30%, green: 20%, red: 10%, and gold: 10%. In the case of setting 6, the default color may be 30%, blue may be 10%, green may be 25%, red may be 20%, and gold may be 15%. In this way, the effect determination unit 303 may display the variable lamp image in a color that indicates that the expectation of winning is high, with a higher probability as the set value is higher. In this case, the higher the set value, the lower the expectation of hitting when a color (red, gold) indicating that the expectation of hitting is originally high appears.

The default color is a color in the case of a pending change non-winning (or a non-winning of the variable lamp image change notice lottery drawn by lottery at the start of fluctuation). Therefore, by not providing a difference due to the set value in the display in the default color, it is possible to provide the difference due to the set value in the high expected color while making the probability of the pending change even once even as a whole. That is, in the case of the high setting, the hold change effect can be configured not to be in a bargain state. It should be noted that the configuration in which the display in the default color does not have a difference due to the set value can be applied to the suggestion of the setting in the gold hold described in the embodiment.

Furthermore, the idea of providing a setting difference in the look-ahead effect based on the look-ahead information of the above-described variation pattern and the idea of providing a setting difference in the look-ahead effect (specific look-ahead effect) by holding money are combined to display gold holding. Under a situation, the appearance frequency (probability) of a situation such as the change ending (deviation) before reaching the super reach may be used as the setting suggestion. For example, it is possible to suggest a high setting if the gold fluctuation is stopped before the super reach development (there is a normal branch of the normal reach and during the production that is fueling the development of the super reach), and when the winning is a gold hold. Is. In this case, as a general rule, it is premised that the super-reach will be settled for gold hold or red hold or above, except for exceptional circumstances that would suggest such setting.

A sixth modified example regarding the feature 4 will be described. The technique described in Feature 4 is an effect that irreversibly changes in a unit of change over a plurality of changes. In other words, if the effect is that the expectation of transition to advantageous game increases every time it changes, a pending change It can be applied to a look-ahead effect of a type different from the effect. For example, it can be applied to the same-color chance eye effect using the color of the decorative pattern 61. The same-color chance production is a mode (three colors here) of the three decorative patterns 61 over a plurality of changes from the occurrence of the hold to the end of the corresponding change for the hold that is the target of look-ahead (in other words, hit suggestion). It is a look-ahead production that changes the.

The aspect of the decorative pattern 61 in the same color chance eye production is, in order from the lowest expected degree, blue pattern (blue decorative pattern 61), green pattern, red pattern, red pattern + gold effect (for setting suggestion), red pattern + A rainbow effect (winning determination) may be used. Then, as with the gold hold of the embodiment, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of selecting the red symbol+gold effect may be designed. In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the degree of expectation of hitting the red pattern+gold effect may be. For example, the expectation in setting 1 may be 70% and the expectation in setting 6 may be 50%. That is, it may be designed so that a high setting is suggested so that the red pattern+the gold effect is out of alignment.

In the same color chance production, the replacement lottery can be performed until immediately before the stop in the design change (for example, before the speed of the decorative design 61 is reduced). Therefore, the effect determination means 303 may determine the presence or absence of the same color chance eye effect in the change by lottery after the start of the symbol change. In the case of an effect design in which the same color chance eye effect is to be continuously displayed a predetermined number of times or more, if the hold 1 is held, the effect determination unit 303 limits (for example, prohibits) the execution of the same color chance eye effect. You may.

As another example, the technique described in Feature 4 may be applied to an operation effect of the movable accessory 66 or a zone transition effect as another example of the prefetch effect to which can be applied. The action effect of the movable accessory 66 continues the operation of the movable accessory 66 in a mode according to the preliminary determination information of the hold from the next change after the occurrence of the prefetch target hold until the change corresponding to the hold. It may be a look-ahead effect. Further, the zone transition production is a production zone different from the first production zone among a plurality of types of production zones having different production tendencies (motifs, characters, backgrounds, stories, etc.). The production may be switched to the second production zone according to the preliminary determination information.

Also in the case of the operation effect of the movable accessory 66 and the zone transition effect, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of these effects, as in the case of the gold holding of the feature 4, but the result is likely to be out (that is, the degree of expectation is high). 58), a lottery table similar to that of FIG. 58 may be defined. Alternatively, a lottery table similar to that shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 may be set such that the higher the setting, the more likely these effects are to be missed while progressing to the high expected degree pattern.

A seventh modified example regarding the characteristic 4 will be described. The effect determination means 303 may display the pending lamp image as a pending image. In addition, the effect determination unit 303 may set, as the number of the hold lamp image, a number that suggests the tempai pattern (the type of the decorative pattern 61) when the change (the change) corresponding to the hold becomes the reach. . In this case, the effect determination unit 303 may establish the reach with the decorative pattern 61 having a number different (or inconsistent) with the number of the hold lamp image when setting suggestion is made at the time of the change. Either the number on the hold lamp image or the number on the tempai pattern in the fluctuation may be used for setting suggestion.

An eighth modification relating to feature 4 will be described. If the player is not aware of the change in the reliability of the specific mode (for example, money hold) in the hold change effect, the high change of the hold change effect is displayed, but the difference is off. By doing so, there is a possibility that the player's expectation that the variation result will be a win will only spoil the result. Therefore, the effect determination unit 303 may change the variable lamp image during the symbol change corresponding to the target hold of the hold change effect.

For example, the performance determination unit 303 may cause a premium character or a rare character to appear from the gold reserve (the gold-colored variable lamp image) and suggest the setting depending on the type of the character that has appeared. Alternatively, the effect determination means 303 may display a notice effect that suggests a set value or a notice effect such as a notice of a set value due to a visual change such as a change in the dialogue of the character in the variation. It should be noted that if the above-mentioned effect is displayed after being missed due to a change branch of the fluctuating effect or the notice effect, it may cause the player to misunderstand that a hit due to the so-called revival effect has occurred. It is desirable to restrict not to execute.

The present invention has been described above based on the third embodiment. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the third embodiment is an exemplification, and that various modifications can be made to the combination of each constituent element and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. In the third embodiment, the modification has been described for each feature.

(Fourth embodiment)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment has the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first and second embodiments, but in addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first and second embodiments. Then, the setting suggestion effect is executed similarly to the third embodiment. Hereinafter, description will be made centering on differences between the base technology and the first to third embodiments, and description of common points will be omitted. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the base technology and the first to third embodiments are given the same reference numerals and described. To do.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment has the following features relating to setting suggestion effects.
Characteristic. Inconsistency setting notification:
Normally, the setting suggestive effect is more likely to be displayed in various modes when the setting is high, and when the setting is low, the display is decided to be executed in the situation where the content suggesting the advantage over the set value is set. Since it is not performed or the display is limited, the number of executable effects is small and the content tends to be monotonous. Further, if it is confirmed that the setting is low by the setting suggestion effect, the player's willingness to play may be impaired. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, effects that can appear without fail or in accordance with the result of the lottery are displayed in a gaming situation different from (or inconsistent with) the gaming situation. In this case, the setting suggestive effect is provided, or the reliability of the setting suggestive effect is increased. Hereinafter, the setting suggestion effect in the fourth embodiment is also referred to as “contradiction setting suggestion effect”.

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment sets a normal effect having contents that match the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period and a content that does not match the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period. It is possible to selectively execute suggestive production. The normal effect and the setting suggestion effect are effects that belong to the same effect category (effect type), and the same effect pattern (approximate to the appearance of the player) can be selected in different situations. The "same" of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be the same lottery table or lottery result, or even if the lottery table and lottery result are different, the same effect that is visually recognized by the player (almost the same appearance Including substantially the same). As a result, even if the gaming machine is actually set at a low level, the same normal effects as those at the time of a high setting can be executed, so that a variety of effects can be realized and a high setting can be made from the viewpoint of the player. Since the character remains, it becomes easy to promote the player's willingness to play.

The above-described features of the fourth embodiment can be implemented as a single unit, and can be combined with any of the features described in the base technology and the first to third embodiments. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the contradiction setting suggesting effect will be described in detail.

The effect determination means 303 in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when the special game is finished in the advantageous period which is the period in which the gaming state advantageous to the player continues, the special game executed until then in the advantageous period. It is possible to execute a normal effect having contents that match the number of games (so-called number of games). Further, the effect determination means 303 sets the effect with a certain probability when the special game ends during the advantageous period, not the normal effect, but the effect that is inconsistent with the number of special games executed up to that point in the advantageous period. This can be executed as a suggestive production.

The advantageous period in the fourth embodiment is the period of the extended holiday game state shown in FIG. 40, and is also referred to as the “long holiday period” below. The extended-resort period is a period in which a normal game in a time saving state and a special game (including a small hit V and a symbol big hit) are repeated, and is also an execution period of the rush effect described above. The effect determination means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the special game end screen when the special game ends in the extended holiday period. The special game end screen may be displayed as a special game end demonstration effect.

FIG. 60 shows an example of the special game end screen. The special game end screen 610 includes a background image 612 including characters and the like, a result image 614, and a trophy image 616. The result image 614 shows the number of jackpots (XX times) in the current extended holiday period and the number of prize balls (XXXXXPT) paid out in the current extended holiday period. The trophy image 616 shows a trophy for setting suggestion.

The effect determination means 303 displays the trophy image 616 having a content that matches the number of executions of the special game (in other words, the number of extended games) in the extended holiday period as a normal effect with a predetermined first probability. The effect determination means 303 displays the trophy image 616 in one of a plurality of types according to the number of times the special game is executed during the extended vacation period as a normal effect. The normal effect is displayed when a lottery of whether or not to display the display of the trophy image 616 on the end screen 610 of the special game is won, and is displayed when the execution of the normal effect is won. Since the trophy image 616 associated with the special game is associated with the number of executions of the special game as described later, the trophy image 616 that does not match the set value suggested when the trophy image 616 is used as the setting suggestion effect is displayed. The display of the trophy image 616 that accompanies the execution of the normal effect can be said to be a bad effect from the viewpoint of setting suggestion.

In the embodiment, the color of the trophy image 616 displayed on the special game end screen 610 in the normal effect is associated with the number of times the special game is executed. Specifically, the copper-colored trophy image 616 (also referred to as “copper trophy”) corresponds to the number of consecutive holidays twice, and the silvery trophy image 616 (also referred to as “silver trophy”) corresponds to three consecutive holidays. The golden trophy image 616 (also referred to as “gold trophy”) corresponds to the number of times of continuous play. In addition, the giraffe pattern trophy image 616 (also referred to as a “giraffe pattern trophy”) corresponds to the number of consecutive times of 5 times, and the rainbow image (for example, 7 colors) trophy image 616 (also referred to as a “rainbow trophy”) is consecutive. Corresponds to more than 6 times.

Further, the effect determination means 303 displays the trophy image 616 having a content that is inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game (in other words, the number of extended games) in the advantageous period with a predetermined second probability as the setting suggestion effect. . In the embodiment, the color of the trophy image 616 is associated with the suggested setting value. Specifically, bronze trophies correspond to settings 2 and above (settings 2 to 6), silver trophies correspond to settings 3 and above (settings 3 to 6), and gold trophies correspond to settings 4 and above (settings 4 to 6). Correspondingly, giraffe trophy corresponds to setting 5 or higher (setting 5 or 6), and rainbow trophy corresponds to setting 6.

The effect determination means 303 stores a lottery table (also referred to as a “trophy lottery table”) for determining whether to execute the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 (FIG. 61 to FIG. 65). In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61, the display of a plurality of types of trophy images 616 corresponding to the number of consecutive games in the advantageous period which is the normal effect described above and the display of the trophy image 616 which is the setting suggestion effect are the same. It is stored so that it can be determined by one lottery using the trophy lottery table. The effect determination means 303 refers to the trophy lottery table corresponding to the number of consecutive holiday games in the advantageous period, and determines the color of the trophy image 616 to be displayed on the special game end screen 610 by lottery based on the set value of the own machine. With respect to the display of the trophy image 616, the lottery for the normal effect and the lottery for the setting suggestion may be individually carried out by using different tables. In the case of carrying out the lottery individually, the lottery for the setting suggestion is first drawn. When the winning is won, the lottery for the normal effect is not performed, or when the winnings are simultaneously performed in the individual lottery, only the setting suggesting effect is preferentially displayed, and the setting suggesting effect is executed as much as possible. Preferably.

FIG. 61 shows an example of a trophy lottery table. The lottery table shown in the figure is a lottery table that is referred to by the effect determining unit 303 when the number of consecutive holidays is 2. The lottery table shown in the figure is described in the range of the number of values 10000, and shows the number of units (selection probability) of each trophy according to the set value of the player's machine. The appearance probability of the trophy image 616 is designed to be 20% (total number of registered IDs 1 to 5 is 2000), that is, the trophy image 616 is displayed on the special game end screen 610 with a probability of 20%. The “appearance probability” here means the sum of the display probability of the trophy image 616 as the normal effect and the display probability of the trophy image 616 as the setting suggestive effect.

Also, to display a bronze trophy when the number of consecutive villas is two, display a silver trophy when the number of consecutive villas is three, and the like, to make a trophy corresponding to the number of consecutive villas appear as a normal effect. In the sense that it is not a suggestion, it is also called “gase” below. In addition, the lottery table of FIG. 61 is designed so as not to select trophies that suggest a higher set value than the set value of the player's machine. For example, in setting 4, giraffe trophy and rainbow trophy are not assigned numbers, ie, these trophies are not selected.

In the lottery table of FIG. 61, the area of the silver trophy in the case of setting 3, the area of the silver trophy and the gold trophy in the case of setting 4, the area of the silver trophy and the gold trophy in the case of setting 5, and the setting 6 In the case of, the area above the silver trophy is the area that is a setting suggestion. Further, the area of the copper trophy except for the setting 2 is an area that becomes a guse (in other words, a normal effect). Further, the area of the copper trophy in the case of setting 2 is an area in which it is not known whether the setting is suggested or not (from the player's point of view, the correspondence relationship between the number of consecutive games and the trophy image 616 does not contradict each other, so it can be treated as “gase”). Good).

In the lottery table of FIG. 61, the gasse ratio (probability of execution of normal effect) when the trophy image 616 is displayed is designed to be 50%. Further, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect when the trophy image 616 is displayed (reliability with which the setting suggestion effect is displayed) is also designed to be 50%. For example, in the case of setting 4, the numeral range 1000 is assigned to the copper trophy as the normal effect (“gasse” of the setting suggestion effect). In addition, the numerical range 1000 (total) is also assigned to the silver trophy and the gold trophy as the setting suggestive effect. In the fourth embodiment, the setting suggestion effect (trophy image 616) suggesting the setting value "1" is not provided, that is, any of the same effect patterns as the setting suggestion effect is executed as the normal effect. Since it becomes “gase”, the gaze ratio when the setting value is “1” is not 50% but is exceptionally 100%.

According to the configuration of the embodiment, when the special game is finished in the extended holiday period, the trophy image 616 is used in common, but it is a common effect, and the number of extended holidays is not the same as the normal effect. It is possible to selectively execute the setting suggestion production with consistent contents. As a result, even if the gaming machine is set low, the trophy image 616 in the same mode as when the gaming machine is set high can be displayed, which can lead to the motivation for playing the game. For example, even if the setting value of the gaming machine is "1", when the number of consecutive holidays is "4", a gold trophy suggesting a setting of 4 or more may be displayed as the normal effect, and the player's willingness to play the game. It becomes easier to maintain.

The technique described in the fourth embodiment is also useful for the slot machine 1010. The advantageous period in the slot machine 1010 is, for example, a period in which ART and special games are repeated. The effect determination means 1304 of the slot machine 1010 has a first probability when the special game (big bonus or regular bonus) ends during the advantageous period, and the number of times the special game is executed during the advantageous period (even if only the number of big bonuses is reached). It is also possible to execute a normal effect having contents consistent with (good) and execute a setting suggestion effect having contents that are inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period with the second probability.

Further, the "advantageous period" in the fourth embodiment is a continuous holiday period, and has been described as a period in which the normal game in the time saving state and the special game (including the small hit V and the symbol big hit) are repeated. It is only necessary to recognize the situation as "a long-term vacation period", and for models that do not have a small hit V as a gaming machine specification, design a period during which the probability fluctuation period is in operation and a period during which special games are repeated as an "advantageous period". Is also possible. In addition, even when the game state in the main control device has ended the "advantageous period", within a predetermined period (for example, after the "consulting period" ends, until the special symbol fluctuates 30) In the case of returning to the "advantageous period", it is considered that the "advantageous period" has continued, and processing is performed on the side of the effect control means (sub CPU) (such as the number of special games at the end of the previous extended game period). The information for determining the setting suggestive effect may be inherited).

The present invention has been described above based on the fourth embodiment. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the fourth embodiment is merely an example, and that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. Modifications will be described below.

A first modification will be described. In the above embodiment, the display of the trophy image 616 that suggests a set value higher than the set value of the own device is limited, but as a modification, the trophy image 616 that suggests a set value higher than the set value of the own device can be displayed. It may be configured. FIG. 62 shows an example of a modified trophy lottery table related to the trophy lottery table of FIG. In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 62, a part of the number of “gase area” or “area that does not know setting suggestion” in the trophy lottery table of FIG. It is allocated to the non-selected area). Thereby, for example, when the set value of the player's own device is “3”, the effect determination unit 303 can display the gold trophy and the giraffe pattern trophy suggesting a set value higher than the set value of the player's own device.

In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, when the rainbow trophy appears as a setting suggestion, the setting 6 is confirmed, but in the trophy lottery table of FIG. . Therefore, the rainbow trophy in this modification suggests that setting 6 is rich. The setting of setting 1 to setting 3 so that the rainbow trophy does not appear is that the player's expectation for the ball thrown when the rainbow trophy is displayed and the actual ball thrown (the degree of advantage) The purpose is to prevent the gap from becoming large. The rainbow trophy may be set not to appear in setting 4 and setting 5, and may be configured as a special set value finalizing effect.

Further, in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 62, in the case of a low setting (for example, settings 1 to 3), the rainbow trophies are not assigned with a numerical value, that is, the rainbow trophy is not displayed even if it is a game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the trophy image 616 that greatly deviates from the actual set value from being displayed, and excessively increasing the player's expectation. In addition, when the player's own machine is in the setting 1, there is no trophy suggesting the setting 1, so if the trophy appears, all of them will be grumpy. It can also be said that if the player's own machine is set to 6, any trophy will be true, so there will be no gaze.

In the first modified example, the effect determining unit 303 may display the trophy image 616 that suggests a setting value different from the setting value of the own device. Further, in the embodiment as well, there is a possibility that a normal effect that is not a setting suggestion may be displayed. Here, the probability that the effect determining unit 303 executes the setting suggesting effect that correctly suggests the set value of the own device may be configured to be different depending on the number of times of executing the special game in the advantageous period.

As a specific configuration, the trophy lottery table referred to by the effect determining unit 303 may be configured such that the gasse ratio decreases as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period increases. Further, the trophy lottery table may be configured such that when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period becomes equal to or larger than a predetermined value, the gasse ratio becomes lower than when the number of executions is less than the predetermined value.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, when the gasse ratio is 50% when the number of consecutive villas is 2 times, the trophy lottery table referred to when the number of consecutive villas is 5 is less than 50%. (For example, 25%) may be set. Further, for example, in the trophy lottery table that is referred to when the number of consecutive holidays is 5, the range of the number of values assigned to the area shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. The range may be expanded.

According to this aspect, it is possible to provide the player with a setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value, as a privilege to continue winning the advantageous period and to win a large number of big hits (small hit V and symbol big hits), which makes the game interesting. It can be further enhanced.

A second modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500 suggests a normal effect (gase effect) to be set according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period when the special game in the advantageous period ends. The probability of displaying the trophy image 616 as one of the effects may be increased. For example, the effect determination means 303 has a higher probability as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period becomes higher, or when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period becomes a predetermined value or more, the number of executions is a predetermined value. The trophy image 616 may be displayed on the special game end screen 610 with a higher probability than when it is less than.

FIG. 63 shows an example of a modified trophy lottery table. 61. The trophy lottery table of FIG. 61 is related to the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, and is referred to by the effect determination means 303 when the number of consecutive holidays increases (here, the number of consecutive holidays is 5). In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the area of the copper trophy in the case of setting 2, the area of the copper trophy and the silver trophy in the case of setting 3, the area of the copper trophy to the gold trophy in the case of setting 4, the copper in the case of setting 5 The trophy-gold trophy area, the copper trophy-gold trophy area and the rainbow trophy area in the case of setting 6 are areas that are suggested for setting. The area of the giraffe pattern trophy other than the case of setting 5 is an area where it becomes a guse (in other words, a normal effect). In the case of setting 5, the area of the giraffe trophy is the area in which it is not known whether the setting is suggested or not.

In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 is higher than that in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61 (when the number of consecutive holidays is 2). The appearance rate of the trophy image 616 is the probability of displaying the trophy image 616 which may be a setting but may be a setting suggestion. For example, the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the lottery table of FIG. 61 is 20%, but the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the lottery table of FIG. 63 is 30%. Specifically, in the lottery table of FIG. 63, the number range of no trophies (ID0) is reduced to 7,000, and the number range of selecting any trophy is increased to 3000 in the lottery table of FIG. There is.

According to the configuration of the second modified example, as a privilege for continuing the advantageous period and winning a large number of big hits (small hit V and pattern big hit), the trophy image 616 is used frequently (normal effect or setting suggestion effect). Can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

A third modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is in the advantageous period when the special game in the advantageous period ends and when either the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect is executed. According to the number of times the special game is executed, it is configured to increase the probability of selectively executing the setting suggestion effect (in other words, to reduce the ratio at which the normal effect, that is, “gase” effect is executed). Good. For example, the effect determination means 303 has a higher probability as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period increases, or when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period becomes a predetermined value or more, the number of executions is a predetermined value. The trophy image 616 may be displayed in a manner as a setting suggestive effect with a higher probability than in the case of less than. In the example of five consecutive holiday games in FIG. 63, the ratio of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect, which will cause some trophy image 616 to be displayed, is approximately normal effect: setting suggestion effect=1 (33%): 2 (67%). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the ratio of the setting suggestive effect is larger than the ratio shown in the example in the case of the two-story house, the normal effect: the setting suggestive effect=1:1.

In this modification as well, the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63 is referred to. In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 is higher than that of the lottery table of FIG. 61 (when the number of consecutive holidays is 2), and the appearance rate of the setting suggestive effect is higher. .. The appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61 is 20%, but the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63 is 30%.

Further, in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, the gasse ratio (probability of execution of normal effect) when the trophy image 616 is displayed is 50%, but in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the trophy image 616 is displayed. In this case, the gasse ratio is 33%. In other words, in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, when the trophy image 616 is displayed, the probability that it corresponds to the setting suggestion is 67%. For example, in the case of setting 4, the number range 1000 is assigned to the giraffe pattern trophy as the normal effect, and the number range 2000 (total) is assigned to the copper trophy to the gold trophy as the setting suggestion effect.

According to the configuration of the third modified example, the player can be provided with a setting suggestion effect by the trophy image 616 at a high frequency, as a privilege for continuing the advantageous period and winning a lot of big hits (small hit V and symbol big hit). , The interest of the game can be further enhanced.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, since the advantageous period is set as the “long-sleeved holiday period”, the advantageous period may end without being able to obtain the special game. Therefore, the number of times special games are obtained during the “long-stable holiday period” increases. As a result, the number of special game trials during the advantageous period decreases in inverse proportion. Therefore, in the lottery under a situation where the number of trials can be reduced, the trophy image 616 is made easier to appear as in the second modification and the third modification, or the ratio at which the trophy image 616 appears as a setting suggestion is increased ( It can be said that it is a method that can be configured to reward the player for achieving a more difficult condition by increasing the reliability).

A fourth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the special game in the advantageous period ends, according to the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period, the setting value suggested in the setting suggestion effect The width may be narrowed. For example, the effect determination unit 303 may determine with high probability that the trophy image 616 is displayed in a mode in which the width of the suggested setting is relatively narrower as the number of times of execution of the special game in the advantageous period becomes higher. Alternatively, when the number of times of execution of the special game in the advantageous period reaches the predetermined number or more, the effect determination unit 303 causes the trophy image 616 to be displayed in a mode in which the width of the suggested setting is relatively narrow. It may be determined more frequently.

FIG. 64 shows an example of a modified trophy lottery table. The trophy lottery table of FIG. 61 is related to the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, and is referred to by the effect determination means 303 when the number of consecutive holidays increases (here, the number of consecutive holidays is four). In the lottery table in the same figure, the numbers are set such that the trophy appearance rate is 27% and the gasse ratio (appearance rate of the normal effect) is 35%.

In the trophy lottery table for each number of consecutive holidays in the fourth modified example, the enumeration number is set for the trophy mode in which the set value (or set value range) to be suggested is a set value (or set value range) less than the normal effect. The range (selection probability) is set to 0. As described above, the normal effect is a bad effect in which the trophy image 616 of a color corresponding to the number of consecutive holidays is displayed. For example, in the lottery table of FIG. 64, in the area of the copper trophy (setting 2 or more suggesting) and the silver trophy (setting 3 or more suggesting) that are less than the gold trophy (setting 4 or more suggesting) corresponding to the number of consecutive holidays 4. On the other hand, the numerical range is set to 0.

As another aspect, in the trophy lottery table for each number of condominiums, the set value range to be suggested is a set value range to be suggested when the effect of the effect pattern that is the normal effect at the same timing is executed as the set suggestion effect. The numerical range may be set to 0 for a wider trophy aspect. In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 64, a copper trophy (setting 2) that is a setting suggesting effect that suggests a wider range of setting values than the gold trophy of the normal effect corresponding to the number of consecutive holidays 4 (in the case of setting suggesting effect, suggesting setting 4 or more). The numerical range is set to 0 for the above suggestions) and silver trophies (setting 3 or above). As a result, as shown in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, the maximum setting range to be the suggestion target is 5 (that is, the setting 2 to 6) when the number of the condominiums is 2 times, and the suggestion target is when the number of the condominiums is 4 times. The maximum setting range is narrowed down to 3 (that is, settings 4 to 6).

According to the configuration of the fourth modified example, by narrowing the suggestion range of the setting suggestion effect in accordance with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period, it is possible to accurately obtain the special game as a privilege to obtain many special games in the advantageous period. It is possible to provide a setting suggestion effect with a higher degree.

As yet another aspect, in addition to the size of the suggested setting value range, the concept of the degree of priority of the setting suggestion effect shown in the third embodiment is adopted, and the setting suggestion effect that can be executed as the normal effect at the same timing. The number range in the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect pattern having a priority lower than the priority of the effect pattern of the content may be set to 0. According to this aspect, the contents suggested to the player can be narrowed down to contents that are considered to have higher priority and be more useful. In the fourth modified example, the range to be suggested is narrowed (the setting suggestive effect suggesting a set value equal to or less than the set value when the normal effect is the set suggestion is not executed), but is completely implemented. The specification is not limited to the one that does not perform (numerical range is 0), and a specification that makes it difficult to appear by reducing the frequency of execution of these (for example, setting the numerical range to 10 or less) may be adopted.

A fifth modification will be described. In the above embodiment, when the special game ends as an advantageous period, the normal effect using the trophy image 616 and the setting suggestion effect are selectively executed. As a modified example, the effect determination means 303 normally uses the trophy image 616 in the end effect of the advantageous period when the specific game state (probably variable game state of the Pachinko gaming machine or time saving game state) ends as the advantageous period. The effect and the setting suggestion effect may be selectively executed. The end timing of the advantageous period may be the timing at which the time-saving (probability change) game state ends as a game state, or the change that the special figure 2 hold after the time-shortening ends becomes 0, and the four fluctuations of special figure 2 after the time-saving end. May be in the eyes. Further, in the case of a gaming machine with a probability variation, a special jackpot special game without a probability transition may be completed.

In the fifth modified example, the effect determination means 303, as shown in FIG. 60, on the effect screen displayed at the end of the advantageous period, the number of big hits (small win V+symbol big hit) that has been obtained up to that point in the advantageous period. The result image 614 indicating the number of prize balls may be displayed, and the trophy image 616 as the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect may be displayed. The fifth modified example is different from the fourth example in the timing of displaying the trophy image 616 as the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect, and can of course be combined with other modified examples related to the fourth example.

A sixth modification will be described. In the above embodiment, when the special game is finished during the advantageous period, lottery is performed in the trophy lottery table according to the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period, and the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 are selected. Executed As a modified example, the effect determination means 303 is executed on condition that the special game has been acquired when the remaining number of games in the advantageous period (specific game state) is within a predetermined section (in other words, within a value range). As the effect, whether or not the trophy lottery table is used and the type are changed according to which section the special game is won, and the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 are selectively executed. Good. The effect executed on condition that the special game is acquired may be an effect before the transition to the special game, a special game start demo, a special game end demo, or an effect after the special game ends.

As another aspect, the effect determination means 303 is executed on condition that the special game has been acquired when the cumulative number of symbol fluctuations executed in the advantageous period (in other words, the cumulative number of games) is within a predetermined section. As the effect, a normal effect using the trophy image 616 and a setting suggestion effect may be selectively executed. As yet another aspect, the effect determination means 303 determines that the special game has been acquired when the cumulative number of symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the previous special game (in other words, the number of elapsed games) is within a predetermined section. As an effect executed as a condition, a normal effect using the trophy image 616 and a setting suggestion effect may be selectively executed. As in the sixth modified example, the condition that the special game is won in a situation where the number of remaining games in the advantageous period is small and the situation where the total number of games in the advantageous period is large is set by obtaining the special game in the situation. The number of trials for performing the suggestion production execution lottery decreases compared to the situation up to the situation, so it is difficult to obtain a special game, that is, to perform the setting suggestion production execution lottery. It can be said that it is a condition. In this way, when the difficulty in achieving the condition for receiving the lottery for setting suggestion production is high, it is possible to receive the lottery for setting suggestion production, or by performing the setting suggestion production with higher reliability, The interest of the game in the specific game state, which is an advantageous period, can be enhanced.

A seventh modification will be described. As described in part in the fourth embodiment or the modified example described above, the effect determination unit 303 determines that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous period, in other words, the number of special game acquisitions in one or one consecutive advantageous period is a predetermined value. The setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the above cases. For example, the effect determination unit 303 may execute the setting suggestion effect by displaying the trophy image 616 inconsistent in the number of consecutive holidays, as in the embodiment. In addition, regarding the display of the trophy image 616 as the setting suggestion effect, the effect determination means 303, other than the situation such as the display based on the number of consecutive games, the execution of the special game in the specific section, and the like, one or one consecutive advantageous period. The setting suggestion effect may be executed when the cumulative number of game values (for example, prize balls and medals) acquired therein is equal to or more than a predetermined amount, or when it belongs to a range of a predetermined amount divided in advance. For example, the effect determination means 303 displays the trophy image 616 that matches the cumulative number of game values as a normal effect with a predetermined first probability, and replaces the normal effect with a predetermined second probability. Then, a trophy image 616 that is inconsistent with the cumulative number of game values may be displayed as a setting suggestion effect.

In the seventh modified example, the effect determination means 303 may execute the following (1) to (3) alone or in combination as the difficult condition is achieved. (1) The effect determination unit 303 may increase the reliability of the setting suggestion effect, in other words, by decreasing the ratio of the false effect (the effect that suggests false content or the normal effect of the embodiment) with the authenticity ratio. Good. Further, (2) the effect determining unit 303 may narrow down the set value range suggested by the setting suggesting effect, in other words, even if the setting suggesting effect having a narrow suggested setting value range is displayed with high probability. Good. Further, (3) the effect determination means 303 may increase the winning percentage of the lottery that determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. In other words, the lottery table (here, the trophy lottery table as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64) referred to by the effect determination means 303 has a higher probability of setting suggestion effect as the difficult condition is achieved. May be configured to run in.

In this modified example, in the trophy lottery table having three consecutive holidays (or three to five consecutive holidays), the total execution probability of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect (in other words, the display probability of the trophy image 616) is 10. On the other hand, in the trophy lottery table in which the number of consecutive holidays is 6 or more, the total execution probability of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be set to 20%. Further, in the trophy lottery table with 3 times of the number of consecutive games (or 3 to 5 times of the number of consecutive games), the distribution ratio between the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect is set to 50%:50%, while the number of times of the consecutive games is 6 times. In the above trophy lottery table, the distribution ratio between the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be set to 35%:65%.

Further, in the trophy lottery table with the number of consecutive holidays 3 times (or the number of consecutive holidays 3-5 times), the image A suggesting setting 2 or more (that is, 5 types of setting 2-6) has a relatively high probability. It may be set to be selected. For example, it may be set so as to be selected with a higher probability than the selection probability of the image A in the trophy lottery table in which the number of consecutive holidays is 6 or more. On the other hand, the trophy lottery table with the number of consecutive games of 6 or more may be set so that the image B indicating the setting 5 or more (that is, two types of setting 5 or 6) is selected with a relatively high probability. . For example, the selection may be performed with a higher probability than the selection probability of the image B in the trophy lottery table with three consecutive games.

In addition, as a difficult condition to achieve, the effect determination means 303 executes the above single (1) to (3) alone or in combination when the remaining advantageous period is small or when the remaining advantageous period is equal to or less than a predetermined value. You may. This aspect is particularly suitable for a machine with multiple changes in probability change (so-called ST machine). In addition, as the difficult-to-achieve condition, the effect determining unit 303 uses the above (1) to (3) alone or in combination when the duration of the advantageous period is longer or when the duration of the advantageous period is equal to or more than a predetermined value. May be executed. This aspect is particularly suitable for a probability variation machine or a game machine with a falling specification until the next time.

As an exception to the configuration shown in the seventh modified example, when the big hit ends in a single shot, that is, in the specific game state after the first special game, the advantageous period can be obtained without re-acquiring the special game. When finished, the effect determination means 303 suggests a setting to win with a low probability at the end of the advantageous period (for example, the probability is lower than when a large number of jackpots occur a predetermined number of times or more in the advantageous period, for example, a probability of about 1%). The setting suggestion effect may be displayed using the production lottery table (trophy drawing table). In this case, the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect may be low, while the reliability may be high such as 95%. For example, in the trophy lottery table, the selection probability of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be set to 5%:95%. In this way, by adopting a configuration capable of executing the highly suggestive setting suggestion effect in the case of a disappointing result for the player such as a single-shot end, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Further, when the number of games in the advantageous section is set as the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect, for example, when the number of remaining games is uniform, an exception may be provided to improve the reliability and the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect. .

An eighth modified example will be described. The effect determination means 303 may change the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect according to the time information or the like output from the timing means 307. Hereinafter, lottery tables for setting suggestion effects, such as the pending change lottery table in the third embodiment and the trophy lottery table in the fourth embodiment, are collectively referred to as "setting suggestion lottery table". For example, the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in a specific time zone may be set to have a higher execution probability of the setting suggestion effect than the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in other time zones. The specific time period is in the morning, in the evening (for example, from 5 pm to 7 pm), and until the end of a predetermined number of fluctuations after the power is turned on, the Nth predetermined effect after the power is turned on (an effect including a setting suggestion pattern). (N is, for example, 2 to 3), or any combination thereof may be performed.

In addition, the setting suggestion lottery table referenced in a specific time zone is set to have a higher total execution probability of the normal production (gase production) and the setting suggestion production than the setting suggestion lottery table referenced in other time zones. May be done. For example, when the trophy image 616 is displayed as the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect, the appearance probability of the trophy image 616 in a specific time period may be increased. Further, the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in a specific time zone may be set to have a higher reliability of setting suggestion than the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in other time zones, in other words, the normal production ( The execution probability of (gase production) may be set low.

A ninth modification will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the probability of a small hit associated with a ball entering the second starting opening 12 is set to be higher than the probability of a small hit accompanying a ball entering the first starting opening 11, and when entering the second starting opening 12 at a shorter time. It may be a so-called "small hit rush" machine that has a game property that increases the number of balls that can be played by acquiring a large number of small hits associated with the ball. The effect determination means 303 in the small hit rush machine, when the number of consecutive small hits during the advantageous period (for example, during the probability change or shortening of time) reaches a predetermined number, or when the number of balls in the advantageous period reaches a certain amount. Alternatively, a contradiction setting suggesting effect may be displayed as a special notice effect (cut-in effect, etc.) during the normal game. As a result of increasing the game value (ball payout) during the advantageous period, it is possible to prevent the display opportunity of the setting suggestion effect from being lost only at the end of the special game.

For example, a game machine that displays the setting suggestion effect as the special game end effect when the cumulative total of the game values acquired in the advantageous period belongs to the range of 6000 to 6999 and the condition for executing the setting suggestion effect is satisfied (seventh embodiment). Consider a modified example. In this gaming machine, when a gaming value of 6000 to 6999 is obtained by winning a prize ball by a small hit during a normal game in an advantageous period, a special game is acquired at the location and the special game is finished. There may be a problem that the setting suggestion effect and the lottery for the setting suggestion effect which have been possible cannot be executed. According to the configuration of this modification, the setting suggestion effect can be displayed by a special notice effect (cut-in effect, etc.) even during the normal game, so that the above problem can be solved. In the case of the slot machine 1010, a period in which the ART and the special game are repeated is defined as an advantageous period, and when a certain number of medals acquired within the advantageous period are reached, a contradiction setting suggesting production as the special notice production described above. May be displayed.

As an example of the setting suggestion effect, when the condition that the number of game values acquired is 1000×N (N is an integer) is accumulated at a timing other than the execution of the special game during the advantageous period, the condition is satisfied, In the display of "○○○○ (numerical value of 1000×N) GET!", the content of displaying the images attached to the N character images is displayed as a normal effect, and when executing the setting suggestion effect, "○○○" is displayed. The content of displaying an image with M character images attached to the display of “GET!” is displayed as a setting suggestion (for example, suggesting a setting value M or more). Further, as the setting suggestion effect, not only the contradiction of the image (appearance) but also a mode in which voices and lamps that are simultaneously executed are combined in an inconsistent manner different from the normal one may be executed as the setting suggestion effect, for example, , Suggesting a set value (indicating a set value N or more) when the sound data reproduced when N character images are displayed is special sound data, not inconsistency in the number of characters. Any method may be adopted. It should be noted that such an example in which a mode in which the lamp and the audio data are inconsistent with the combination of the image data is used as the setting suggestion can be applied to the fourth embodiment and other modified examples.

A tenth modification will be described. In addition to the contradiction setting suggestion effect described in the fourth embodiment, the effect determination means 303 can display a setting suggestion effect (here, a situation inconsistent with the game state or a situation inconsistent with the game state) does not occur. It is also possible to execute the “matching setting suggestion effect”). The matching setting suggesting effect may be designed to have a higher appearance rate and a lower reliability (more crap) than the inconsistent setting suggesting effect. In addition, as an example of the matching setting suggestion effect, there is an effect example that suggests whether the set value is even or odd. The effect is an even-numbered suggestion and an odd-numbered suggestion that suggest even-numbered settings among the matching setting suggestive effects, depending on whether the set value is even or odd (whether the set value is 2, 4, 6, or 1, 3, 5). It is configured to change the appearance ratio with the odd number suggestive effect that suggests the setting. Further, only in the case of the setting 6, among the matching setting suggesting effects, the ratio of the appearance rate of the effect that is a ghost to the appearance rate of the true effect is 1:1 and in the setting 1 to 5, the matching setting suggesting effect is set. Of these, the ratio of the appearance rate of the effect that is apt to the appearance rate of the effect that is true may be 1:4.

An eleventh modification will be described. FIG. 65 shows an example of a modified special game end screen. The effect determination means 303, on the special game end screen 610, the character image 604 as a background image, the total number of jackpots obtained during the advantageous period (the number of consecutive holidays in one advantageous period, three times here), The total number of prize balls (3310pt in this case) and the title 618 (level 2 in this case) acquired during the advantageous period are displayed.

The effect determination means 303 displays the character images 604 of the number of people who match the number of consecutive games or the amount of coins, as a normal effect on the special game end screen 610. In this modification, as the normal effect, the character images 604 having the same number of people as the number of consecutive holidays are displayed. As another aspect, one character image 604 when the payout amount is 1000 to 1999pt, two character images 604 when the payout amount is 2000 to 2999pt, and three characters when the payout amount is 3000 to 3999pt. The image 604 may be displayed.

Further, the effect determination means 303 displays a title 618 having a content that matches the number of consecutive games or the amount of balls paid out as a normal effect on the special game end screen 610. In this modification, a title 618 indicating the same level (LV) as the number of consecutive holidays is displayed as a normal effect. As another aspect, a title 618 indicating level 1 when the payout amount is 1000 to 1999pt, a title 618 indicating level 2 when the payout amount is 2000 to 2999pt, and a level 3 when the payout amount is 3000 to 3999pt The title 618 may be displayed.

The effect determination means 303 has the first probability determined by the setting suggestion lottery table shown in FIG. 61 or the like, and as the setting suggestion effect on the special game end screen 610, the number of persons who do not match the number of consecutive games or the amount of balls paid out. The character image 604 is displayed. In the present modification, as the setting suggestion effect, the character images 604 of the number of persons different from the number of condominiums are displayed. For example, in FIG. 65, it is suggested that the setting is 2 or more by displaying the character images 604 of two people, even though the number of consecutive holidays is three.

The effect determination means 303 has the second probability determined by the setting suggestion lottery table shown in FIG. 61 or the like, and as the setting suggestion effect on the special game end screen 610, the content of inconsistency in the number of condominiums or the payout amount. The title 618 of is displayed. In the present modification, a title 618 indicating a level different from the number of condominiums is displayed as the setting suggestion effect. For example, in FIG. 65, it is suggested that the setting is 2 or more by displaying the title 618 indicating level 2 in spite of the fact that the number of consecutive holidays is 3. It is generally desirable that the level not be downgraded. Therefore, the effect determination unit 303 stores the level of the title 618 displayed in the previous normal effect and the setting suggestion effect, and when the level displayed as the new setting suggestion effect is less than the level previously displayed, the new setting is set. You may prohibit execution of suggestive production.

In the case of the slot machine 1010, the display content on the special game end screen 610 may be the character image 604, the number of big bonuses, the number of regular bonuses, and the cumulative number of medals acquired during the advantageous period (for example, ART period). In addition, the effect determination unit 1304 of the slot machine 1010 may execute an effect for adding the number of ART games (an effect for notifying the cumulative value of the added number), and at that time, at least one of the character image 604 and the title 618. You may perform the normal production or setting suggestion production using.

A twelfth modified example will be described. Although not mentioned in the fourth embodiment, the effect determination means 303 is similar to a special game end demonstration during a predetermined number of special map changes (for example, four special map 2 changes) immediately after the end of the special game. You may display the effect of what is done (herein referred to as "pseudo-demo effect"). The effect determination means 303 may execute the setting suggestion effect (for example, display of the trophy image 616) described in at least one of the embodiment and the modified example in the pseudo demonstration effect. If the first variation immediately after the end of the special game is a big hit or a small hit, the player may not be able to fully confirm the contents of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by a special notice such as a cut-in effect during the display of the celebration image after the end of the special game.

A thirteenth modification will be described. When the power is cut off during the extended holiday period, the information regarding the extended holiday number stored in the RAM of the sub-board 300 and the information about the acquired gaming value are erased (sub-reset). It may not be possible to execute. For example, when a setting suggestion lottery table corresponding to the number of consecutive holidays is provided, it is impossible to determine the table that should have been originally referred to when the information on the number of consecutive holidays is erased, and thus it is not possible to execute the lottery for setting suggestion production. Can happen. As described above, when the number of consecutive holidays is 5 or more, it is disadvantageous to the player to turn off the power in a situation where a high setting suggestion can be expected in a situation or when a lottery for execution of a highly reliable setting suggestion production can be received. Could be.

Therefore, when the game state when the power is restored corresponds to an advantageous period such as during a big hit or during an electric choo support game (time saving), the effect determination means 303 executes the next setting suggestion effect until the advantageous period ends. During a predetermined period such as lottery timing, the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect (winning probability) is higher than that of the normal setting suggestion lottery table. A special setting suggestion lottery table (for example, a table that is referred to only when the power is restored) is used for lottery. May be executed. Alternatively, the effect determination means 303, when the gaming state at the time of power restoration is in the advantageous period, increases the number of the areas in the normal setting suggestion lottery table in which the setting suggestion effect is to be executed by calculation ( For example, the number may be doubled) and a lottery for determining the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be executed.

A fourteenth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, as a general rule, a specific effect that can be executed only in a normal game in a normal state outside the advantageous period (herein referred to as "specific effect") is exceptionally displayed during the advantageous period. The setting may be suggested by performing the setting. For example, a plurality of types of variation effects that can be displayed during a normal game in a normal state (for example, reach production, referred to herein as “normal variation effects”) may be associated with a plurality of types of setting values in advance. When the variation pattern of the special symbol of the predetermined variation time is determined on the main board in the situation where the effect determination means 303 wins the setting suggestion lottery with a low probability of about 1% at the start of the variation during the time saving, The normal variation effect corresponding to the set value of the player's own device may be displayed. In this case, in the symbol fluctuation during the time saving, when the same effect (for example, the same reach) as the fluctuation in the normal state is developed, the setting is suggested.

The above-mentioned "same effect" means that motifs, stories, characters that appear, etc. are common, and the flow of effects may be different. For example, the content may be different until a predetermined timing after the reach is developed, but the same content may be the same after the predetermined timing after the reach is developed. In this way, the effect is partially modified, so that the effect scale is associated with different variable times that are selected during the time saving and during the normal game. In addition, the effect determination unit 303 may further display an object for setting suggestion such as the trophy image 616 of the embodiment while displaying the normal variation effect as the setting suggestion during the time saving.

In relation to the fourteenth modification, when the effect determination means 303 notifies that there is a high probability of a big hit or a small hit during a normal game in a normal state, the reach of the appearance of the first aspect that notifies the big hit or the small hit is reached. The production (here, the story reach production) may be displayed with a high probability. On the other hand, when the effect determination unit 303 notifies that there is a high probability of a big hit or a small hit during the electric power chute support (during time saving), the reach effect of the appearance of the second aspect that notifies the big hit or the small hit ( Here, the battle effect) may be displayed with high probability.

In this case, the effect determining unit 303 may display the reach effect (story reach effect) having the appearance of the first aspect with a low probability as the setting suggestion effect when notifying the big hit or the small hit during the electric-tube support. Good. In addition, the effect determination unit 303 may change the mode of the story reach effect displayed during the electronic tuner support according to the set value of the own device. For example, when the effect determination means 303 suggests an even set value (2, 4, 6), selects the story reach effect indicating the story A, and suggests an odd set value (1, 3, 5). , The story reach effect indicating the story B may be selected. Further, the effect determining unit 303 selects the story reach effect indicating the story C when suggesting a high setting (for example, setting 4 or higher), and selects the story reach effect indicating the story D when indicating the setting 6. Good.

In addition, the time scale of the story reach effect in the normal game in the normal state varies depending on the type, but during the electric Chu support, the special fluctuation pattern table during the predetermined period counting from the end of the previous special game, The production time of each change may be fixed. Therefore, even if the story reach effect displayed during the normal state and the story reach effect displayed during the Den Chu support show the same content, some content may differ due to the adjustment of the time scale. There is. In the above special variation pattern table, the selection probability may be determined as follows.
[Deviation] Shortening variation pattern 75%, normal notice miss pattern A 16%, normal notice miss pattern B 4%, reach development miss pattern with setting suggestion (for example, story reach that becomes miss) 5%.
[At the time of hit] Hit pattern A 30%, Hit pattern B 20%, Hit pattern C 20%, Setting suggestion Reach development 30% (e.g. hit story reach).

A fifteenth modified example (contradiction with game description explanation) will be described. In this modification, the setting suggests that the game content explained by the speech advance notice has a contradiction or an error, in other words, the setting suggestion that a game different from the game explained by the speech advance notice is executed. For example, if a certain change causes the character A to announce the dialogue, "If the dialogue NO24 hold changes to green, we can expect to develop into super reach! ”Is displayed, and after that, even if the change to green hold is made by the hold change effect, if the change related to green hold does not develop to super reach, the last single digit value of “serif NO24” is “4. May indicate a set value of 4 or more.

In this case, only when the set value is set to 4 or more, when the effect determination unit 303 receives the preliminary determination information about the hold that does not develop into the super reach, with the predetermined probability, the hold lamp image is displayed until the green hold. The scenario of the pending change effect to be changed may be determined, and the execution of the above-mentioned speech notice may be determined. Further, the effect determination means 303 may set the value of the last digit of "serif NO" so as to match the set value of the own device.

As another example, in a certain variation, a dialogue notice "character dialogue B" "serif NO32: If the same notice appears three times from the start of the variation to the third pseudo variation, it seems that the possibility of X reach development is high" is displayed. In the case of the change of, even if the same notice appears three times until the third pseudo change, if it does not develop to X reach, the last digit of "serif NO32" "2" is the set value 2 or more. May be suggested.

As yet another example, a button image is displayed with a certain notice of the dialogue of the character A, "A dialogue NO3 chance", and a new image or the like is displayed despite the button being pressed due to the variation. If it is disengaged without being pressed, or if an image showing disappointing contents is displayed due to the button pressing operation, the last digit “3” of “serif NO3” is set value 3 or more. It may be a suggestion.

In this case, the effect determination means 303 may determine the execution of the dialog notice and the display of the button image with a predetermined probability when the variation that does not develop into the super reach is started. The effect determination means 303 may set the lower one digit value of “serif NO” so as to match the set value of the own device. Note that the success pattern when the button operation is pressed is quasi-continuous fluctuation, development to super reach, or the like.

In the fifteenth modified example, a serif trailer that becomes a gratuitous setting is suggested, such as a serif trailer by the character X "Serif NO99 It seems that it is meaningful for the character A and the character B to lie...." It is desirable to have an effect that implicitly implys that it is connected to. Further, it is desirable that the content of the dialogue of the notice of the dialogue that becomes a nuisance at the time of producing the setting suggestion is not an assertion but an ambiguous expression such as "expected" or "probable". In the above example, the last digit of the serif NO is used as the setting suggestion information, but the difference between the value of ten digits and the value of one digit may be used as the setting suggestion information. In any case, it is desirable that the set value be suggested in some form in accordance with the image of the dialog notice.

(Fifth embodiment)
The pachinko game machine 500 of the fifth embodiment is based on the ball game machine described in the third embodiment. The basic structure on the front side, the basic structure on the back side, the functional configuration of the main board 200, and the functional configuration of the sub-board 300 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment are the same as those of the third embodiment ( 49, FIG. 2, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 11). The pachinko game machine 500 of the fifth embodiment may be based on the ball game machine described in the base technology, the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the difference from the ball game machine described in the third embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of common points will be omitted. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same or corresponding elements as the elements described in the base technology and the first to fourth embodiments. To do.

An outline of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment is equipped with a small hit development big hit, and the small hit probability is as high as 1/10. Therefore, in a situation where the small hit development big hit can be implemented, the hold control means Due to the presence of a further small hit hold in 240, a small hit development big hit may occur continuously in a short time (the subsequent small hit hold existing in the hold control means 240 is also referred to as “V stock”). . The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment is provided with four main features regarding production as main features. These features can be implemented as a single unit and can be combined in any manner, and can also be combined with the features described in the base technology and the first to fourth embodiments. .

An outline of the four features will be described.
Features 1. Right-handed notification:
There is a possibility that the small hit will be won with a high probability (for example, a probability of 1/10 or more). The small hit development big hit machine is, by its nature, a small number of fluctuations (in other words, big hit or small hit) Since the specifications are notified, it is important to pay attention to the winning notification effect in one change. Therefore, in recent years, with respect to a plurality of special symbol fluctuations in which a small hit can be won with a high probability, in the effect display device 60, the variable display of the decorative symbol 61 is shown as if it is a single variable effect of the decorative symbol. A method called "summary variation" is adopted. By performing "summary change", for example, 5 times of winning/decreasing judgments of winning a small hit with a probability of 1/10 (1 fluctuation and 4 holding fluctuations, 4 holdings are judged by pre-reading judgment. Is configured to be able to be performed as a “summary variation”, it is possible to perform an effect in which a small hit development big hit can be obtained with a probability of about 40% in one variation display. In this case, it is desirable not to let the player realize that it is a pseudo fluctuation in which a plurality of fluctuations are combined into one fluctuation. However, since there is a hold display, it may be a pseudo fluctuation. May be exposed.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, at the timing when the "summary variation" is executed in the easy-to-enter state, when the holding reaches the upper limit while using both the right-handing notification and the simple holding display. , Change the display mode of the right-handed notification so that the subsequent hold display is not performed (or the display is difficult to recognize as the hold display, or the display size is reduced to reduce the visibility). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the presence of the hold during a predetermined period including the easy-to-enter state, and the player can be delighted with the effect contents without being caught by the actual interval of fluctuation.

It should be noted that (1) the holding number is not displayed on the effect display device 60 in a recognizable manner, while the holding number is displayed by a means other than the effect display device 60 at a level at which the holding number cannot be recognized at a glance. Good. For example, a display device smaller than the effect display device 60 may be provided in the corner of the game board 80, and the display device may display the reserved numbers of the special maps 1 and 2. Alternatively, (2) the reserved number of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be indicated by a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking an LED (lamp or the like) different from the effect display device 60. As a result, the player who wants to confirm the reserved number can be notified of the reserved number.

Features 2. Display of small hits on hold:
After announcing a small hit in the hold as a look-ahead effect (after announcing as a change effect that there is a small hit in the hold of "Summary variation" described in Feature 1), it will come off before the actual small hit occurs. There is a possibility of pinching the fluctuation, and there is a possibility that the player who sees the deviation due to the special symbol display portion or the simple symbol may mistakenly recognize that there is no small hit. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment changes before the hold (hereinafter also referred to as "small hit hold") in which a small hit occurs after informing that there is a small hit in the hold as a prefetch effect. While digesting the hold (hereinafter also referred to as “off hold”) that is displayed, the object having the content that suggests that a small hit occurs is continuously displayed. This can prevent misidentification of the player.

Features 3. Description notice:
In recent years, game machines that are tie-ups with works such as dramas and animations have become widespread, but if the player does not know the background and characters of the work, the intention of the production is not transmitted to the player and the effect of the production is sufficient. There are times when it is not demonstrated. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment displays a notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “explanation notice”) that describes the content of the main effect. The explanation notice may include contents that explain one or more of the motif of the production, the world view of the work, the background, the theme, the story, the character, and the purpose.

Even when the main production is based on an original work that is not an existing work, an explanation notice explaining the motif, world view, characters, etc. of the work may be displayed. Further, even when the main effect is based on a theme having no story, such as bingo or roulette, an explanation notice for presenting information such as rules and purposes regarding the theme, trivia, etc. may be displayed.

However, the explanation notice is an effect that is not related to the expectation level of a big hit or a small hit (in other words, whether or not a big hit has occurred). Therefore, if the explanation notice frequently occurs, the player may feel annoyed. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment basically limits the lottery related to the execution of the explanation notice, assuming that the explanation notice is presented only once to one player. This allows the player to understand the motif of the production, the world view, the characters, etc., while avoiding the player's annoyance.

Features 4. Specific performance display with specific fluctuations in a specific period:
In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, in the normal state that is not the easy-to-enter state, the main game is the variation of the special figure 1, but the final figure of the special figure 2 in the chance production accompanying the normal symbol shown in FIG. 40. In the case of a change or the like, an effect according to a predetermined effect pattern is displayed. Thereby, the effect intended by the designer is presented to the player at the timing intended by the designer.

Hereinafter, the above four features will be sequentially described in detail.
First, the right-handed notification of the feature 1 and the small hit in-hold display of the feature 2 will be described.
The effect determination means 303 displays a special effect having a content that continues for a predetermined period including the easy entry state and one or more symbol changes. In the embodiment, the effect determination means 303 has a total of 5 fluctuations, one time saving and four holdings (special figure 2 holding) at the time of winning one time saving in the normal state (4R in FIG. 40 + first time winning of one time saving). Is displayed as one variation on the effect display device 60 as a “summary variation effect”, which is a chance effect (referred to as “hidden hide chance” here).

In addition, the game of one time saving in the state of easy entry of the ball means one game of variable display targeting the second special symbol 52, and the first special symbol in which the winning probability of the small hit is set low. When 51 is variably displayed, the easy entry state is not ended until the variably displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times).

And, in the "hide and seek chance" effect of the present embodiment, the effect display is started at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the variable display of one hour saving after the big hit is finished, as shown below. Performance display is executed.

66(a) to 66(c) show an example of the chance effect (common to hit and miss) in the fifth embodiment. The effect screen 700 of FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c) is displayed when the symbol changes once per hour. The effect screen 700 of FIG. 66A includes a hide-and-seek chance image 702, a first instruction object 704, a second instruction object 706, and a mini drawing 708. The hide-and-seek chance image 702 includes the action of the character. The mini-decorative design 708 plays a role of the decorative design 61, but is displayed with lower visibility than the normal decorative design 61. Specifically, the mini-decorative drawing 708 is displayed in a size smaller than the normal decorative design 61 and in the corner of the effect screen 700. The mini drawing 708 may be set to have high transparency and may be displayed in a semi-transparent state.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the embodiment has the small winning probability of the second special symbol set to a high probability (1/10), and the easy entry state is also the second special symbol. Since it ends when the variable display for the second time is displayed as a stop, it is important to enter the second starting opening 12 and save the special figure 2 hold during the time saving (easy to enter). .. Therefore, in the embodiment, as the first instruction object 704 and the second instruction object 706, two images are displayed that prompt the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the right, that is, the second starting opening 12. is there. The size of the second instruction object 706 is set larger than the size of the first instruction object 704.

The second instruction object 706 is divided into four areas. Until the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number (four in the fifth embodiment), the effect determination unit 303 sequentially changes the color from the area on the left of the second instruction object 706 each time the special figure 2 hold occurs. To go. For example, the second instruction object 706 in FIG. 66A indicates that there are two special figure 2 reservations. Further, when the time interval at which the two game balls are continuously fired is 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds, from the start to the completion of the color change of one area of the second instruction object 706. The time may also be set to 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds.

FIG. 66(b) shows the effect screen 700 displayed when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number (four in the fifth embodiment). The effect determination unit 303 does not change the content (for example, the shape, the text, etc.) of the first instruction object 704 even if the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number. This is because in the easy-to-enter state, the player is right-handed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number, the effect determination means 303 sets the content of the second instruction object 706 to indicate the hold number (since the special figure 2 hold has not reached the upper limit in the embodiment. From the content that suggests right-handing) to the content that does not suggest the number of holdings.

In FIG. 66B, as the above switching, the shape of the second pointing object 706 is switched from the right-pointing arrow to a square, and the instruction text is also simply switched to "ready". This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the display content of the hide-and-seek chances without being aware of the symbol variations made behind the display of the hide-and-seek chances.

FIG. 66C shows the effect screen 700 at the time of the winning branch. The hide-and-seek chance image 702 in the figure is a content for prompting the user to press the effect button 109 (or the cross key 110). When the predetermined time elapses from the start of variation and the timing of the winning branch is reached, the effect determination means 303 erases the second instruction object 706, while continuing to display the first instruction object 704.

As described above, when the pre-determination unit 235 of the main board 200 has entered the second starting opening 12, the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired upon the entrance of the entry is immediately started. Regardless of whether or not it is performed, the sub-board 300 is notified of pre-determination information regarding the result in the case where the success/failure determination is executed based on the second lottery value acquired with the entry. In other words, the pre-judgment means 235 determines whether or not the win/loss judgment based on the second lottery value acquired upon the entrance to the second starting opening 12 is a win (including a big hit and a small hit). The sub-board 300 is notified of pre-determination information indicating that the corresponding variation is a win. The effect determination means 303, based on the judgment result of the change related to the variation and the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of special figure 2 notified from the main board 200, the variation and the suspension of special figure 2 (maximum one time reduction). If there is a big hit or a small hit in (4 pieces), it is detected and the effect after the winning branch is distributed.

67(a) to 67(c) show an example of a chance effect (missing) in the fifth embodiment. 67(a) is an effect screen 700 following FIG. 66(c) (that is, the winning/branching screen), and shows an effect screen 700 indicating a disconnection. That is, the effect screen 700 that is displayed when there is no small hit or big hit in both the one-time saving pattern change and the special figure 2 hold. As shown in FIG. 67( b ), the effect determination unit 303, when the fluctuation is stopped once for one hour, as shown in FIG. 67( b ), an effect screen 700 including a hide-and-seek chance image 702 for notifying the end of the hide-and-seek chance and a mini-decoration 708 in the disengagement stop mode. Is displayed.

After that, the second variation pattern determination unit 232 of the main board 200 selects the ultra-short variation pattern (0.5 seconds) for disconnection until the suspension immediately before the final suspension in FIG. The effect determination means 303 maintains the hide-and-seek chance image 702 of FIG. 67(b) until the hold immediately before the final hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted. At the same time, the effect determination means 303 repeats the ultra-shortening variation of the mini drawing 708 and the stop in the disengagement mode.

When the final suspension of the special figure 2 stops changing, as shown in FIG. 67(c), the effect determination means 303 stops the decorative pattern 61 of a size larger than the mini-apparatus 708 on the effect screen 700 in a detached manner. In this way, from the one time-saving change to the final change of the special map 2 pending, (1) the mini packaging 708 is displayed in a mode in which the visibility is relatively low, and (2) the visibility is relatively changed in the final change. A high decorative pattern 61 is displayed on (3) By changing the content of the second instruction object 706, it is possible for the player to make one change from the one change in time saving to the final change in the suspension of special map 2. It becomes easy to feel.

68(a) to 68(c) show an example of the chance effect (hit) in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68(a) is an effect screen 700 following FIG. 66(c) (that is, a winning/branching screen), and shows an effect screen 700 indicating a hit. That is, the effect screen 700 is displayed when there is a small hit or a big hit in either one of the hourly reduction and the special figure 2 hold. Here, it is assumed that there is a small hit or a big hit in the special figure 2 hold. As shown in FIG. 68( b ), the effect determining unit 303, when the fluctuation is stopped once per hour, as shown in FIG. 68( b ), shows a hide-and-seek chance image 702 in a mode of notifying the success of the hide-and-seek chance (for example, that a specific character to be found has been found). Then, the effect screen 700 including the mini attachment 708 in the disengagement stop mode is displayed.

After that, the second variation pattern determining unit 232 of the main board 200 selects the ultra-short variation pattern (0.5 seconds) for the detachment until the suspension immediately before the special figure 2 suspension which is a hit. The effect determination unit 303 maintains the hide-and-seek chance image 702 of FIG. 68(b) until the hold immediately before the special figure 2 hold which is a hit is exhausted. At the same time, the effect determination means 303 repeats the ultra-shortening variation of the mini drawing 708 and the stop in the disengagement mode. When the variation of the special figure 2 hold which is a hit is stopped, as shown in FIG. 68(c), the effect determination means 303 stops the decorative symbol 61 in the hit mode on the effect screen 700.

As shown in FIG. 68(a) and FIG. 68(b), the effect determination means 303 holds the lottery value for which the preliminary determination information (here, the preliminary determination information for holding the special figure 2) is a small hit or a big hit. In the case of showing that it is, the effect suggesting the transition to the advantageous state is displayed before the symbol variation based on the lottery value which is a small hit or a big hit is started. In the figure, a hide-and-seek chance image 702 including a rabbit giving a peace sign is displayed.

The effect determination means 303 is a predetermined value that suggests a transition to an advantageous state while a symbol (here, special figure 2) based on the lottery value that is held before the lottery value that is a small hit or a big hit is displayed in a variable manner. The object (hit suggestion image 710) is continuously displayed. In FIG. 68(b), the effect determination means 303 displays the hide-and-seek chance image 702 including the rabbit giving the peace sign, and also displays the hit suggestion image 710 to precede the special figure 2 hold, which is a big hit or a small hit. The display of the hit suggestion image 710 is maintained during the variable display of the suspended special figure 2 suspension. In addition, the effect determination means 303 displays the hit suggestion image 710, that is, the character string of “Rush acquisition” in the same manner while the remaining hold that is held before the hold that is the small hit or the big hit is being exhausted.

In the fifth embodiment, the hit suggestion image 710 is displayed in the vicinity of the mini drawing 708. Thereby, even if the mini drawing 708 is stopped in the disengaged state, it is possible to suggest to the player that a big hit or a small hit will occur in the future. Further, the variation display of the mini-diagram 708 continues while the hit suggestion image 710 is displayed, but the effect determination means 303 changes the combination of the three numbers in the mini-diagram 708 as the variation of the small hit or the big hit gets closer. You may approach the form which shows a hit. For example, the stop mode of the mini-diagram 708 may be changed in the order of the absence of tempai, the presence of tempai, and the hit over a plurality of ultra-shortening fluctuations of holding special figure 2.

69(a) to 69(c) show an example of the chance effect (per revival) in the fifth embodiment. The display of the winning/failing result after the winning/falling branch (FIG. 67(a), FIG. 68(a)) is performed during one fluctuation of the hour/hour, but the second starting opening 12 is opened (in the embodiment, a plurality of short times are shortened). The easy-to-enter state, in which the opening is easy, continues until the change of one hour is shortened and the second special symbol 52 is stopped and displayed. The stop display time (symbol fixed time) of the second special symbol 52 of one time reduction is stopped even if the second starting opening 12 is in the open state at the timing before the stop display of the second special symbol 52. It is defined to be closed during the display time. Therefore, a predetermined timing after the hide-and-seek chance change effect is started (before the first chance-up effect that suggests that the chances of winning a small hit or a big hit are increasing, or after a winning branch) When the special hit 2 hold of big hit or small hit occurs after the display of the hit result or the like), it is difficult to replace the content of the hide-and-seek chance effect, and therefore the effect determination means 303 displays the effect of revival hit. In addition, even if there is a big hit or a small hit in one of the symbol fluctuation and the special figure 2 hold before the winning branch, the effect determination means 303 displays the effect of the revival hit with a predetermined probability. May be.

The display of the winning/failing result after the winning/falling branch shown in FIG. 69(a) and the variable display before the hit hold shown in FIG. 69(b) are the same as those at the time of deviation (FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b)). Is. In the case of a revival hit, as shown in FIG. 69(c), the effect determination means 303 stops the decorative symbol 61 in a hit mode when the variation of the special figure 2 hold, which is a hit, is stopped. In this case, the display of the winning/losing result after the winning/jumping branch and the variation display before the hit hold are the same as those at the time of miss, and the display mode of the hide-and-seek chance image 702 at the time of the hit hold change is also the same as that at the time of miss. Since a big hit or a small hit occurs, the player can have an unexpected feeling, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that, as a modification, in the case of a revival hit, if the display of the winning/losing result after the winning/branching suggests a deviation, the effect content different from that at the time of the deviation may be used.

A modification of the features 1 and 2 will be described.
A first modification will be described. In the above-described embodiment, when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit during the symbol change of one hour reduction, the second instruction object 706 is switched to the content that does not suggest the number of hold, specifically, the character string “ready”. It was decided to display. As a modified example, the effect determination means 303 may switch the second instruction object 706 to the content for explaining the game when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit during the symbol change of one time reduction. The game description may be a content that indicates to the player that the hide-and-seek chance is a success condition, and that, for example, the player will win if a specific character is found.

A second modification will be described. Although related to the first modified example, the effect determination means 303, when the predetermined time has elapsed without reaching the upper limit number of the special figure 2 hold during the symbol fluctuation of one time saving, (for example, the winning shown in FIG. 66(c)). When the timing of branching is reached), the second instruction object 706 may be switched to the content for explaining the game.

A third modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above-described embodiment, the effect determination means 303 is an image showing the number of special figure 2 reservations while the special figure 2 reservation is not reaching the upper limit number during the symbol variation of one hour reduction (the "holding image"). May be displayed on the effect screen 700. When the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number, the production determination means 303 may delete the hold image and switch the mode of the second instruction object 706 to “ready”. You may switch to the game explanation.

A fourth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number during the symbol variation of one time reduction, a plurality of types of the second instruction object 706 may be set. However, neither type is a mode in which the reserved number is not suggested. For example, the character string “ready”, the character string “filled”, the game description 1, the game description 2, and the like may be included, and the size and color may be different for each type. Then, the selection probabilities of these plural types of modes may be set for each set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500. The effect determination means 303 may select any one of a plurality of types as a mode when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number with the selection probability according to the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500. Thereby, the change mode of the second instruction object 706 can be utilized for setting suggestion.

A fifth modification will be described. As described in the fourth modification, a plurality of types of the second instruction object 706 may be set when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number during the symbol variation of one time reduction. When the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number, the effect determination means 303 determines whether or not there is a small hit in the special figure 2 hold or the number of small hits in the special figure 2 hold, and the second instruction object 706 can be selected from among the plurality of types of modes. Either of them may be determined. The timing of changing the mode of the second instruction object 706 may be at the time of entering a hold that is a small hit (at the time when the small hit is pre-read based on the preliminary determination information), or when the maximum profit 2 hold has reached the upper limit. ..

For example, when it is indicated that the expectation that there is a small hit in the special figure 2 hold is relatively low, a mode in which “ready” is shown in white may be determined. In addition, when it is indicated that the expectation that there is a small hit in the special figure 2 hold is relatively high, a mode in which "ready" is shown in blue may be determined. Further, when it is definitely shown that there is one or more small hits in the special figure 2 hold, the mode in which "ready" is shown in red may be determined. Further, when it is definitely shown that there are two or more small hits in the special figure 2 hold, a mode in which "ready" is shown in gold may be determined.

A sixth modification will be described. The effect determination means 303 may notify the presence/absence of a small hit in the special figure 2 hold when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number during the symbol variation of one time reduction. For example, when the effect determination unit 303 normally changes the second instruction object 706 to an image indicating “ready”, if there is a small hit in the special figure reservation, the second instruction object 706 is given as a premium effect. May be changed to an image showing "RUSH" in a rainbow color. Since the presence/absence of a small hit is announced before the start of the winning/branching effect to be executed from now on, it is possible to realize an effect that the player suddenly hits, in other words, an effect that is surprising to the player.

A seventh modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, a plurality of types of the hit suggestion image 710 may be determined. For example, the size, color, and text may be different for each type. Then, the selection probabilities of these plural types of hit suggestion images 710 may be set for each set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500. The effect determination means 303 may select any one of a plurality of types of hit suggestion images 710 with a selection probability according to the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500. Thereby, the aspect of the hit suggestion image 710 can be utilized for setting suggestion.

An eighth modified example will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the hide-and-seek chance production is a big hit jackpot game (big hit) which is one time reduction (the easy entry state continues until one variation display of the second special symbol 52 ends) It is also possible to execute a part of the production (explanatory production such as "If you do a big hit!", etc.) from the final round which is the final round, the last two rounds, or the jackpot end demonstration production period.

In addition, the big hit variation of the first special symbol during the easy entry state (1 time reduction), the same effect as when the small or big hit is won at the first variation of the second special symbol during the easy entry state. The variation of the deviation of the first special symbol during the easy entry state (shorter variation of about 1 second) is displayed on the mini-diagram 708 while continuing to display the hide-and-seek chance explanation effect screen. Display only variable display.

Next, an explanation notice of feature 3 will be described.
The explanation notice in the fifth embodiment is a notice presentation of a content that introduces a character (that is, a character) who appears in the production. FIG. 70 shows an example of the effect screen related to the explanation effect. The effect screen 720 relating to the explanation effect includes a character image 722 and an introduction sentence 724 having a content for introducing the character. The explanation notice in the fifth example includes six characters and seven types of notices (hereinafter, also referred to as “individual notices”) that introduce a group formed by those characters. The character image 722 and the introduction sentence 724 of the seven types of individual notices are different from each other. The sub-board 300 stores in advance seven types of individual notice data.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the effect determination means 303 turns on a predetermined explanation execution flag in the memory, and shifts to a state in which an explanation notice that is a special effect can be displayed. The start conditions in the fifth embodiment are (1) the power is restored after the power is turned off, and (2) the game standby demo (a demo image when the variation in Toku-zu 1 or Toku-zu 2 is not performed for a predetermined time). Satisfied by any of the indications.

After the start condition is satisfied (that is, when the explanation execution flag is turned on), the effect determination unit 303 presets seven types of individual notices over a plurality of symbol variations based on a specific variation pattern. Display in order. In the fifth embodiment, seven types of individual announcements, specifically, character 1 description (ID=1), character 2 description (ID=2),..., Character 6 description (ID=6), group description (ID=7) is displayed in ascending order of ID.

The above-mentioned specific fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into reach and is out of alignment, and a so-called non-shortening fluctuation that can secure a certain amount of production fluctuation scale (easy to be selected when the number of holding is 3 or 4 shortening The fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is longer than fluctuation. After the start condition is satisfied, the effect determination means 303, whenever the main board 200 selects a variation pattern of non-shortening variation, together with the symbol variation according to the variation pattern, seven types of individual notices are continuously issued. Display it. That is, the effect determination means 303 sequentially displays the seven types of individual announcements during the seven non-shortening variation deviation display after the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the character 1 description (ID=1) is displayed when the first non-shortening variation gap variation pattern is selected, and the character 2 explanation (ID=2) is displayed when the second non-shortening variation gap variation pattern is selected. Is displayed. The effect determination unit 303 causes the group description (ID=7) to be displayed at the time of the seventh non-shortening variation deviation variation pattern selection, and ends the display of a series of explanation notices.

When the ending condition of the explanation notice is satisfied, in the embodiment, when the final individual notice (group explanation (ID=7)) is displayed, the effect determination unit 303 stores the contents in the memory until the start condition is satisfied again. The explanation notice is not displayed by turning off the explanation execution flag. When the explanation execution flag is off, the effect determination unit 303 does not select the explanation notice even if the main board 200 selects the variation pattern of non-shortening variation. When the above-mentioned start condition is satisfied again, the effect determination means 303 switches the explanation execution flag in the memory to ON again, and again shifts to the state where the explanation notice can be displayed. As a result, basically, the explanation notice can be shown only once for each player.

Further, the effect determination means 303, at least some of the other effects, after the transition to the state where the explanation notice can be displayed, until the predetermined ending condition of the explanation notice is satisfied, that is, while the explanation execution flag in the memory is on. Is not displayed. Some other effects whose display is prohibited include, for example, a notice effect such as a pre-read notice (such as a pending change). The variable effect of the decorative pattern 61 may be excluded from the display prohibited objects. As a result, a plurality of individual notices can be presented to the player within a relatively short time, the player's understanding of the tie-up work and the like can be deepened, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the fifth embodiment, the explanation notice is displayed when the variation pattern of non-shortening variation is selected. Therefore, if the explanation notice is not displayed when the power is restored (for example, a game immediately after the opening of the game store) or when returning from the game standby demo (for example, when the player is changed) (when an effect other than the explanation notice is displayed). Or, if another effect is displayed before the final individual notice is displayed, a situation other than the non-shortening variation can be expected. As a result, it is possible to realize a game performance that makes the player expect a big hit, a small hit, a reach, etc. without displaying the explanation notice that is supposed to be displayed. In other words, if there is a variation in which the game explanation is not made during execution of the explanation notice (that is, before the last individual notice is displayed), that variation means a variation pattern other than the non-shortening variation. It is possible to make a player have the expectation that the fluctuation is not a non-shortening fluctuation (that is, a chance).

A modification of the feature 3 will be described.
A first modification will be described. After the transition to the state where the explanation notice can be displayed, the effect determination means 303 does not display another notice until a predetermined ending condition of the explanation notice is satisfied, but an image showing this situation is displayed on the effect display device 60. May be displayed on the screen, or a voice indicating this situation may be output from the speaker 108. For example, the effect display device 60 may be caused to display a message such as “Before explanation is being given” or “Before explanation is being given and other notices are being suppressed”.

A second modification will be described. Instead of the start condition of the above embodiment or together with the start condition of the above embodiment, another start condition may be set. The different starting conditions may be the following three simple substances or an arbitrary combination. (1) A predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) from the big hit or the small hit has been changed. (2) The player is identified by the mobile cooperation system shown in FIG. 12, or the change of the player is detected. (3) The timekeeping means 307 has output predetermined time information. For example, it has been detected that a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, or that a predetermined time (date and time) has been detected.

A third modification will be described. Plural kinds of explanation notices may be provided, and the selection probabilities of these plural kinds of explanation notices may be set for each set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500. The production determination means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of explanation notices with a selection probability according to the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500 as an explanation notice displayed when the start condition is satisfied this time. You may. The plurality of types of explanatory notices may be displayed in different display orders. Further, the plurality of types of explanation notices may be different from each other in at least one individual notice form (contents of the character image 722, contents of the introduction sentence 724, size, display position, etc.). As a result, the mode of the explanation notice can be utilized for setting suggestion.

As a fourth modified example, a process when a big hit occurs in the middle of an explanation announcement will be described. As a first pattern, after executing a big hit game, a specific game based on a time saving or a probability change, and shifting to a normal state, the explanation notice may be restarted from the individual performance of the ID that follows the ID of the previously executed individual performance. For example, if a big hit occurs after executing the individual notice A (ID=1), the individual notice B (ID=2), and the individual notice C (ID=3), after returning to the normal state, the individual notice D (ID=4). ).

As a second pattern, after the big hit game, the specific game based on the time saving or the probability variation is executed and the normal state is entered, the explanation notice may be restarted from the ID of the previously executed individual effect. For example, if a big hit occurs after executing the individual notice A (ID=1), the individual notice B (ID=2), and the individual notice C (ID=3), after returning to the normal state, the individual notice C (ID=3). ).

As a third pattern, a big hit game, a specific game based on time saving or probability fluctuation may be executed, and after transitioning to a normal state, the explanation notice may be restarted from the ID of the first individual effect. For example, if a big hit occurs after executing the individual notice A (ID=1), the individual notice B (ID=2), and the individual notice C (ID=3), after returning to the normal state, the individual notice A (ID=1) ).

As a fifth modification, a process in the case of powering off due to an error will be described. After executing the explanation notice to the end, it may be necessary to turn off the power to cancel the error that occurred. In this case, it is desirable not to execute the explanation notice again after the power is restored. Therefore, the effect determination unit 303 does not have to reset the ID of the executed individual notice when the power is cut off while the error occurrence is detected in the sub-board 300 (for example, maintaining ID=7). May be). On the other hand, when the power is cut off in the state where no error is detected, the ID of the executed individual notice may be reset. This can prevent re-presentation of the explanation notice to the same player.

As a sixth modified example, on/off selection of an explanation announcement by the player will be described. The production determination means 303 displays a message such as "Do you want to continue the explanation notice? YES/NO" on the effect display device 60 at the time of the first execution of the individual notice, thereby allowing the player to execute the explanation notice (whether or not to continue). ) May be selected. The effect determination means 303 may continue the explanation notice (display the next individual notice) or interrupt the explanation notice according to the operation of the player who specifies whether or not to continue the explanation notice. According to this modification, even if the game standby demo occurs due to the player temporarily leaving the pachinko gaming machine 500, and the explanation advance notice is restarted for the same player, the player can make any selection. The explanation notice can be turned off by.

Next, a technique of displaying a specific effect with a specific change in a specific period of the characteristic 4 will be described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, a special effect is displayed as a variable effect with respect to the suspension (special figure 2 suspension) of the second lottery value acquired when the second starting opening 12 is entered. The period is fixed. The special effect includes a notice that a predetermined character (for example, character A) appears. The special effect period in the fifth embodiment is a variable period of four special figure 2 reservations (maximum) triggered by the normal symbol hit in the normal time shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 shows a flow of special effects in the first section of the special effects period. The first section is the special figure 2 hold caused by the entry into the second starting port 12 triggered by the normal symbol hit in the normal state, the state where two special figure 2 holds are accumulated from the state where four special figure 2 holds are accumulated. This is the fluctuation period of Toku-zu 2 which is started during the period. In other words, the first section is a variable period corresponding to other than the final hold of the special figure 2 hold. As shown in FIG. 71 (similarly to FIG. 72 described later), the winning notification is completed for each change in the special effect during the special effect period.

The present notice in FIG. 71 is a content for prompting the player to operate the effect button 109. When the production button 109 is pressed, the production determination means 303 refers to the notice determination table for the first section of the special production period and selects one of the character A serif notice, the character A search notice, the memory notice, and the patrol notice. Select or display. The notice determination table for the first section defines selection criteria of a plurality of effect patterns for executing any one of the character A serif notice, the character A search notice, the memory notice, and the patrol notice. For example, in the notice determination table for the first section, the selection probability of each of the effect pattern including the character A serif notice, the effect pattern including the character A search notice, and the effect pattern including the memory notice is set to 30%, while the patrol notice is issued. The selection probability of the included effect pattern may be set to 10%.

As shown in FIG. 71, when the character A serif advance notice, the character A search advance notice, and the memory advance notice are displayed, the tempo twisting image is displayed, and then the SP development advance notice (super reach) or gaze (outside image) is performed. On the other hand, when the patrol lamp notice or the character A notice notice is displayed, the SP advance notice or the gaze is directly executed.

The patrol notice is a notice that the character A with the patrol on his/her head appears, and is a one-prompt type notice that a big hit or a small hit is confirmed when the patrol lamp lights up within the notice. When the variation of the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, the effect determination means 303 selects an effect pattern that includes a patrol lamp advance notice that the patrol lamp lights up and proceeds to the SP development advance notice after the patrol lamp advance notice. When the fluctuation of special figure 2 is out of bounds (not including the small hit), the performance determination unit 303 selects a performance pattern including a warning of the patrol lamp not lighting the patrol lamp and displaying gasse after the warning of the patrol lamp.

If the operation of the effect button 109 is not input in response to the present notice, the effect determining unit 303 selects the effect pattern including the character A notice announcement with a predetermined probability. The character A notice notice is a one-shot notice type notice like the patrol notice. For example, as the notice determination table for the first section, the selection probability of the effect pattern when the button is not pressed during the present notice is as follows: character A serif notice, character A search notice, memory notice, patrol lamp notice, character A notice The notice may be drawn by 20% each. Each effect pattern executed for the present notice has different execution probabilities when the button is pressed and when it is not pressed, and is determined as the result when the button is pressed during the effect lottery at the start of fluctuation and when it is not pressed. obtain. In this example, even if the character A serif advance notice, the character A search advance notice, the memory advance notice, the patrol notice notice, or the character A notice notice is executed, if you proceed to the SP development notice, in the subsequent hide-and-seek reach or hide-and-seek missions. The effect pattern is set so as to execute a notification regarding the possibility of a big hit or a small hit.

FIG. 72 shows a flow of special effects in the second section of the special effects period. The second section is a variable period of special figure 2 in which special figure 2 hold is started in a state of one, in other words, a variable period corresponding to the final hold of special figure 2 hold that has been accumulated with a normal symbol as a trigger. Is.

When the effect determination unit 303 determines that the second section of the special effect period has been reached, the special effect is referred to by referring to the second section notice determination table which is an effect determination criterion different from the first section notice determination table. Determines the effect pattern. The notice determination table for the second section is configured such that an effect pattern for executing the notice of patrol is always selected. That is, in the notice determination table for the second section, the selection probability of the effect pattern for executing the patrol notice is set to 100%.

When the variation of the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, the effect determination means 303 selects an effect pattern that includes a patrol lamp advance notice that the patrol lamp lights up and proceeds to the SP development advance notice after the patrol lamp advance notice. When the fluctuation of special figure 2 is out of bounds (not including the small hit), the performance determination unit 303 selects a performance pattern including a warning of the patrol lamp not lighting the patrol lamp and displaying gasse after the warning of the patrol lamp. In this way, a refreshing feeling upon hitting can be provided by always displaying the one-notification type patrol lamp notice at the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 during the special effect period.

In this embodiment, this is a condition for determining that the second section of the special effect period has been reached, in other words, the condition for using the notice determination table for the second section of the special effect period is as follows (1) (2). Both are to be met. (1) Toku-zu 2 The number of remaining holdings of Toku-zu 2 at the start of fluctuation is 0, that is, the last fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 reservation. (2) The fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation that starts this time (1 fluctuation before) is the special figure 2 fluctuation.

The effect determination means 303 may determine whether or not the condition (1) is satisfied based on the hold information and the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main board 200 (in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the embodiment, the fluctuation start command A command group including fluctuation pattern information for fluctuations and information on the number of holdings after the fluctuation starts is transmitted). Further, the effect determination means 303 stores the type of the special symbol of the variation target indicated by the symbol determination result included in the variation start command for one variation, and at the time of the next variation start, refers to the previously stored special symbol type. Therefore, it may be determined whether or not the condition (2) is satisfied. When both the condition (1) and the condition (2) are satisfied, the effect determination means 303 determines that the second section of the special effect period has been reached, and at least one of the condition (1) and the condition (2) is satisfied. If it is not performed, it is determined that the second section of the special effect period cannot be reached (that is, the first section).

Normally, when displaying a specific effect in the final fluctuation during the period during which the special figure 2 hold is temporarily stored, it is possible to give a patrol notice with the final fluctuation during the period during which the special figure 2 hold is exhausted even with condition (1) alone. Is. However, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is designed to execute a special effect when the special figure 2 hold changes that occur when the long opening hit of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is obtained in the normal state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 is not changed in the process of accumulating the special figure 2 hold, or the special figure 2 change due to the first piece of the special figure 2 hold is generated before the second piece of the special figure 2 hold is generated. There is a possibility of starting, and if the condition (1) is the only condition, there is a possibility that a patrol notice will always appear due to the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the special effect period. By providing the condition (2), even in such an irregular situation, the notice determination table for the second section is used in the first variation of the special diagram 2 in the special effect period in a manner different from the design intention. Can be avoided.

In order to give a specific notice in a specific change in a specific effect period, a special change pattern table used only in the effect period is provided, and the main board 200 selects a special change pattern ID. It is also conceivable that the 303 selects a special effect pattern (for example, selection of a special change pattern based on the change pattern mode described in the second embodiment). However, in the case of using the special variation pattern table to give a specific notice in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the variation pattern mode control is often based on the number of variations, a big hit, or a small hit, and the player does not intend this. If you play the game (for example, if you finish without holding four reserves at the end of the easy ball entry state, the normal starting of the electric accessory is 4 balls in the second start opening There is a possibility that a lottery intended by the designer cannot be performed at a timing intended by the designer, such as a deviation may occur when the player does not enter the ball). Therefore, as in the embodiment, the occurrence of a problem can be suppressed by determining whether or not the sub-board 300 is a specific change in the effect period in which the special effect is to be executed.

The merit of the configuration of the embodiment with respect to the use of the above-mentioned special variation pattern table will be summarized again. Characteristic 4 of the present embodiment is a technical idea in which a special effect is produced only by the final variation of the special figure 2 hold. Therefore, for example, if the special fluctuation pattern table is used for the fourth fluctuation after the long opening of the second starting opening 12 triggered by the normal symbol hit in the normal time, the special fluctuation pattern is normally special for the fourth fluctuation held. It is possible to perform various effects. However, the trigger for switching to the special variation pattern table (variation pattern mode setting timing) is limited to the control timing relating to special symbols such as the number of games, a big hit, and a small hit. Therefore, in order to perform a special effect at the expected timing using the special variation pattern table, the special time 2 game is held in the maximum state as the designer intends for the short time game (easy entry state) after a big hit. It is premised that four special figure 2 reservations are accumulated at the time of completion or normal symbol. However, due to a trouble such as a game ball not being shot or a player's intentional game operation, a situation may occur in which only 3 special figure 2 reservations are stored. In such a situation, since the fourth variation disappears from the suspension of the special figure 2, for example, the special variation pattern table is used in the case of the normal variation of the special figure 1, and the variation pattern for giving the patrol lamp advance is selected. There will be a gap such as being lost. In the embodiment, the sub-board 300 determines the display timing of the special effect, so that a specific notice is given by a specific change in a specific effect period, as the designer intends, without depending on the number of holdings. be able to.

A modification of the feature 4 will be described.
A first modification will be described. The fifth embodiment exemplifies a situation in which the patrol lamp advance notice, which is a specific advance notice, is displayed in the final change of the special view 2 in the normal state (the special change 2 change in which the special view 2 hold is 0). The technique described in the embodiment, that is, the technique of issuing a specific notice with a specific change in a specific effect period can be applied to other situations.

For example, the technique described in the fifth embodiment can be applied to the case of displaying a specific notice in the following situations (A) to (C). (A) The final fluctuation of the special figure 2 suspension remaining after the end of the easy entry state (after the main game shifts to the fluctuation of special figure 1). (B) First special map 2 fluctuation at the time of entry into the easy-to-enter state. (C) In parallel specs (specifications 1 and 2 change in parallel, for example, a gaming machine equipped with a small hit rush, etc.) Final fluctuation of special figure 2 after shifting to the production mode that mainly displays the fluctuation of 1.

In the case of displaying a specific notice in the situation of (A) or (C), for example, a special effect lottery table (corresponding to the notice determination table for the second section of the embodiment) in which the selection probability of the specific notice is 100% ) May be used.

In the case of the above-mentioned (A), the use condition of the special effect lottery table is (1) as in the embodiment, (1) that the number of holdings of special map 2 at the start of fluctuation of special map 2 is 0, and (2) start this time It is possible that both of the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation (one fluctuation before) and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 are satisfied. In the case of the above (B), for example, it is intended to obtain a big hit from the normal gaming state and to cause a special effect to appear in the first fluctuation when the easy-to-enter state is started. Regarding the above, with respect to the point that the change before 1 change is the change in Toku-zu 1, it is different from the embodiment. In a situation where the game is played on a pachinko game machine that employs the parallel game as described in (C) above, since there is a possibility that the variation display before the one variation on the main board 200 is the special figure 1, the sub-board 300 (effect determination) The means 303) displays the variation of the special symbol to be displayed as the main body (even if the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are changing in parallel after the short time drop, the change of the special figure 2 is displayed as the main body of the effect. As a case), the type of special drawing for which the variation effect was performed immediately before may be stored.

The cases where the conditions (1) and (2) are different will be summarized. When displaying a specific notice in the situation of (B) above, the usage conditions of the special effect lottery table may be that both of the following (1) and (2) are satisfied. That is, (1) the remaining pending number of the special map 2 at the start of the fluctuation of the special map 2 is 0 (similar to the embodiment), and (2) the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation to be started this time (before one fluctuation) is 1 variation (different from the example). When displaying a specific notice in the situation of (C), the usage conditions of the special effect lottery table may satisfy both of the following (1) and (2). That is, (1) the remaining pending number of special map 2 at the start of fluctuation of special map 2 is 0 (similar to the embodiment), and (2) fluctuation mainly displayed as a fluctuation effect immediately before the fluctuation to be started this time. (1 variation of decorative pattern before variation) is variation of special figure 2 (different from the embodiment).

A second modification will be described. In the above-described embodiment, the second condition for using the notice determination table for the second section is that the change immediately before the change to be started this time (one change before) is the special figure 2 change. As a modification, the second condition may be (condition 2'-1) that the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. The condition 2'-1 may be that the opening end command for the normal electric auditors product 90 is received from the main board 200. With this configuration, the use of the second section advance notice determination table is restricted during the period in which the normal electric accessory 90 is open, that is, during the period in which the hold according to Toku-zu 2 can be obtained. Even if the special figure 2 starts to change so that the number of reservations becomes 0 while the reservation is being reserved, the initial fluctuation during the period in which the player can reserve the special figure 2 is held. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the patrol notice from being decided.

In addition, the second condition is that the variation pattern of the variation immediately before (condition 2′-2) is a variation pattern ID capable of executing the chance effect (variation pattern ID that can be selected in the special effect period, and in FIG. Only) can be selected. When the condition 2'-2 is applied, the effect determination unit 303 may store a list of variation pattern IDs that can be selected during the special effect period.

The second condition may be that the change immediately before (condition 2'-3) is the change in Toku-zu 2 and the change in the normal state (non-ball entry easy state). When the condition 2′-3 is applied, the effect determination unit 303 determines that the variation effect pattern selected by the variation pattern received from the main board 200 is the pattern (ID) selected by the normal state special figure 2 variation. In some cases, it may be determined that the condition 2′-3 is satisfied. By doing in this way, for example, when there is only one suspension of the special figure 2 at the time of the final variation of the easy-to-enter state, the variation effect of the remaining suspension is not limited to one pattern, but rather the first variation. By using the advance notice determination table for the section, it is possible to achieve the intention of the designer who wants to configure so that a plurality of patterns can be displayed.

Further, the second condition may be that the change immediately before (condition 2'-4) is a special map change that is not a priority digestion target (in the case of the Pachinko gaming machine 500, a special map 1 change). The condition 2'-4 is particularly suitable for realizing a specific notice display at the first fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) of the special effect period. For example, in the so-called two-type mixed type gaming machine in which the ending condition of the easy-to-enter state is three types of the number of fluctuations of special figure 1, the number of fluctuations of special figure 2, and the number of fluctuations of special figure 1+special figure 2, This is suitable when the main board 200 displays the special effect at the special effect period or at the entrance (first fluctuation) in the easy entry state without referring to the special change pattern table.

A third modification will be described. In the pachinko game machine 500, when the special figure 1 hold does not exist after 4 fluctuations of the special figure 2 hold after the end of the easy-to-enter state, and the long open hit of the ordinary electric auditors 90 occurs in that situation, the special figure 2 The initial fluctuation of the reservation may satisfy both the conditions (1) and (2) described in the examples. In order to avoid this, as a modified example of the condition (2), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation immediately before the condition (2′-5) satisfies the fluctuation pattern ID capable of executing the special effect. (For example, it is determined that the variation pattern mode is not the special figure 2 variation pattern that can be selected in modes other than the variation pattern mode “7” in the second embodiment). Further, the determination may be made based on the result of the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol determined by the effect lottery on the side of the sub-board 300 based on the variation pattern (determined by the main board 200). The effect pattern ID is, for example, a variable effect pattern ID associated with an effect pattern including a mode that does not develop into SP reach by executing a character A serif advance notice, and develops into SP reach after executing a character A search notice. The variation effect pattern ID may be associated with the effect pattern including the aspect.

A fourth modification will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, in the notice lottery for the second section, the result of the present notice is always a patrol notice (selection rate 100%), but the patrol probability is high (for example, 90%). While it is configured to select with, other notices (character A dialogue notice or the like) may be selectable. In other words, such a modified example is configured so that the notice (such as the character A serif notice) that was determined with a high probability in the notice determination table for the first section is less likely to be determined in the notice determination table for the second section. It can be said that

Further, as a condition that a notice other than a notice of a patrol lamp appears in the notice lottery of the second section, the change pattern selected on the main board 200 is the change pattern selected in the special effect period, and the SP reach effect is executed. It may be limited to the case where the fluctuation pattern has a possible fluctuation time. With this configuration, a plurality of types of advance notice lottery may be executed in the second section on the condition of the main variation pattern. Further, in the case of such a configuration, it frequently occurs in a specific variation (the final variation in the special effect period in the present embodiment, the first variation in the easy-to-enter state in the modified example) that is the second section. When a notice other than the specific notice to be obtained (patrol lamp notice) appears, it is possible to make it possible to definitely notify that it is a change with a high degree of expectation (change with SP reach development).

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 and the modified example of the fifth embodiment, the final variation and the initial variation of the special effect period are set as the second section, but in the third section continuous with the second section, etc. The effect determination may be performed using the third section effect determination table (may be the same as the second section effect determination table). For example, with such a configuration, it is possible to continuously and frequently make the same type of notice appear with the variation one time before the final variation of the special effect period and the final variation. Alternatively, the presentation may be performed so as to increase the expectation by expressing the same type of advance notice stepping up over a plurality of fluctuations.

The present invention has been described above based on the fifth embodiment. It should be understood by those skilled in the art that the fifth embodiment is merely an example, and that various modifications can be made to the combination of each constituent element and each processing process, and such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention.

The "random number" referred to in the present specification or claims does not have to be a physical random number generated by a random number generation circuit or a true random number in a mathematical sense, and a hardware random number or random number generation using a 16-bit counter. It may be a pseudo random number such as a software random number using an algorithm. Alternatively, a combination of hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used, for example, a plus random number method in which the initial value is changed each time the counter makes one round.

In the present specification or claims, when referring to “table” or “criterion (selection criterion)”, a strict correspondence relationship between the first parameter such as a lottery value and the second parameter such as a value indicating a choice Not only refers to the data defined by the table structure, but also broadly includes the case where such correspondence is realized by the program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter. Including these, the concept is substantially synonymous with “table” and is appropriately referred to as “criterion (selection criterion)”. When a table structure is used, the selection criterion that is substantially one type may be configured by a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. Shows the number of substantial types of tables, not the number of tables that have been converted.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine that pays out a game ball (prize ball) as a profit based on entering a ball is illustrated. However, instead of paying out the prize ball, an electronic profit management system is used to launch the game ball. -It can also be applied to so-called enclosed-type pachinko machines that perform prize ball management. Such an enclosed type pachinko machine typically allows a predetermined number of game balls to circulate within the game machine and play with the circulating game balls, instead of paying out prize balls Profit the player by increasing the number of times. For example, a ball circulating means for receiving a game ball rolled in the game area, sending it to the game area without discharging it outside the game machine, and circulating the ball in the game machine; , And a number-of-balls management unit for managing the number of balls held, and a number-of-balls display unit for displaying the number of managed balls.

Any combination of the above-described examples and modifications is also useful as an embodiment of the present invention. The new embodiment resulting from the combination has the effects of the combined examples and modifications. It is also understood by those skilled in the art that the function that each constituent element described in the claims should fulfill is realized by the individual constituent elements shown in the embodiment and the modified examples or by their cooperation.

The techniques described in the above-described first embodiment and modification can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 1-1-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the winning/absence determination,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of doing, it is in a state advantageous to the player over the normal game, and special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of the special winning opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for deciding whether or not to operate the ball entrance variation mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operation opening,
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner showing a hit, operation control means for opening the entry variation mechanism,
As a game state relating to the easiness of entering the second starting opening in the normal game, the normal state and the easiness of entering the second starting opening at least when the winning probability of the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. Has a higher entry easier state than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy entry state. ,
Equipped with
The operation control means, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, a predetermined time that is defined as a time interval at which a plurality of game balls are fired, A ball-and-ball game machine that opens the filled-ball variation mechanism.

[Aspect 1-1-2]
The easy-to-ball-in state ends with the completion of one pattern change triggered by the ball entering the second starting opening,
The one symbol variation time triggered by the entry into the second starting opening in the easy-to-enter state is that at least the normal symbol hits twice or more when the operation lottery is continuously executed. The ball-playing machine according to aspect 1-1, which is set to be equal to or longer than a possible time.

[Aspect 1-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the winning/absence determination,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of doing, it is in a state advantageous to the player over the normal game, and special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of the special winning opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for deciding whether or not to operate the ball entrance variation mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operation opening,
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner showing a hit, operation control means for opening the entry variation mechanism,
As a game state relating to the easiness of entering the second starting opening in the normal game, the normal state and the easiness of entering the second starting opening at least when the winning probability of the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. Has a higher entry easier state than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy entry state. ,
Equipped with
The operation control means, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, a predetermined time that is defined as a time interval at which a plurality of game balls are fired, Open the fill ball variation mechanism,
When the opening time of the ball entry variation mechanism reaches the predetermined time, the operation control means determines whether the number of balls entered into the second starting opening is equal to or less than the upper limit value of the number of reserved second lottery values. A ball game machine for ending the opening of the entry variation mechanism when the number of pieces reaches the number.

[Aspect 1-3]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the winning/absence determination,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of doing, it is in a state advantageous to the player over the normal game, and special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of the special winning opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for deciding whether or not to operate the ball entrance variation mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operation opening,
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner showing a hit, operation control means for opening the entry variation mechanism,
As a game state relating to the easiness of entering the second starting opening in the normal game, the normal state and the easiness of entering the second starting opening at least when the winning probability of the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. Has a higher entry easier state than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy entry state. ,
Production control means for displaying production contents on a predetermined production display device,
Equipped with
The operation control means, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, a predetermined time that is defined as a time interval at which a plurality of game balls are fired, Open the fill ball variation mechanism,
The effect control means, in the normal game of the normal state, when the entrance variation mechanism is opened due to the predetermined hit of the normal symbol, the content of the content is urged to shoot the game ball aiming at the second starting opening. The special effect is displayed, and while the special effect is being displayed, the variable effect of the decorative design showing the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the ball entering the first starting opening is reduced and displayed.
In the normal game in the easy-to-enter state, the variation time of the special symbol indicating the result of the winning/disapproval determination based on the entry into the first starting opening is fixed to a time shorter than the average variation time in the normal game in the regular state. ,
The effect control means displays the special effect in the normal game in the easy-to-enter state, and during the display of the special effect, the variation of the decorative symbol indicating the result of the hit/miss determination based on the entry into the first starting opening. A ball-and-ball game machine that hides production.

[Aspect 1-4]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the winning/absence determination,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of doing, it is in a state advantageous to the player over the normal game, and special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of the special winning opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for deciding whether or not to operate the ball entrance variation mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operation opening,
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner showing a hit, operation control means for opening the entry variation mechanism,
As a game state relating to the easiness of entering the second starting opening in the normal game, the normal state and the easiness of entering the second starting opening at least when the winning probability of the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. Has a higher entry easier state than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy entry state. ,
Production control means for displaying production contents on a predetermined production display device,
Equipped with
The easy-to-ball-in state ends when the predetermined number of symbol variations triggered by the ball entering the second starting port are terminated,
The production control means is a ball game machine for displaying a special production of a content for urging the launch of a game ball aiming at the second starting opening during the final symbol variation in the easy-to-enter state.

[Aspect 1-5-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the winning/absence determination,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of doing, it is in a state advantageous to the player over the normal game, and special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of the special winning opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for deciding whether or not to operate the ball entrance variation mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operation opening,
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner showing a hit, operation control means for opening the entry variation mechanism,
As a game state relating to the easiness of entering the second starting opening in the normal game, the normal state and the easiness of entering the second starting opening at least when the winning probability of the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. Has a higher entry easier state than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy entry state. ,
Production control means for displaying production contents on a predetermined production display device,
Equipped with
The operation control means, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, a predetermined time that is defined as a time interval at which a plurality of game balls are fired, Open the fill ball variation mechanism,
The effect control means, in the normal game of the normal state, when the entrance variation mechanism is opened due to the predetermined hit of the normal symbol, the content of the content is urged to shoot the game ball aiming at the second starting opening. Display special effects,
The effect control means, the variation of the special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port, or the variation of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port is a predetermined standby demo transition time. If not, display a predetermined standby demo on the effect display device,
The holding control means, the ordinary drawing lottery value for the operation lottery acquired upon entry of the ball into the working opening, up to a predetermined number, the variable display of the ordinary symbol showing the result of the operation lottery Hold until start,
The standby demo transition time is a ball game machine set to be longer than the longest variation time of the ordinary symbol when the ordinary figure lottery value is held up to the upper limit.

[Aspect 1-5-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the winning/absence determination,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of doing, it is in a state advantageous to the player over the normal game, and special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of the special winning opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for deciding whether or not to operate the ball entrance variation mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operation opening,
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner showing a hit, operation control means for opening the entry variation mechanism,
As a game state relating to the easiness of entering the second starting opening in the normal game, the normal state and the easiness of entering the second starting opening at least when the winning probability of the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. Has a higher entry easier state than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy entry state. ,
Production control means for displaying production contents on a predetermined production display device,
Equipped with
The operation control means, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, a predetermined time that is defined as a time interval at which a plurality of game balls are fired, Open the fill ball variation mechanism,
The effect control means, in the normal game of the normal state, when the entrance variation mechanism is opened due to the predetermined hit of the normal symbol, the content of the content is urged to shoot the game ball aiming at the second starting opening. Display special effects,
The effect control means, the entry of the game ball into any of a plurality of winning openings or ball entrances provided in the game area, the predetermined standby demo transition time has not been detected, and the special symbol is If it is not changing, display a predetermined standby demo on the effect display device,
The holding control means, the ordinary drawing lottery value for the operation lottery acquired upon entry of the ball into the working opening, up to a predetermined number, the variable display of the ordinary symbol showing the result of the operation lottery Hold until start,
The standby demo transition time is a ball game machine set to be longer than the longest variation time of the ordinary symbol when the ordinary figure lottery value is held up to the upper limit.

[Aspect 1-6]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the winning/absence determination,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of doing, it is in a state advantageous to the player over the normal game, and special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of the special winning opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for deciding whether or not to operate the ball entrance variation mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operation opening,
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner showing a hit, operation control means for opening the entry variation mechanism,
As a game state relating to the easiness of entering the second starting opening in the normal game, the normal state and the easiness of entering the second starting opening at least when the winning probability of the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. Has a higher entry easier state than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy entry state. ,
Production control means for displaying production contents on a predetermined production display device,
Equipped with
The easy-to-ball-in state ends when the predetermined number of symbol variations triggered by the ball entering the second starting port are terminated,
The effect control unit ends as a result of the variation that triggers the end of the easy-to-enter state or the variation based on the second lottery value remaining in the holding control unit after the end of the easy-to-enter state. In this case, let the production display device display the production related to the hit balls so far,
When the special symbol indicating the result of the hit determination based on the ball entering the first starting opening is changing, the effect control unit displays the effect related to the payout in a mode having higher visibility than the changing effect. Ball game machine.

The techniques described in the above-described second embodiment and modification can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 2-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that is displaceable so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
A symbol display device that displays the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the hit/miss judgment,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by opening of the special winning opening, which is in a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game,
An opening and closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the special winning opening,
Equipped with
The special winning opening includes an opening/closing member for switching between an open state and a closed state of the special winning opening, and when the special winning opening is in a closed state, a game ball rolls on the opening/closing member,
Both the unit game in the special game and the small hit game are finished when the number of balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number,
The one-time opening time of the big winning opening in the small hit game is set to a short time in which a game ball rolling on the opening/closing member can enter the big winning opening,
The opening and closing control means is a ball game machine capable of repeating the short-time opening of the special winning opening a predetermined number of times or more in the small hit game.
According to this configuration, in the machine for developing small hits and jackpots, it is possible to secure a wide board surface area in which performance can be performed by using the same big winning hole for big hits and small hits, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of performance. it can. In addition, in a small hit game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball equivalent to one round during a big hit, and it is easy for the player to have a sufficient feeling of payout.

[Aspect 2-2-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that is displaceable so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
A symbol display device that displays the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the hit/miss judgment,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by opening of the special winning opening, which is in a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game,
An effect display device for displaying effects,
Production determination means for determining the production displayed on the production display device,
Equipped with
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the special winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game,
The effect determination means displays an image corresponding to the predetermined number during the small hitting game, and changes the image in response to a ball entering the special winning opening during the small hitting game.
According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player that a relatively large number of balls can be entered into the special winning opening (in other words, the possibility of winning a coin) during the small hit game on the machine equipped with the small hit development big hit game. It is possible to prompt the player to launch a small hit game.

[Aspect 2-2-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that is displaceable so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
A symbol display device that displays the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the hit/miss judgment,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by opening of the special winning opening, which is in a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game,
An effect display device for displaying effects,
Production determination means for determining the production displayed on the production display device,
Equipped with
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the special winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game,
The effect determination means, when the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, after the small hit game ends, depending on the type of the symbol indicating the small hit, Display any one of multiple types of suggestive effects that suggest the profits that the player can obtain,
The effect determination means, during the small hit game, displays an image showing the degree of expectation that high profit is suggested in the later suggested effect, and depending on the ball entering the big winning opening during the small hit game. A ball game machine that changes the image.
According to this configuration, in the small hit development big hit loading machine, since it is possible to identify the degree of expectation that high profit is suggested by the later suggestion production by entering the big winning opening during the small hit game, it is possible to identify to the player. It is possible to encourage the launch of a small hit game.

[Aspect 2-3]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that is displaceable so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
A symbol display device that displays the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the hit/miss judgment,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving the operation of a special electric auditors product and the opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. If it is, it is in a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game, and special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the operation of the special electric auditors and the opening of the special winning opening,
An effect display device for displaying effects,
Production determination means for determining the production displayed on the production display device,
Equipped with
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the special winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game,
When the game ball that has entered the special winning opening passes through the specific area during the small hit game, the effect determination means displays an effect to inform that, and from the small hit game to the special game. Display an image showing the cumulative number of times the special electric auditors have operated,
A ball-ball game machine in which the effect determination means displays an image indicating that the image is the first operation of the special electric auditors product as the image during the small hit game.
According to this configuration, an image showing the "first round" or the like is displayed even during the small hit game, that is, a series of count display is performed from the small hit game to the special game. As a result, it is possible to suggest that a ball equivalent to one round of the special game can be obtained in the small hit game, and the player can be urged to shoot during the small hit game.

[Aspect 2-4]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that is displaceable so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
A symbol display device that displays the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the hit/miss judgment,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by opening of the special winning opening, which is in a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game,
An effect display device for displaying effects,
Production determination means for determining the production displayed on the production display device,
Equipped with
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the special winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game,
Types of profits that can be obtained by a player regarding a special game executed when a game ball that has entered the special winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, and a normal condition after the special game ends. At least one of the types of profits that the player can obtain regarding the game differs depending on the type of the symbol indicating the small hit,
The effect determination means, when the game ball entered into the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, after the final opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game is completed, A ball-and-ball game machine that displays an effect suggesting the type of profit that the player can obtain according to the type of symbol indicating a small hit before the first opening of the special winning opening in the special game.
According to this configuration, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the specific area, by displaying the effect suggesting the kind of profit that the player can obtain according to the small hit pattern, the game ball in the small hit game It is possible to prevent the effect content from being inconsistent with the actual profit type when the character does not pass through the specific area. Further, in the small hitting game, vibration detection may be performed to prevent fraud, but according to the above configuration, since the suggestion effect is performed by deviating the timing of the vibration detection, the vibration such as the effect of pressing the button by the player is generated. It is also possible to make a suggestion of the mode in which it occurs.

[Aspect 2-5]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that is displaceable so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
A symbol display device that displays the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the hit/miss judgment,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by opening of the special winning opening, which is in a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game,
An effect display device for displaying effects,
Production determination means for determining the production displayed on the production display device,
When there is a ball entering the second starting opening, regardless of whether or not the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery value acquired upon the entry of the ball is immediately started, the entry is acquired upon the entry of the ball. When the result when the win/no determination based on the selected lottery value is a small hit, it is possible to notify the effect determination means of the advance judgment information indicating that the small hit occurs in the variation corresponding to the entry. Determination means,
Equipped with
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The effect determination means is a case where a game ball that has entered the special winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific region, and the advance determination information is that the lottery value for a small hit is 1 A ball-ball game machine capable of executing an effect for announcing the occurrence of a small hit one or more times before the special game ends and the normal game starts when it indicates that one or more are held.
With this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a high possibility that a large profit can be obtained by suggesting that the small hit development big hit can be additionally acquired in the small hit development big hit mounting machine. It is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The techniques described in the above-described third embodiment and modification can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 3-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination based on a lottery value acquired upon entry into the starting opening,
A symbol display device that variably displays symbols for showing the result of the hit/miss determination,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, special game control means for executing a special game which is a more advantageous state for the player than a normal game,
Setting changing means for changing to one of a plurality of settings which may have different game advantages,
Storage means for storing the set value set by the setting change means,
Effect control means capable of executing an advantageous notification effect that notifies the player that a transition to an advantageous state is scheduled,
Equipped with
In the special game, the effect control means can execute a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value stored in the storage means in the end demo, when the advantageous notification effect is executed before the end demo is started. However, if the advantageous notification effect is not executed before the start of the end demo, the ball game machine that limits the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the end demo.
Until now, setting suggestion production has not been common in ball game machines. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the ending demonstration of the special game, the setting suggestion effect is suggested or informed that the transition to an advantageous state (for example, a probability variation state or an on-hold holiday resort) is planned. There is a possibility that the player may mistakenly recognize that it does. According to the above ball game machine, since the setting suggestion effect is executed on condition that the advantageous notification effect has already been executed, it is easy to prevent the player from misidentifying the above, and the expectation of the player is impaired. It becomes easy to prevent that.
In addition, "to limit the execution of the setting suggestive effect" includes that it is not displayed at all on the effect, and that the displayability is significantly reduced. This includes canceling the effect lottery result that is the execution of the decided setting suggestion effect. The same applies to other aspects.

[Aspect 3-2]
A lottery means for executing a lottery to determine whether or not the player can shift from the normal game to the special game, which is advantageous to the player, in response to a predetermined game operation.
Special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result showing that the lottery means can shift to the special game,
Setting changing means for changing to one of a plurality of settings which may have different game advantages,
Storage means for storing the set value set by the setting change means,
Effect control means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value stored in the storage means,
Equipped with
The effect control means stores a plurality of setting suggestion effects and a plurality of priorities in association with each other, and after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority, the second priority lower than the first priority. A gaming machine that limits the execution of setting suggestive effects corresponding to priority.
According to this gaming machine, the interest in the game can be increased or the interest in the game can be prevented from deteriorating in accordance with the correspondence relationship between the type of setting suggestive effect and the priority. For example, a higher priority may be given to a setting suggestion effect having a narrower range of suggested setting values. In this case, the range of the set value suggested to the player by the setting suggestion effect is wider than the range of the set value suggested before that, thereby impairing the player's expectation (expectation that the set value can be specified). It is possible to prevent it. Further, a higher priority may be given to a setting suggestion effect having a higher suggesting setting value. In this case, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the player from being spoiled by the fact that the setting value suggested to the player by the setting suggestion effect becomes lower than the setting value previously suggested.

[Aspect 3-3]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that is displaceable so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
A symbol display device that displays the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the hit/miss judgment,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, the game ball entered in the big winning hole further passes through a specific area provided therein. In the case of, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by opening of the special winning opening, which is in a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game,
Setting changing means for changing to one of a plurality of settings which may have different game advantages,
Storage means for storing the set value set by the setting change means,
Effect control means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value stored in the storage means,
Equipped with
When the special game ends, the effect control means executes the end demonstration effect of the special game for a first time, and when the small hit game ends while the game ball does not pass through the specific region, the small hit The end demonstration of the hit game is executed for a second time shorter than the first time,
The effect control means can execute a setting suggestion effect in the special game end demonstration effect, but limits the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the small hit game end demonstration effect.
The small demonstration game finishes the demonstration effect execution time is short and it is difficult to secure the time for the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, in the demonstration of the end of the small hit game, by not performing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid the execution of the lottery process and the display process which have substantially no meaning.

[Aspect 3-4-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination based on a lottery value acquired upon entry into the starting opening,
A symbol display device that variably displays symbols for showing the result of the hit/miss determination,
The lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, a hold control means for holding until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, special game control means for executing a special game which is a more advantageous state for the player than a normal game,
Production control means for executing production,
When there is a ball entering the starting opening, regardless of whether or not the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery value acquired upon the entry is immediately started, it is acquired upon the entry of the ball. When the result when the win/no determination based on the lottery value is a big hit, a pre-judgment means capable of notifying the production control means of pre-judgment information indicating that a big hit will occur in a variation corresponding to the ball entered,
Setting changing means for changing to one of a plurality of settings which may have different game advantages,
Storage means for storing the set value set by the setting change means,
Equipped with
The effect control means, in accordance with the pre-determination information, suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game will occur in future symbol changes, a plurality of symbol changes until the future symbol changes Is feasible for
The suggestion effect is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes, and is designed such that the degree of expectation that a transition to the special game occurs depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect,
The expectation degree suggested by the production mode of the suggestive production in the later symbol variation among the plurality of symbol variations is equal to or higher than the expectation degree suggested by the production mode of the suggestive production in the previous symbol variation. Designed and
The probability that the suggestive effect will be a particular effect mode is different depending on the set value stored in the storage means.
According to this ball-playing machine, the specific effect mode in the suggestion effect by the hold-ahead look-ahead suggests the set value, so that the suggestive effect suggests a big hit and also suggests the set value. Can be presented to the player to further enhance the player's expectation and interest in the game.

[Aspect 3-4-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination based on a lottery value acquired upon entry into the starting opening,
A symbol display device that variably displays symbols for showing the result of the hit/miss determination,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, special game control means for executing a special game which is a more advantageous state for the player than a normal game,
Production control means capable of executing suggestive production that suggests the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game will occur in the present symbol variation,
Setting changing means for changing to one of a plurality of settings which may have different game advantages,
Storage means for storing the set value set by the setting change means,
Equipped with
The suggestion effect is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes, and is designed such that the degree of expectation of transition to the special game is different depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect,
The probability that the suggestive effect will be a particular effect mode is different depending on the set value stored in the storage means.
According to this ball game machine, it is possible to newly provide a game property for estimating the setting by the appearance frequency of each of a plurality of effect modes that the suggestive effect can take.

The techniques described in the above-described fourth embodiment and modification can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 4-1-1]
A lottery means for executing a lottery to determine whether or not the player can shift from the normal game to the special game, which is advantageous to the player, in response to a predetermined game operation.
Special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result showing that the lottery means can shift to the special game,
Setting changing means for changing to one of a plurality of settings which may have different game advantages,
Storage means for storing the set value set by the setting change means,
When the special game ends in an advantageous period, which is a period in which a game state advantageous to the player continues, a production control unit capable of executing a normal production having a content that matches the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period. When,
Equipped with
When the special game ends in the advantageous period, the effect control unit does not store the normal effect at a predetermined probability, but the effect that is inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period, and stores the effect. A gaming machine that can be executed as a setting suggesting effect that suggests the setting value stored in the means.
According to this gaming machine, when the special game is finished in the advantageous period, the normal effect of the content that matches the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period and the content that does not match the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period By making it possible to selectively execute the setting suggestion effect, even if the gaming machine is set at a low level, it is possible to execute a normal effect with the same content as when the gaming machine is set at a high level, which may lead to an increase in game motivation. it can.

[Aspect 4-1-2]
Aspect 4 configured such that the probability that the effect control unit executes the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the setting value stored in the storage unit may differ depending on the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period 4- The gaming machine described in 1-1.
According to this gaming machine, by changing the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value according to the number of times of execution of the special game in the advantageous period, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in the advantageous period. Further, for example, if the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value is increased as the number of times of execution of the special game increases in the advantageous period, the set value is correctly suggested as a privilege for continuing the advantageous period. A setting suggestion effect can be provided.

[Aspect 4-1-3]
A lottery means for executing a lottery to determine whether or not the player can shift from the normal game to the special game, which is advantageous to the player, in response to a predetermined game operation.
Special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result showing that the lottery means can shift to the special game,
Setting changing means for changing to one of a plurality of settings which may have different game advantages,
Storage means for storing the set value set by the setting change means,
When the special game ends in an advantageous period, which is a period in which a game state advantageous to the player continues, a production control unit capable of executing a normal production having a content that matches the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period. When,
Equipped with
The effect control means further executes not the normal effect, but an effect whose content is inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period, as a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value stored in the storage means. Is possible,
When the special game in the advantageous period ends, it is possible to execute either the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect with a predetermined probability, and when performing either the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect In the gaming machine, the probability of selectively executing the setting suggestion effect is increased according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period.
According to this gaming machine, when the special game ends in the advantageous period, the special game is won in the advantageous period by increasing the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period. It is possible to provide a setting suggestion effect as a privilege to the.

[Aspect 4-2-1]
A lottery means for executing a lottery to determine whether or not the player can shift from the normal game to the special game, which is advantageous to the player, in response to a predetermined game operation.
Special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result showing that the lottery means can shift to the special game,
Setting changing means for changing to one of a plurality of settings which may have different game advantages,
Storage means for storing the set value set by the setting change means,
When the advantageous period, which is a period in which the game state advantageous to the player continues, ends, an effect control unit capable of executing a normal effect having contents that match the number of times of execution of the special game in the advantageous period,
Equipped with
When the advantageous period ends, the effect control unit stores, in the storage unit, an effect that is not consistent with the normal effect and has a content that is inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period with a predetermined probability. A gaming machine that can be executed as a setting suggestive effect that suggests a set value.
According to this gaming machine, when the advantageous period ends, a normal effect whose content matches the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period and a setting suggestion effect which does not match the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period By making it possible to selectively execute and, even when the gaming machine is set to a low level, a normal effect having the same content as when the gaming machine is set to a high level can be executed, which can lead to an increase in motivation for a game.

[Aspect 4-2-2]
Aspect 4 is configured so that the probability that the effect control unit executes the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the setting value stored in the storage unit may differ according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period. The game machine described in 2-1.
According to this gaming machine, by changing the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value according to the number of times of execution of the special game in the advantageous period, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in the advantageous period. Further, for example, if the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value is increased as the number of times of execution of the special game increases in the advantageous period, the set value is correctly suggested as a privilege for continuing the advantageous period. A setting suggestion effect can be provided.

[Aspect 5-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that is displaceable so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
A symbol display device that variably displays symbols for showing the result of the hit/miss determination,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a hit is stopped and displayed, special game control means for executing a special game which is in a more advantageous state for the player than a normal game,
As a game state relating to the easiness of entering the second starting opening in the normal game, there are a normal state and an easy entering state in which the easiness of entering the second starting opening is higher than the normal state, Specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the easy-to-enter state after the end of the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
An effect display device for displaying effects,
Production determination means for determining the production displayed on the production display device,
Equipped with
The effect determination means displays a special effect having a continuous content over one or more symbol variations for a predetermined period including the easy-to-enter state,
The effect determination means displays a first object and a second object for prompting the launch of a game ball aiming at the second starting opening in the easy-to-enter state.
The size of the second object is larger than the size of the first object,
The content of the first object does not change regardless of the number of held second lottery values,
The ball game machine, wherein the second object is switched between the display and non-display of the content suggesting the reserved number according to the reserved number of the second lottery value.
According to this ball game machine, the first object does not change the content that prompts the launch of the game ball aiming at the second starting opening during the easy entry state, so that the player can set the optimum launch direction of the game ball. You can continue to present. On the other hand, the second object, which is larger in size than the first object and is likely to attract the player's attention, is switched between the display and non-display of the content suggesting the reserved number in accordance with the reserved number of the second lottery value. It is difficult to understand that the symbol variation is performed once or more, and the special effect can be presented more effectively.

[Aspect 5-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that is displaceable so that entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
A win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the first starting opening or a second lottery value acquired upon entry of a ball into the second starting opening When,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
A symbol display device that variably displays symbols for showing the result of the hit/miss determination,
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving opening of the special winning opening,
When the game ball that entered the big winning hole during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the big winning hole, it is in a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game, and the big winning hole is opened. Special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of accompanying unit games,
An effect display device for displaying effects,
Production determination means for determining the production displayed on the production display device,
When there is a ball entering the second starting opening, regardless of whether or not the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery value acquired upon the entry of the ball is immediately started, the entry is acquired upon the entry of the ball. In the case where the result of the judgment on the basis of the selected second lottery value is executed is a win, advance judgment information indicating that the change is a win in the variation corresponding to the entry can be notified to the effect determination means. Determination means,
Equipped with
When the pre-determination information indicates that the lottery value for the small hit is being held, the effect determination means is advantageous before the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery value for the small hit is started. A display that suggests a transition to a different state is displayed, and while a variable display of symbols based on a lottery value that is held before the lottery value that is the small win is displayed, a predetermined number that suggests a transition to the advantageous state A ball game machine characterized by continuing to display the object.
According to this ball-and-ball game machine, after displaying an effect suggesting a small hit (shift to an advantageous state) in the hold by so-called look-ahead, the variable stop of the deviation hold until reaching the hold that becomes the small hit ( The player can prevent the player from mistakenly recognizing that there is no small hit.

[Aspect 5-3]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination based on a lottery value acquired upon entry into the starting opening,
A symbol display device that variably displays symbols for showing the result of the hit/miss determination,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a hit is stopped and displayed, special game control means for executing a special game which is in a more advantageous state for the player than a normal game,
An effect display device for displaying effects,
Production determination means for determining the production displayed on the production display device,
Equipped with
The effect determination means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, shifts to a state in which the special effect can be displayed,
The special effect is an effect in which a plurality of types of individual effects are displayed in a predetermined order over a plurality of symbol variations,
When the final individual effect of the special effect is displayed, the effect determination means does not display the special effect until the predetermined condition is satisfied again, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied again, the special effect A ball-and-ball game machine characterized by shifting to a state in which can be displayed again.
According to this ball game machine, it is possible to realize the control in which the special effect is shown only once when the predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, frequent occurrences of game machine information (description of works to be tied up, etc.) and character introductions that are not related to the jackpot expectation as a special effect may make the player feel annoyed. According to the present invention, such an effect unrelated to the jackpot expectation degree can be shown only once when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Aspect 5-4]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination based on a lottery value acquired upon entry into the starting opening,
A symbol display device that variably displays symbols for showing the result of the hit/miss determination,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a hit is stopped and displayed, special game control means for executing a special game which is in a more advantageous state for the player than a normal game,
An effect display device for displaying effects,
Production determination means for determining the production displayed on the production display device,
Equipped with
The effect determination means, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, shifts to a state in which a special effect performed over a plurality of symbol variations can be displayed,
After the transition to the state where the special effect can be displayed, the effect determination means does not display at least some other effects until a predetermined ending condition of the special effect is satisfied. Ball game machine.
According to this ball game machine, it is possible to intensively present the player with a special effect over a plurality of times of symbol variations, when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The special effect may be, for example, game machine information (explanation of the work to be tied up) or character introduction. By presenting it without any delay, it becomes easier to deepen the understanding of the player and enhance the fun of the game. it can.

[Aspect 5-5-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A first winning/judging determination means for executing a first winning/winning determination based on a first lottery value acquired with the entry into the first starting opening as a trigger;
A second win/loss determination means for performing a second win/loss determination based on a second lottery value acquired upon the entry of the ball into the second starting opening;
First display control means for variably displaying a first special symbol showing the result of the first winning/absence determination,
Second display control means for variably displaying a second special symbol indicating the result of the second winning/absence determination,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the variable display start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing that the result of the first hit determination is a hit, and the second special symbol is the result of the second hit determination Special game control means for executing a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the stop display is performed in a manner indicating that the hit is achieved,
An effect display device for displaying effects,
Effect determination means for causing the effect display device to display a variable effect of a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol,
Equipped with
When the second lottery value is held by the holding control means, the first display control means reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning/disapproval determination, while the second display control means Starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning/absence determination regardless of whether or not the first lottery value is held by the holding control means,
A special effect period during which a special effect is displayed as a variable effect with respect to the suspension of the second lottery value is defined,
When the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the special effect period, when the number of held second lottery values is a predetermined value, the number of held second lottery values is the predetermined value. A ball game machine characterized in that the production pattern of the special production is determined by using a production pattern determination standard different from the case.
According to this ball-and-ball game machine, it is possible to display an effect according to a predetermined effect pattern with a specific change in a period during which a special effect is executed (special effect period). For example, in the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol which is started when the number of held second lottery values is 0 in the special effect period, the effect according to a predetermined effect pattern is displayed. You can
[Aspect 5-5-2]
Further provided with a specific game control means,
The second starting opening has a ball entry variation mechanism that is displaceable so as to change a game ball into a relatively easy state from a relatively difficult state,
The specific game control means, as a game state relating to the easiness of entering the second starting opening in the normal game, a normal state and a sphere where the easiness of entering the second starting opening is higher than the normal state. Having an easy state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the game state of the normal game after the special game is finished is transferred to the easy entry state,
The ball game machine according to Aspect 5-5-1, wherein the special effect period is a predetermined game period in the normal state.
According to this aspect, it is possible to display the effect according to the predetermined effect pattern with a specific change in the normal state which is not the easy-to-enter state. As a result, it becomes easy to enhance the interest of the game even in the normal state.

[Aspect 5-6]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A first winning/judging determination means for executing a first winning/winning determination based on a first lottery value acquired with the entry into the first starting opening as a trigger;
A second win/loss determination means for performing a second win/loss determination based on a second lottery value acquired upon the entry of the ball into the second starting opening;
First display control means for variably displaying a first special symbol showing the result of the first winning/absence determination,
Second display control means for variably displaying a second special symbol indicating the result of the second winning/absence determination,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the variable display start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing that the result of the first hit determination is a hit, and the second special symbol is the result of the second hit determination Special game control means for executing a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the stop display is performed in a manner indicating that the hit is achieved,
An effect display device for displaying effects,
Effect determination means for causing the effect display device to display a variable effect of a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol,
Equipped with
When the second lottery value is held by the holding control means, the first display control means reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning/disapproval determination, while the second display control means Starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning/absence determination regardless of whether or not the first lottery value is held by the holding control means,
A special effect period during which a special effect is displayed as a variable effect with respect to the suspension of the second lottery value is defined,
When the variable display start of the second special symbol in the special effect period is a predetermined number of hold quantity of the second lottery value, and the predetermined permission condition is satisfied, the effect determination means, 2. A ball game machine, characterized in that an effect pattern for the special effect is determined using an effect pattern determination standard different from the case where the number of held lottery values is not the predetermined value.
According to this ball-and-ball game machine, it is possible to display an effect according to a predetermined effect pattern with a specific change in a period (special effect period) during which a special effect is executed. Further, by determining whether or not the permission condition is satisfied, it is possible to display an effect according to a predetermined effect pattern at a timing intended by the designer even in an irregular situation.

11 1st starting opening, 12 2nd starting opening, 60 performance display device, 20 big winning opening, 221 1st winning/unlocking determination means, 222 2nd winning/unlocking determination means, 240 hold control means, 260 special game control means, 265 small hit Game control means, 270 specific game control means, 303 effect determination means, 304 effect control means, 500 Pachinko game machine.

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A second starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
A first winning/judging determination means for executing a first winning/winning determination based on a first lottery value acquired with the entry into the first starting opening as a trigger;
A second win/loss determination means for performing a second win/loss determination based on a second lottery value acquired upon the entry of the ball into the second starting opening;
First display control means for variably displaying a first special symbol showing the result of the first winning/absence determination,
Second display control means for variably displaying a second special symbol indicating the result of the second winning/absence determination,
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the variable display start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the win/fail judgment,
When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing that the result of the first hit determination is a hit, and the second special symbol is the result of the second hit determination Special game control means for executing a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the stop display is performed in a manner indicating that the hit is achieved,
An effect display device for displaying effects,
Effect determination means for causing the effect display device to display a variable effect of a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol,
Equipped with
When the second lottery value is held by the holding control means, the first display control means reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning/disapproval determination, while the second display control means Starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning/absence determination regardless of whether or not the first lottery value is held by the holding control means,
A special effect period during which a special effect is displayed as a variable effect with respect to the suspension of the second lottery value is defined,
When the variable display start of the second special symbol in the special effect period is a predetermined number of hold quantity of the second lottery value, and the predetermined permission condition is satisfied, the effect determination means, 2. A ball game machine, characterized in that an effect pattern for the special effect is determined using an effect pattern determination standard different from the case where the number of held lottery values is not the predetermined value.

Images